71.0402 General Construction - Substructures - Assembly

Long Phu 1 Power Plant
General Construction Substructures

172929.71.0402
Document Number:
LP1-B&V-00UXD-C-C3-SPC-710402
27-Oct-11
Issued for Client Review
MEH
DAJ
JPC
Rev
Date
Description
PREP
CHK
APP
Table of Contents
01500 - Technical Scope and System Performance Requirements ....................................................... 1
01500.1 Scope of Work ............................................................................................................................ 1
01500.2 Drawings and Technical Attachments........................................................................................ 2
01500.2.1 Engineers Attachments ...................................................................................................... 2
02160 - Cement-Stabilized Soil .................................................................................................................. 3
02160.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 3
02160.1.1 Scope of Supply .................................................................................................................. 3
02160.1.2 Items Furnished by Others and Interfaces.......................................................................... 3
02160.1.3 Performance and Design Requirements............................................................................. 3
02160.1.4 Codes and Standards ......................................................................................................... 3
02160.1.5 Materials.............................................................................................................................. 3
02160.1.6 Acceptable Manufacturers of Components......................................................................... 4
02160.1.7 Test Requirements.............................................................................................................. 4
02160.1.8 Technical Attachments........................................................................................................ 4
02160.1.9 Supplemental Specifications ............................................................................................... 4
02160.2 Products ..................................................................................................................................... 4
02160.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................... 4
02160.2.2 Drawings and Data ............................................................................................................. 5
02160.2.3 Testing ................................................................................................................................ 5
02160.2.4 Testing by Client ................................................................................................................. 5
02160.2.5 Materials............................................................................................................................... 5
02160.2.6 Test Section ........................................................................................................................ 5
02160.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................... 5
02160.3.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 5
02160.3.2 Subgrade Preparation ......................................................................................................... 5
02160.3.3 Cement-Stabilized Soil Mix Design..................................................................................... 6
02160.3.4 Preparation and Placement ................................................................................................ 6
02160.3.5 Compaction ......................................................................................................................... 6
02160.3.6 Finishing .............................................................................................................................. 6
02160.3.7 Construction Joints ............................................................................................................. 7
02160.3.8 Curing.................................................................................................................................. 7
02160.3.9 Maintenance ....................................................................................................................... 7
02220 - Earthwork ....................................................................................................................................... 8
02220.1 General....................................................................................................................................... 8
02220.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................... 8
02220.1.2 Items Furnished by Others and Interfaces.......................................................................... 8
02220.1.3 Performance and Design Requirements............................................................................. 8
02220.1.4 Codes and Standards ......................................................................................................... 8
02220.1.5 Materials.............................................................................................................................. 8
02220.1.6 Acceptable Manufacturers of Components......................................................................... 8
02220.1.7 Test Requirements.............................................................................................................. 9
02220.1.8 Technical Attachments...................................................................................................... 10
02220.1.9 Supplemental Specifications ............................................................................................. 10
02220.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 10
02220.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 10
02220.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 10
02220.3.2 Sheeting and Shoring ....................................................................................................... 10
02220.3.3 Removal of Water ............................................................................................................. 10
02220.3.4 Blasting ............................................................................................................................. 11
02220.3.5 Classification of Excavated Materials ............................................................................... 11
02220.3.6 Freezing Weather Restrictions ......................................................................................... 12
02220.3.7 Preservation of Trees........................................................................................................ 12
02220.3.8 Maintenance of Traffic ...................................................................................................... 12
02220.3.9 Unauthorized Excavation .................................................................................................. 12
02220.3.10 Testing ............................................................................................................................ 12

02220.3.11 Site Preparation .............................................................................................................. 12
02220.3.12 Roadway Roadbeds........................................................................................................ 13
02220.3.13 Fills and Embankments................................................................................................... 13
02220.3.14 Structure Excavation ....................................................................................................... 14
02220.3.15 Structure Subgrades ....................................................................................................... 14
02220.3.16 Structural Fill ................................................................................................................... 14
02220.3.17 Structure Backfill ............................................................................................................. 14
02220.3.18 Compacted Rock Fill ....................................................................................................... 15
02220.3.19 Compacted Sand Fill....................................................................................................... 15
02220.3.20 Drainage Fills .................................................................................................................. 15
02220.3.21 Controlled Low Strength Material .................................................................................... 15
02220.3.22 Maintenance and Restoration of Fills, Embankments, and Backfills .............................. 15
02220.3.23 Final Grading .................................................................................................................. 15
02220.3.24 Disposal of Materials....................................................................................................... 16
02220.3.25 Existing Underground Utilities ......................................................................................... 16
02315 - Trenching...................................................................................................................................... 23
02315.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 23
02315.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 23
02315.1.2 Items Furnished by Others and Interfaces........................................................................ 23
02315.1.3 Performance and Design Requirements........................................................................... 23
02315.1.4 Codes and Standards ....................................................................................................... 23
02315.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 23
02315.1.6 Not Used ........................................................................................................................... 23
02315.1.7 Test Requirements............................................................................................................ 23
02315.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 24
02315.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 24
02315.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 24
02315.3.2 Sheeting and Shoring ....................................................................................................... 25
02315.3.3 Removal of Water ............................................................................................................. 25
02315.3.4 Blasting ............................................................................................................................. 25
02315.3.5 Classification of Excavated Materials ............................................................................... 25
02315.3.6 Freezing Weather Restrictions ......................................................................................... 25
02315.3.7 Preservation of Trees........................................................................................................ 25
02315.3.8 Maintenance of Traffic ...................................................................................................... 25
02315.3.9 Unauthorized Excavation .................................................................................................. 25
02315.3.10 Testing ............................................................................................................................ 25
02315.3.11 Trench Subgrades .......................................................................................................... 25
02315.3.12 Pipe Trench Excavation .................................................................................................. 25
02315.3.13 Pipe Embedment ............................................................................................................ 26
02315.3.14 Trench Backfill ................................................................................................................ 27
02315.3.15 Duct Bank Trenching ...................................................................................................... 27
02315.3.16 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 27
02315.3.17 Pipe Casing Under Roadways ........................................................................................ 27
02315.3.18 Maintenance and Restoration of Trench Backfills .......................................................... 28
02315.3.19 Final Grading .................................................................................................................. 28
02315.3.20 Disposal of Materials....................................................................................................... 28
02371 - Seeding and Sodding .................................................................................................................. 32
02371.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 32
02371.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 32
02371.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 32
02371.1.6 Approved Manufacturers of Components ......................................................................... 32

02371.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 32
02371.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 32
02371.3.1 Sodding ............................................................................................................................. 32
02371.3.2 Seeding ............................................................................................................................. 33
02371.3.3 Fertilizer ............................................................................................................................ 33
02371.3.4 Mulch................................................................................................................................. 33
02371.3.5 Seed .................................................................................................................................. 33
02371.3.6 Topsoil................................................................................................................................ 33
02371.3.7 Guarantee .......................................................................................................................... 34
02371.3.8 Watering ............................................................................................................................ 34
02371.3.9 Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 34
02375 - Riprap ............................................................................................................................................ 35
02375.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 35
02375.1.1 Scope of Supply ................................................................................................................ 35
02375.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 35
02375.1.6 Acceptable Manufacturers of Components....................................................................... 36
02375.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 36
02375.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 36
02375.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 36
02375.3.2 Control Testing .................................................................................................................. 36
02375.3.3 Materials............................................................................................................................ 36
02375.3.4 Reference Samples .......................................................................................................... 37
02375.3.5 Preliminary Review ........................................................................................................... 37
02375.3.6 Placement ......................................................................................................................... 38
02541 - Oil/Water Separators/Underground Tanks ................................................................................ 40
02541.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 40
02541.1.1 Scope of Supply ................................................................................................................ 40
02541.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 40
02541.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 41
02541.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 41
02541.2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers ................................................................................................ 41
02541.2.3 Material ............................................................................................................................. 41
02541.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 41
02541.3.1 Installation ......................................................................................................................... 41
02581 - Electrical Manholes ..................................................................................................................... 42
02581.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 42
02581.1.1 Scope of Supply ................................................................................................................ 42
02581.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 43
02581.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 45
02581.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 45
02581.2.2 Design ............................................................................................................................... 46
02581.2.3 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 46
02581.2.4 Precast Concrete Fabrication ........................................................................................... 46
02581.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 47
02581.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 47
02581.3.2 Construction ...................................................................................................................... 47
02621 - Geosynthetic Drainage Layer ..................................................................................................... 48
02621.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 48
02621.1.1 Scope of Supply ................................................................................................................ 48
02621.1.4 Materials............................................................................................................................ 48
02621.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 49
02621.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 50
02621.2.2 Drawings and Data ........................................................................................................... 50
02621.2.3 Materials............................................................................................................................ 50
02621.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 50
02621.3.1 Subgrade Preparation ....................................................................................................... 50
02621.3.2 Delivery and Storage ........................................................................................................ 50
02621.3.3 Geocomposite Installation................................................................................................. 50
02621.3.4 Seaming ............................................................................................................................ 51
02621.3.5 Field Quality Control ......................................................................................................... 51
02622 - Plant Drain Piping (Gravity Piping) ............................................................................................ 54
02622.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 54
02622.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 54
02622.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 55
02622.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 56
02622.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 56
02622.2.2 Materials............................................................................................................................ 56
02622.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 57
02622.3.1 Handling ............................................................................................................................ 57
02622.3.2 General Pipe Installation Requirements ........................................................................... 57
02622.3.3 Alignment .......................................................................................................................... 57
02622.3.4 Laying Pipe ....................................................................................................................... 58
02622.3.5 Jointing .............................................................................................................................. 58
02622.3.6 Concrete Encasement ...................................................................................................... 58
02622.3.7 Testing .............................................................................................................................. 59
02623 - Culverts and Storm Drain Piping ............................................................................................... 60
02623.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 60
02623.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 60

02623.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 61
02623.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 62
02623.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 62
02623.2.2 Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (CHDPE) Pipe .................................................... 62
02623.2.3 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe .......................................................................... 63
02623.2.4 Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) and Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts ....................... 63
02623.2.5 Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP) .......................................................................................... 63
02623.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 64
02623.3.1 Unloading and Handling.................................................................................................... 64
02623.3.2 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................ 64
02623.3.3 Trenching and Embedment............................................................................................... 64
02623.3.4 Laying Pipe ....................................................................................................................... 64
02623.3.5 Jointing .............................................................................................................................. 65
02623.3.6 Testing .............................................................................................................................. 65
02631 - Manholes and Catch Basins ....................................................................................................... 66
02631.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 66
02631.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 66
02631.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 67
02631.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 69
02631.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 69
02631.2.2 Drawings ........................................................................................................................... 69
02631.2.3 Precast Concrete Fabrication ........................................................................................... 69
02631.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 70
02631.3.1 Construction ...................................................................................................................... 70
02631.3.2 Waterproofing ................................................................................................................... 71
02731 Aggregate Roads and Area Aggregate Surfacing ................................................................... 72
02731.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 72
02731.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 72
02731.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 72
02731.1.6 Not Used ........................................................................................................................... 74
02731.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 74
02731.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 74
02731.2.2 Source ............................................................................................................................... 75
02731.2.3 Aggregate Surfacing Material ........................................................................................... 75
02731.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 75
02731.3.1 Protection of Subgrade ..................................................................................................... 75
02731.3.2 Subgrade Preparation ....................................................................................................... 75
02731.3.3 Application ........................................................................................................................ 75

02731.3.4 Dust Palliative ................................................................................................................... 76
02731.3.5 Sampling and Testing ....................................................................................................... 76
02731.3.6 Weed Eradicator and Soil Fumigant ................................................................................. 76
02771 - Curbs, Combination Curbs and Gutters, and Sidewalks ......................................................... 77
02771.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 77
02771.1.1 Scope of Supply ................................................................................................................ 77
02771.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 77
02771.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 78
02771.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 78
02771.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 78
02771.3.2 Subgrades ......................................................................................................................... 78
02771.3.3 Forms ................................................................................................................................ 79
02771.3.4 Joints ................................................................................................................................. 79
02771.3.5 Finishing ............................................................................................................................ 80
02771.3.6 Curing and Protection ....................................................................................................... 80
02771.3.7 Sidewalk Electric Heating ................................................................................................. 80
02771.3.8 Precast Concrete Bumpers ............................................................................................... 80
03210 - Concrete Reinforcement ............................................................................................................. 81
03210.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 81
03210.1.1 Scope of Supply ................................................................................................................ 81
03210.1.3 Performance Requirements .............................................................................................. 81
03210.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 82
03210.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 83
03210.2.1 Work Included Under These Specifications ...................................................................... 83
03210.2.2 Materials............................................................................................................................ 83
03210.2.3 Placement Drawings and Bar Lists ................................................................................... 83
03210.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 84
03311 - Cast-in-Place Concrete ............................................................................................................... 85
03311.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 85
03311.1.1 Scope of Work .................................................................................................................. 85
03311.1.5 Materials............................................................................................................................ 86
03311.2 Products ................................................................................................................................... 88
03311.3 Execution ................................................................................................................................. 88
03311.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 88
03311.3.2 Placement of Steel Reinforcement ................................................................................... 88
03311.3.3 Formwork .......................................................................................................................... 89

03311.3.4 Embedments ..................................................................................................................... 89
03311.3.5 Placement ......................................................................................................................... 90
03311.3.6 Joints ................................................................................................................................. 92
03311.3.7 Openings in Concrete ....................................................................................................... 93
03311.3.8 Finishing Formed Surfaces ............................................................................................... 93
03311.3.9 Finishing Unformed Surfaces ........................................................................................... 93
03311.3.10 Separate Finishes ........................................................................................................... 94
03311.3.11 Curing.............................................................................................................................. 94
03311.3.12 Floor Sealer .................................................................................................................... 95
03311.3.13 Repairing Defective Concrete ......................................................................................... 95
03311.3.14 Duct Banks ...................................................................................................................... 95
03311.3.15 Tolerances ...................................................................................................................... 95
03311.3.16 Field Control Testing ....................................................................................................... 96
03316 - Concrete Supply .......................................................................................................................... 98
03316.1 General..................................................................................................................................... 98
03316.1.1 Scope of Supply ................................................................................................................ 98
03316.1.4 Codes and Standards ..................................................................................................... 100
03316.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 101
03316.1.6 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 101
03316.1.7 Test Requirements.......................................................................................................... 101
03316.1.8 Technical Attachments.................................................................................................... 102
03316.1.9 Supplemental Specifications ........................................................................................... 102
03316.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 103
03316.2.1 Work Included Under These Specifications .................................................................... 103
03316.2.2 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 103
03316.2.3 Limiting Requirements .................................................................................................... 103
03316.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 106
03316.3.1 Proportioning ................................................................................................................... 106
03316.3.2 Batching .......................................................................................................................... 107
03316.3.3 Mixing .............................................................................................................................. 107
03316.3.4 Delivery ........................................................................................................................... 107
03316.3.5 Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete......................................................................... 108
03611 Grouting for Pile Heads ............................................................................................................ 110
03611.1 General................................................................................................................................... 110
03611.1.1 Scope of Work ................................................................................................................ 110
03611.1.2 Items Furnished by Others and Interfaces...................................................................... 110
03611.1.3 Performance and Design Requirements......................................................................... 110
03611.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 110
03611.1.6 Approved Manufacturers of Components ....................................................................... 111
03611.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 112
03611.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 112
03611.3.1 Baseplate Grouting ......................................................................................................... 112
03611.3.2 Surface Preparation ........................................................................................................ 112
03611.3.3 Alignment and Leveling................................................................................................... 112
03611.3.4 Mixing .............................................................................................................................. 112
03611.3.5 Placement ....................................................................................................................... 112
03611.3.6 Cementitious Grout ......................................................................................................... 112
09900 - Field Applied Protective Coatings ........................................................................................... 113
09900.1 General................................................................................................................................... 113
09900.1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 113

09900.1.3 Coating Applications and Material Requirements ........................................................... 113
09900.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 115
09900.1.10 Submittals ..................................................................................................................... 116
09900.1.11 Quality Assurance ......................................................................................................... 117
09900.1.12 Warranty ....................................................................................................................... 117
09900.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 117
09900.2.1 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 117
09900.2.2 Approved Manufacturers................................................................................................. 117
09900.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 117
09900.3.1 Surface Preparation ........................................................................................................ 117
09900.3.2 Mixing and Thinning ........................................................................................................ 119
09900.3.3 Application ...................................................................................................................... 119
09900.3.4 Protection of Surfaces..................................................................................................... 119
09900.3.5 Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................... 120
09900.3.6 Field Quality Control ....................................................................................................... 120
13110 - Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection ...................................................................................... 122
13110.1 General................................................................................................................................... 122
13110.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 122
13110.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 122
13110.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 122
13110.2.1 Galvanic Anodes ............................................................................................................. 122
13110.2.2 Aboveground Test Stations ............................................................................................ 123
13110.2.3 Test Station Identification Tags ...................................................................................... 123
13110.2.4 Copper Sulfate Reference Electrodes ............................................................................ 123
13110.2.5 Exothermal Welding Materials ........................................................................................ 123
13110.2.6 Exothermal Weld Coating Repair Materials .................................................................... 123
13110.2.7 Compression Ring-Tongue Terminals ............................................................................ 123
13110.2.8 Cathodic Protection Cable .............................................................................................. 123
13110.2.9 Nondetectable Underground Marking Tape.................................................................... 124
13110.2.10 Wire and Cable Markers ............................................................................................... 124
13110.2.11 Marking Pens ................................................................................................................ 124
13110.2.12 Solder ............................................................................................................................ 124
13110.2.13 Insulated Flange Kits .................................................................................................... 124
13110.2.14 Insulated Flange Identification Tags ............................................................................. 124
13110.2.15 Polyethylene Mesh........................................................................................................ 124
13110.2.16 Silver Brazing Materials ................................................................................................ 125
13110.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 125
13110.3.1 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 125
13110.3.2 Testing ............................................................................................................................ 127
13902 - Fire Protection Systems ............................................................................................................ 131
13902.1 General................................................................................................................................... 131
13902.1.1 Scope of Work ................................................................................................................ 131

13902.1.3 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 131
13902.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 132
13902.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 133
13902.2.1 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 133
13902.2.2 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 133
13902.2.3 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 133
13902.2.4 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 133
13902.2.5 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 133
13902.2.6 Fire Equipment................................................................................................................ 133
13902.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 133
15225 - General Service Pipe ................................................................................................................. 135
15225.1 General................................................................................................................................... 135
15225.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 135
15225.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 139
15225.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 143
15225.2.1 Piping Material Requirements ......................................................................................... 143
15225.2.2 Tubing ............................................................................................................................. 144
15225.2.3 Fittings............................................................................................................................. 145
15225.2.4 Flanges ........................................................................................................................... 146
15225.2.5 Gaskets ........................................................................................................................... 147
15225.2.6 Bolting ............................................................................................................................. 147
15225.2.7 Unions ............................................................................................................................. 147
15225.2.8 Coating and Wrapping of Pipe To Be Installed Underground......................................... 147
15225.2.9 Cleaning .......................................................................................................................... 147
15225.2.10 Coatings ........................................................................................................................ 149
15225.2.11 Jointing Materials and Tools ......................................................................................... 149
15225.2.12 Preparation for Shipment .............................................................................................. 149
15225.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 150
15226 - Underground Pressure Piping.................................................................................................. 151
15226.1 Schedule of Submittals after Purchase Order Award ............................................................ 151
15226.2 Codes and Standards ............................................................................................................ 151
15226.3 Material Specifications ........................................................................................................... 152
15226.4 General Material Descriptions ................................................................................................ 153
15226.4.1 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings .......................................................................................... 153
15226.4.2 High Density Polyethylene Fittings ................................................................................. 154
15226.4.3 Carbon and Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings ................................................................ 154
15226.4.4 Steel Flanges .................................................................................................................. 155
15226.5 Coating of Pipe to be Installed Underground ......................................................................... 155
15226.6 Cleaning ................................................................................................................................. 155
15226.7 Weld End Coatings ................................................................................................................ 155
15226.8 Preparation for Shipment ....................................................................................................... 155
15270 - Cast Iron Valves ......................................................................................................................... 156
15270.1 General................................................................................................................................... 156
15270.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 156

15270.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 156
15270.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 157
15270.2.1 Special Features ............................................................................................................. 157
15270.2.2 Painting ........................................................................................................................... 158
15270.2.3 Installation Instructions ................................................................................................... 158
15270.2.4 Identification .................................................................................................................... 158
15270.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 158
15921 - Piping Erection........................................................................................................................... 159
15921.1 General................................................................................................................................... 159
15921.1.1 Scope of Work ................................................................................................................ 159
15921.1.5 Materials.......................................................................................................................... 161
15921.1.6 Acceptable Subsuppliers ................................................................................................ 161
15921.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 162
15921.2.1 Pipeline List ..................................................................................................................... 162
15921.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 162
15921.3.1 Welding ........................................................................................................................... 163
15921.3.2 Miscellaneous Piping ...................................................................................................... 163
15921.3.3 Temporary Piping............................................................................................................ 163
15921.3.4 Piping in Existing Areas .................................................................................................. 164
15921.3.5 Alterations and Cut-ins.................................................................................................... 164
15921.3.6 Thermal Expansion ......................................................................................................... 164
15921.3.7 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 165
15921.3.8 Cutting and Drilling Structures ........................................................................................ 165
15921.3.9 Equipment Connections .................................................................................................. 165
15921.3.10 Valve Installation ........................................................................................................... 166
15921.3.11 Not Used ....................................................................................................................... 167
15921.3.12 Not Used ....................................................................................................................... 167
15921.3.13 Making Flanged Connections ....................................................................................... 167
15921.3.14 Hot Tap Branch Connections ........................................................................................ 167
15921.3.15 Traps ............................................................................................................................. 167
15921.3.16 Miscellaneous Small Connections ................................................................................ 167
15921.3.17 Damage to Machined Surfaces .................................................................................... 167
15921.3.18 Piping Isolation.............................................................................................................. 168
15921.3.19 Not Used ....................................................................................................................... 168
15921.3.20 Flexible Weatherproofing .............................................................................................. 168
15921.3.21 Penetration Seals.......................................................................................................... 168
15921.3.22 Drainlines ...................................................................................................................... 168
15921.3.23 Protective Coatings ....................................................................................................... 169
15921.3.24 Underground Piping ...................................................................................................... 170
15921.3.25 Concrete Pipe Installation ............................................................................................. 171
15921.3.26 Mechanical Joint Pipe Installation................................................................................. 172
15921.3.27 Push-on Joint Pipe Installation ..................................................................................... 172
15921.3.28 Installation of Restrained Push-on Joint Pipe ............................................................... 172

15921.3.29 Nonmetallic Pipe Installation ......................................................................................... 172
15921.3.30 Underwater Installation of Piping .................................................................................. 173
15921.3.31 Testing .......................................................................................................................... 173
15921.3.32 Cleaning of Pipe............................................................................................................ 175
15921.3.33 Not Used ....................................................................................................................... 175
15921.3.34 Sterilization of Equipment and Piping ........................................................................... 175
15921.3.35 Final Adjustment ........................................................................................................... 176
15921.3.36 Not Used ....................................................................................................................... 176
15921.3.37 Not Used ........................................................................................................................ 176
16920 - Raceway Components and Installation ................................................................................... 177
16920.1 General................................................................................................................................... 177
16920.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 177
16920.1.5 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 177
16920.1.6 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 177
16920.1.7 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 177
16920.2 Not Used ................................................................................................................................ 178
16920.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 178
16920.3.1 General Installation Requirements ................................................................................. 178
16920.3.2 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 178
16920.3.3 Conduit Components ...................................................................................................... 178
16920.3.4 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 180
16920.3.5 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 180
16920.3.6 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 180
16920.3.7 Electrical Manhole Components ..................................................................................... 180
16920.3.8 Grout ............................................................................................................................... 181
16930 - Grounding Components and Installation ................................................................................ 182
16930.1 General................................................................................................................................... 182
16930.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 182
16930.1.5 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 182
16930.1.6 Not Used ......................................................................................................................... 182
16930.2 Products ................................................................................................................................. 182
16930.3 Execution ............................................................................................................................... 183
16930.3.1 Grounding Components .................................................................................................. 183
16930.3.2 Grounding Installation ..................................................................................................... 183
16930.3.3 Ground System Resistance ............................................................................................ 184
Attachments ............................................................................................................................................ 185
Attachment 1 - Technical Supplemental Specifications ........................................................................ 185
D100 Site Meteorological and Seismic Data ................................................................................... 185
D200 Design Ambients and HVAC Criteria ...................................................................................... 185
D300 Property Tables ...................................................................................................................... 185
E100 Wiring Methods, Cable, and Raceway ................................................................................... 185
E210 Electrical Enclosure Assemblies............................................................................................. 185
E220 Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas .............................................................................. 185
E230 Control Panel Receptaclesand Lights .................................................................................... 185
E300 Electronic Systems and Components .................................................................................... 185
E520 Terminal Blocks and Fuse Holders.......................................................................................... 185
E530 Electrical Accessories............................................................................................................. 185

Q100 General Welding Requirements ............................................................................................. 185
Q121 Welding of Carbon, Low Alloy, and Stainless Structural Steel .............................................. 185
Q123 Welding of Reinforcing Steel .................................................................................................. 185
Q210 Welding of Power Piping ........................................................................................................ 185
Q301 Manufacturer's Standard Coating .......................................................................................... 185
Q302 Company/Purchaser/Buyer Specified Exterior Shop Coating................................................ 185
Q303 Interior Coatings and Linings ................................................................................................. 185
Q310 Preservative Coatings ............................................................................................................ 185
S100 Seismic Design ....................................................................................................................... 185
81112-DS-0054 ..................................................................................................................................... 185
172929-DM-20S1 .................................................................................................................................. 185
81113-DM-0660 .................................................................................................................................... 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
General Construction - Substructures

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
01500 - Technical Scope and System Performance Requirements

01500.1 Scope of Work
The following table shall provide general guidance to the Contractor regarding work covered by this
construction specification and which commodities will be purchased and installed by the Contractor
versus which commodities are installation only.
Commodity quantities will be defined by the engineering drawings and lists.
Note: All material to be installed below grade shall be purchased and installed considering groundwater
has high chloride content and groundwater elevation is maximum +2.5 meters (per Hon Dau elevation
system).
Substructure/Underground Item
Applied Technical
Section
Item
purchased
and installed
by Contractor
under 71.0402
Cement for cement-stabilized soil
02160
Excavation - general and trenches
02220, 02315
Fill - general fill, structural fill, backfill,

rock fill, sand fill, drainage fill, etc.
02220, 02315
Pipe embedment
02315
Grading
02220, 02315, 02731
Roadway base and subbase
02220, 02731
Aggregate surfacing for parking and

misc areas
02731
Geosynthetics (geonets, geotextiles,

geocomposites, etc.)
02621
Seeding and Sodding
02371
Rip-Rap
02375
Oil/Water Separators
02541
Electrical manholes
02581
Drain piping (gravity)
02622
Storm water pipe and culverts
02623
Storm water manholes and catch

basins
02631
Curbs, gutters, and sidewalks
02771
Formwork for concrete
03311
Source: 01500, 2008, v.1.1
Item installed
by Contractor
under 71.0402,
but purchased
under a
separate
procurement
specification
Technical Scope and System Performance Requirements
Page 1 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Steel reinforcing for concrete
03210
Concrete
03316
Concrete curing materials
03311
Grout for pile heads
03611
Coating for Circ water pipe weld joints
09900
Coating for fire protection pipe weld

joints
09900
Coating for concrete chemical sumps
09900
Cathodic protection - passive type
13110
Cathodic protection - active type
13110
Fire Protection - hydrants
13902
Fire Protection Pipe underground
15225, 15226,
15921
Potable Water Pipe underground
15225, 15226, 15921
Compressed Air Pipe underground
15225, 15226, 15921
Circulating Water Pipe - underground
15226, 15921
Cast Iron valves- underground fire

protection
15270, 15921
Electrical conduit - underground
16920
Ductbank
16920
Electrical grounding system
16930
X
X
01500.2 Drawings and Technical Attachments

This article lists the drawings and other technical attachments that have been prepared for the work under
these specifications.
01500.2.1 Engineers Attachments
The following listed attachments shall be part of the technical information applicable to this scope.
Drawing No. or
Other
Designation
Rev.
No.
Attachment 1
Title
Technical Supplemental Specifications
81112-DS-0054
Pipe Embedment
172929-DM-20S1
Coating System Data Sheet
81113-DM-0660
Coating System Data Sheet System 2314
Source: 01500, 2008, v.1.1
Technical Scope and System Performance Requirements
Page 2 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02160 - Cement-Stabilized Soil

02160.1 General
02160.1.1 Scope of Supply
Scope of supply shall include materials and construction requirements for mixed-in-place cementstabilized soil for subgrades, embankments, slopes subject to erosion and other similar uses as specified
under these specifications.
02160.1.2 Items Furnished by Others and Interfaces
Not applicable.
02160.1.3 Performance and Design Requirements
Performance and design requirements for cement-stabilized soil are indicated in Articles 02160.2 and
02160.3.
02160.1.4 Codes and Standards
Work performed under these specifications shall be done in accordance with the following codes and
standards. Unless otherwise specified, the applicable governing edition and addenda to be used for all
references to codes or standards specified herein shall be interpreted to be the jurisdictionally approved
edition and addenda. If a code or standard is not jurisdictionally mandated, then the current edition and
addenda in effect at the date of this document shall apply. These references shall govern the work
except where they conflict with these specifications. In case of conflict, the latter shall govern to the
extent of such difference:
Work
In Accordance With
Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C150-2002
Test Method for Moisture-Density

Relations of Soil- Cement Mixtures
ASTM D558-1996
Method for Drop Test for Loaded

Containers by Freefall
ASTM D5276
Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics Using Modified Effort
ASTM D1557-2000
Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Rapid

Curing Type)
ASTM D2028-1997
Standard Test Method for Water Content

of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D3017
Standard Test Methods for Density of

Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D2922
02160.1.5 Materials
The following materials shall be used:
General
Component
Material
Cement
ASTM C150, Type II.
Source: 02160, 2010, v.1.2
Cement-Stabilized Soil
Page 3 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
General
Component
Material
Water
Clean and free from mud, oil, organic

matter, or other deleterious substances;
potable.
Cutback asphalt
ASTM D2028, Type RC-70.
Emulsified asphalt
ASTM D977-1998, Type SS-1.
02160.1.6 Acceptable Manufacturers of Components

Certified copies of Supplier's (source) test reports showing chemical composition and physical analysis
shall be submitted for each shipment delivered. Certification shall show that the cement complies with
these specifications. The certificate shall be signed by both the cement manufacturer and the Supplier.
02160.1.7 Test Requirements
The following testing shall be conducted in accordance with the specified source.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted
By
Cement-stabilized soil in-place

density
ASTM D2922
Contractor
Compressive strength at 7, 14,

and 28 days
ASTM C39
Contractor
Test Method for Moisture Density

Relations for Soil Cement
Mixtures
ASTM D558
Contractor
Cement-stabilized soil in-place

moisture
ASTM D3017
Contractor
Cement-stabilized soil test

section testing
ASTM D2922
Contractor
Construction testing
ASTM D2922
Contractor
02160.1.8 Technical Attachments

Not used.
02160.1.9 Supplemental Specifications
Not used.
02160.2 Products
02160.2.1 General
This article covers materials and requirements for mixed-in-place cement-stabilized soil.
The cement-stabilized soil shall consist of soil, cement, and water proportioned, mixed, and compacted to
form a dense, uniform mass conforming to the lines, grades, and typical sections indicated on the
drawings.
The cement content for the cement-stabilized soil shall be bid on the basis of 27 kilogram per square
meter of cement-stabilized soil.
Source: 02160, 2010, v.1.2
Page 4 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02160.2.2 Drawings and Data

A detailed description of the placing and mixing equipment shall be submitted in accordance with the
requirements of Article 02160.6.
02160.2.3 Testing
Field and laboratory testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the
Site QA Manager.
At least one field density and moisture determination shall be performed as specified in Article 02160.1.7
for each 800 square meters per lift of compacted material and at least one density and moisture per lift for
area less than 800 square meters of compacted material. Not less than two field density determinations
shall be made per day. Field samples shall be taken at locations selected by the Site QA Manager.
Maximum density for the compacted soil-cement materials shall be determined in accordance with ASTM
D558. The terms "maximum density" and "optimum moisture content" shall be as defined in ASTM D558.
The cement application rate for the compacted soil-cement materials shall be verified by spreading
cement over premeasured tarpaulins or dropcloths and weighing them.
The cement application rate shall be verified once for applications up to 4,000 square meters and once
each additional 4,000 square meters of soil stabilized.
A copy of each test result shall be furnished to the Site QA Manager within 24 hours of testing.
02160.2.4 Testing by Client
Not used.
02160.2.5 Materials
Materials used for the cement-stabilized soil shall be in accordance with Article 02160.1.5.
Weathertight bins shall be furnished for storage of bulk cement.
The cement shall be free from lumps and shall be undamaged when used in cement-stabilized soil. If the
cement in the storage bins becomes contaminated or is determined to be unsatisfactory, the bins shall be
emptied and cleaned and the cement replaced.
02160.2.6 Test Section
After finalization of the mix design the Contractor shall construct a test section using the plant, equipment,
and materials proposed for the work. The Contractor shall demonstrate the quality, efficiency, and
workability of the materials and equipment necessary for uninterrupted production and placement of
cement-stabilized soil. The Contractor shall use the personnel on the test section that will be directly
working on the project in order to familiarize themselves with the process and products.
The Contractor shall determine the number of roller passes required to achieve compaction as part of the
test section installation.
02160.3 Execution
02160.3.1 General
This section covers construction requirements including placing, mixing, compacting, finishing, curing and
maintaining for mixed-in-place cement-stabilized soil.
02160.3.2 Subgrade Preparation
Surficial material shall be removed to the depth required to expose the soil to be stabilized.
Source: 02160, 2010, v.1.2
Page 5 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02160.3.3 Cement-Stabilized Soil Mix Design

The cement-stabilized soil shall have a compressive strength of at least 2900 kPa unless a higher
strength is specified by the EPC Contractors Consultant after 7 days when tested in accordance with
ASTM D1633.
02160.3.4 Preparation and Placement
02160.3.4.1 Preparation. The soil-cement shall be mixed in place.
At the time of compaction, the soil shall be pulverized so 100 percent of the soil-cement mixture passes a
25.4 mm sieve and a minimum of 80 percent passes a No. 4 (4.75 mm) sieve, excluding gravel and
stone.
Soil-cement shall not be mixed or placed when the air temperature is below 4 C, unless the temperature
is at least 2 C and rising.
02160.3.4.2 Placement. The entire width of the area designated for stabilization shall be processed as
a single operation. The cement shall be spread uniformly on the subgrade at the required rate of
application by a method acceptable to the Site QA Manager. Cement that becomes displaced after
spreading shall be replaced before mixing is started.
Processing shall be performed in one lift to a loose depth of 200mm. The processing shall result in a
uniform distribution of cement and water at the specified density.
After the cement has been applied, mixing shall begin within 30 minutes. The soil and cement shall be
mixed until the cement has blended sufficiently with the soil to prevent formation of cement balls when
water is applied.
Immediately after soil and cement mixing is complete, the water required to obtain the specified
compaction shall be added. If the moisture content exceeds that specified, the mixture shall be worked
by remixing or blading to reduce the moisture content to within the specified range. Excessive
concentrations of water shall be avoided. During the application of water and after all mixing water has
been applied, mixing shall continue until a uniform and intimate mixture of soil, cement, and water is
obtained.
02160.3.5 Compaction
Compaction of the soil-cement shall begin immediately after mixing is completed. The start of compaction
of the soil-cement mixture shall begin within 30 minutes after the last moist-mixing pass is complete.
At the start of the compaction operation, the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized
soil lumps, based on dry weights, shall be within a tolerance of two percentage points of optimum
moisture content.
The optimum moisture content and maximum density shall be determined in the field by the methods
prescribed in ASTM D558 on representative samples of the soil-cement mixture obtained from the area
being processed.
The loose mixture shall be uniformly compacted to not less than 95 percent of maximum density. Material
compacted to less than 95 percent of maximum density shall be recompacted, removed, or replaced as
directed by the Site QA Manager.
02160.3.6 Finishing
After compaction is complete, the cement-stabilized soil surface shall be shaped to the required lines,
grades, and cross section. The subgrade shall be checked by the use of elevation stakes or other means
acceptable to the Site QA Manager. The resulting surface shall be compacted to the specified density.
Rolling shall continue until the entire grade conforms to the specified density requirements.
Source: 02160, 2010, v.1.2
Page 6 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
During the finishing operation, the moisture content of the surface material shall be maintained at not less
than two percentage points below its specified optimum moisture content. Surface compaction and
finishing shall produce a smooth, dense surface, free of compaction planes, cracks, ridges, and loose
material.
02160.3.7 Construction Joints
At the end of each day's construction, a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting
back into the completed work to form a vertical face.
02160.3.8 Curing
During the period when finishing and surface correction operations are being performed, the surface of
the cement-treated subgrade shall be kept continuously moist by sprinkling with water as necessary.
After finishing is complete, the cement-stabilized soil shall be protected from drying for 7 days by
application of cutback asphalt applied at the rate of 0.7 to 0.9 liters per square meter; or a mixture
containing equal parts of emulsified asphalt and water applied at the rate of 0.9 to 1.1 liters per square
meter; or a temporary earth or plastic cover. The rate of application shall provide complete coverage
without excessive runoff. At the time the bituminous material is applied, the surface shall be dense and
free of loose and extraneous material and shall contain sufficient moisture to prevent excessive
penetration of the bituminous material.
If it is necessary to allow construction equipment or other traffic to use the completed subgrade before the
bituminous material has cured sufficiently to prevent pickup or displacement, sand shall be applied to the
surface. Sand shall be applied at a rate of approximately 5.4 kilogram of clean sand per square meter.
02160.3.9 Maintenance
The cement-stabilized soil shall be maintained in its finished condition until all work is complete and
accepted by the Site QA Manager. Maintenance shall include immediate repair of any defects.
Source: 02160, 2010, v.1.2
Page 7 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02220 - Earthwork
02220.1 General
02220.1.1 Scope of Work
Scope of Work shall include completing earthwork and shall include other services as specified under
these technical specifications.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for earthwork are indicated in Article 02220.3.
standards. Unless otherwise specified, the applicable governing edition and addenda to be used for all
references to codes or standards specified herein shall be interpreted to be the jurisdictionally approved
edition and addenda. If a code or standard is not jurisdictionally mandated, then the current edition and
addenda in effect at the date of this document shall apply. These references shall govern the work
except where they conflict with these specifications. In case of conflict, the latter shall govern to the
Work
In Accordance With
Standard Practice for Classification of

Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System)
ASTM D2487
Standard Practice for Description and

Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual
Procedure)
ASTM D2488
02220.1.5 Materials
General
Component
Material
Standard Specification for Concrete

Aggregates
ASTM C33
Lime Treated Soil
Standard Specifications for Road and

Bridge Construction, Department of
Transportation

For the following components, the manufacturers listed below provide examples of the quality of
workmanship required by these specifications. Components by nonlisted manufacturers must equal or
exceed the performance of those listed:
Component
Manufacturer
Nuclear Surface Moisture-Density Gauge
Troxler Model 3430, 3440, 3450, 3451
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 8 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Nuclear Surface Moisture-Density Gauge
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Campbell Pacific Nuclear (CPN) Model

MC-3 and MC-1

The following testing shall be conducted in accordance with the specified source. Material, compaction,
and testing requirements are found in Table 1.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Standard Test Method for Particle

Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D422
Contractor
Standard Test Methods for

Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3
(600 kn-m/m3))
ASTM D698 (Standard

Proctor)
Contractor
Standard Test Method for Density

and Unit Weight of Soil in Place
by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1556
Contractor

characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3
(2,700 kn-m/m3))
ASTM D1557 (Modified

Proctor)
Contractor

by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D2167
Contractor

Density of Soil and SoilAggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D2922
Contractor
Standard Test Method for Water

Content of Soil and Rock in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow
Depth)
ASTM D3017
Contractor

Maximum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory
Table
ASTM D4253
Contractor

Minimum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils and Calculation of
Relative Density
ASTM D4254
Contractor
Standard Test Methods for Liquid

Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM D4318
Contractor
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 9 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Standard Test Method for InPlace Density and Water Content

of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by
ASTM D6938
Contractor

Not used.
Not used.
02220.2 Products
Not used.
02220.3 Execution
02220.3.1 General
This article covers general earthwork; removal and disposal of debris; excavation; the handling, storage,
transportation, and disposal of excavated material; sheeting, shoring, and protection work; preparation of
subgrades; dewatering; protection of adjacent construction; backfill; construction of fills and
embankments; surfacing and grading; and other appurtenant work.
All excavations, sheeting, shoring, and temporary excavation support shall be performed in accordance
with OSHA 29CFR Part 1926, Subpart P, "Excavations."
Excavated materials shall not be placed within 1.5 meters from the edge of the pit or trench, or half the
depth of the pit or trench, whichever is more, for reasons of safety, and shall be placed further away if
directed by the Site Construction Manager. Excavation shall not be carried out below the foundation level
of structures close by until required precautions have been taken. Adequate fencing is to be installed
enclosing the excavation when necessary.
02220.3.2 Sheeting and Shoring
The stability of previously constructed structures and facilities shall not be impaired or endangered by
excavation work. Previously constructed structures and facilities include both structures and facilities
existing when this construction began and structures and facilities already provided under these
specifications.
Adequate sheeting and shoring shall be provided to protect and maintain the stability of previously
constructed structures and facilities and the sides of excavations until they are backfilled. Sheeting,
bracing, and shoring shall be designed and built to withstand all loads and restrain all settlement caused
by earth movement or pressure, and shall maintain the shape of the excavation. Wood shoring, if used,
shall carefully be removed as the backfill progresses. Metal or concrete shoring, with the approval of the
Site Construction Manager may be left in place if it does not interfere with other construction, and if cutoff
at least 750 mm below the finished grade.
02220.3.3 Removal of Water
Adequate dewatering equipment shall be provided to remove and dispose of all surface and ground water
entering excavations and other parts of the work. Each excavation shall be kept dry. Control of ground
water shall be accomplished in a manner that will preserve the strength of the foundation soils, will not
cause instability of the excavation slopes, and will not result in damage to existing structures. Where
necessary to these purposes, the water level shall be lowered in advance of excavation, utilizing wells,
well points, or similar methods. The water level as measured in piezometers shall be maintained
continuously about 0.3 meters below the prevailing excavation level, or it shall be lowered to within about
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 10 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
0.3 meters of impermeable strata. Open pumping with sumps and ditches, if it results in boils, loss of
fines, softening of the ground, or instability of slopes, will not be permitted. Wells and well points shall be
installed with suitable screens and filters so that continuous pumping of fines does not occur. Dewatering
shall continue until the construction is no longer affected by ground or surface water. The dewatering
system shall only pump water that is clear and free of fines, with a sand content less than 10 ppm. The
discharge shall be arranged so that samples can be collected.
Surface water shall be diverted to the extent possible to prevent entrance into excavations.
Pipe or conduit used for drainage purposes shall be kept clean and free of sediment. Temporary
drainage piping that is not a part of the permanent construction shall be removed at the completion of the
work.
When the work is completed, all parts of the permanent plant drainage system used for water disposal
that have been damaged by dewatering operations shall be repaired. Dewatering work shall not overload
the plant drainage system. Dewatering discharge shall be routed as directed by the Site Construction
Manager.
Header systems may be laid on top of the ground provided they do not obstruct plant operations,
construction activity, or traffic. Groundwater systems shall operate continuously, if necessary, to maintain
the specified water level.
Proposed dewatering systems shall be submitted to the Site Construction Manager for review.
02220.3.4 Blasting
Blasting or other use of explosives for excavation will not be permitted without express permission in
writing from the Site Construction Manager and local Authorities. The use and storage of explosive in
magazine shall be subject to the approval and to the satisfaction of the Site Construction Manager and
local Authorities. Blasting will not be permitted in close proximity to foundations, buildings and other
facilities.
02220.3.5 Classification of Excavated Materials
Classification of excavated materials shall be made as follows:
Rock. Rock shall be defined as limestone, hard shale, sandstone, siltstone, flint, granite,
quartzite, slate, or similar material in masses more than 0.38 m3 in volume, or in ledges
100 mm or more in thickness that require percussive methods for excavation.
Soil-like rock formations present on the site, such as lignite and clay shale, shall not be
considered as rock. Boulders less than 0.38 m3 in volume shall not be considered as
rock.
Earth. All material not classified as rock.
Boulders over 300 mm in diameter shall be kept separate from other excavated materials. Disposal of
boulders shall be as directed by the Site Construction Manager.
Rock that cannot be handled and compacted as earth shall be kept separate from other excavated
materials and shall not be mixed with backfill, fill, or embankment materials.
Soil identification shall be in accordance with ASTM D2487, Table 1, Soil Classification Chart.
Identification and classification shall be based upon visual examination and simple manual tests
performed by qualified personnel in accordance with ASTM D2488. Classification of material shall be
acceptable to the Site Construction Manager.
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 11 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02220.3.6 Freezing Weather Restrictions

Backfill and fill shall not be placed during freezing weather unless acceptable to the Site Construction
Manager. Earth material shall not be placed on frozen surfaces, and frozen materials, snow, or ice shall
not be placed in any fill or backfill.
02220.3.7 Preservation of Trees
Trees shall be preserved and protected as much as possible. Unless specifically authorized by the Site
Construction Manager, trees shall be removed only from areas within the construction limits. Removal of
additional trees may be permitted by the Site Construction Manager when necessary for the effective
execution of the work.
Trees left standing shall be protected from permanent damage. Construction equipment and vehicles
shall be parked outside the dripline of trees designated to remain. Trimming of standing trees shall be as
directed by the Site Construction Manager.
02220.3.8 Maintenance of Traffic
Whenever it is necessary to cross, obstruct, or close roads, driveways, parking areas, and walks, the
Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or other temporary expedients.
02220.3.9 Unauthorized Excavation
Material excavated below the bottom of concrete structures to be supported on the subgrade shall be
replaced with concrete placed monolithically with the concrete above. Rock fill or lean concrete may be
used, if acceptable to the Site Construction Manager. Material excavated below structures supported on
piles or piers shall be replaced with crushed rock or gravel. The crushed rock or gravel shall be
compacted to a density equal to or greater than the density of the adjacent undisturbed soil.
02220.3.10 Testing
Laboratory testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Site
Construction Manager. Field sampling and testing shall be performed by a technician that is certified in
Nuclear Guage Safety Training.
Field samples shall be taken at locations selected by the Site QA Manager. If, in the opinion of the Site
QA Manager, additional field control tests are necessary such tests shall be made. Field density tests
shall be taken so as to represent the average density over the depth of the layer.
The terms "maximum density" and "optimum moisture content" shall be as defined in ASTM D698 or
ASTM D1557 as applicable per Table 1.
Relative density for compacted crushed rock materials shall be determined in accordance with
ASTM D4253 and D4254. The term "relative density" shall be as defined in ASTM D4254.
A copy of each test result shall be furnished to the Site QA Manager on the day the test is performed.
Testing requirements are provided in Table 1.
02220.3.11 Site Preparation
Ground surfaces within the construction areas shall be cleared of all trees, brush, debris, and surface
vegetation. Stumps and roots larger than about 50 mm in diameter shall be completely grubbed and
removed. Matted roots shall be removed regardless of size. Surface vegetation shall be removed
complete with roots to a depth of approximately 100 mm below the ground surface.
All noncombustible materials shall be removed from the construction areas for disposal.
Trees, underbrush, stumps, and roots may be stacked and burned on the site at locations acceptable to
the Site Construction Manager or removed entirely from the site for disposal. Materials for burning shall
be piled neatly and burned completely. Piling for burning shall be done in a manner and location to
minimize fire risk. Burned materials shall be completely reduced to ashes. Care shall be taken to prevent
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 12 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
the spread of fire beyond the limits of the burning site. Fireguards of adequate width shall be provided
wherever there is surface vegetation near any brush pile. Burning shall not take place when the direction
or velocity of the wind causes a danger of fire spreading into adjacent areas. Burning shall be in
accordance with all applicable government requirements. A copy of the burning permit shall be provided
to the Site Construction Manager each day burning occurs.
Organic topsoil that is free of trash, vegetation, rocks, and roots shall be stockpiled for later use under
separate specifications.
02220.3.12 Roadway Roadbeds
Roadway roadbed construction shall include excavation, subgrade preparation, and construction of fills
and embankments. In excavated roadbed areas, overburden shall be removed and the subgrade shaped
to line, grade, and cross section. Soft, organic, and other unacceptable material shall be removed from
the subgrade and replaced. The replacement material shall meet the requirements of Article 02220.3.16,
Structural Fill.
The subgrade shall be compacted in accordance with Table 1 and finished to a uniform surface to allow
for proper drainage. The subgrade shall be finished to within 10 mm of the elevation indicated on the
drawings.
Ditches and drains along the subgrade shall be maintained for effective drainage. When ruts of 50 mm or
more in depth are formed, the subgrade shall be reshaped and recompacted.
Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrades.
02220.3.13 Fills and Embankments
Fills and embankments shall be constructed to lines and grades indicated on the drawings.
02220.3.13.1 Materials. To the maximum extent available, earth materials obtained from excavations
shall be used for the construction of fills and embankments. If additional material is necessary, it shall be
obtained from borrow pits. The fill or embankment subgrade shall be scarified, leveled, and rolled. The
surface materials of the subgrade shall be compacted and well bonded to the previous layers of fill. All
material deposited in fills and embankments shall be earth only and shall be free from rocks or stones
larger than allowed by Table 1, brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic or other objectionable
materials. Material deposited in piles or windrows by excavating and hauling equipment shall be spread
and leveled prior to compaction.
Fill and embankment material obtained from offsite sources shall be free of contamination. The
fill/embankment material supplier shall provide documentation that the material is free of contamination.
Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted. If the material fails to meet the density specified, compaction
methods shall be modified to attain the specified density. The failed layer shall be recompacted until the
layer meets the specification requirements.
02220.3.13.2 Subgrade Preparation. The subgrade shall be leveled and compacted in accordance
with Table 1. The subgrade surface shall be well bonded to the previous layers of fill.
02220.3.13.3 Placement and Compaction. Fill and embankment materials shall be placed in
approximately horizontal layers. Material deposited in piles or windrows shall be spread and leveled
before compaction.
Water shall be added to meet the moisture content required in Table 1 and worked into each layer using
harrow, disk, blade, or other acceptable equipment to provide a uniform moisture content. If the material
fails to meet the specified density in Table 1, compaction methods shall be altered.
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 13 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02220.3.13.4 Borrow Areas. Materials necessary to complete fills and embankments shall be
excavated from on-site borrow areas designated by the Site Construction Manager and hauled to the fill
or embankment site. Upon completion of borrow activity, the borrow site shall be graded in a manner
02220.3.14 Structure Excavation
Excavation for structures shall be completed to the designated lines and elevations. Machine excavation
shall be controlled to prevent undercutting the subgrade elevations indicated on the drawings.
Excavated materials that meet the specified requirements may be used for the fills, embankments, and
backfills.
Vertical faces of excavations shall not be undercut to provide for extended footings.
All excavations shall be done to the minimum dimensions as required for safety and working facility. 500
mm maximum working space may be left around structures at the deepest point.
The rough excavation may be carried to a maximum depth of 150 mm above the final level. The balance
shall be excavated with special care. Before laying foundation, the bottom of all excavations shall be
compacted as specified by approved means.
If the excavation is done to a depth greater than that shown on the drawings due to the Contractor's fault,
the excess depth shall be made up by load-bearing fill or concrete.
If suitable bearing for foundations is not encountered at the depth indicated on the drawings, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Site Construction Manager, and excavation shall be carried to the
depth where the indicated bearing capacity is encountered and additional excavation filled with loadbearing fill or concrete.
02220.3.15 Structure Subgrades
Subgrades for structures shall be firm, dense, free from mud, thoroughly compacted to the specified
density in Table 1, and sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact.
Structure subgrades that can not achieve the required density shall be over-excavated and replaced with
structural fill.
Subgrades that are otherwise solid, but become mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be
stabilized by reinforcing them with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel unless otherwise noted
on the drawings.
The finished elevation of stabilized structure subgrades shall not be above the subgrade elevations
indicated on the drawings.
02220.3.16 Structural Fill
Structural fill is fill placed beneath structures. Structural fill shall be mechanically compacted. Structural
fill requirements are provided in Table 1.
Particular care shall be taken to compact structural fill beneath pipes, drives, roads, or other surface
construction. When a trench passes through structural fill, the fill shall be placed and compacted to at
least 300 mm above the top of the pipe elevation before the trench is excavated.
02220.3.17 Structure Backfill
Backfill around and outside of structures shall be deposited in approximately horizontal layers. Backfill
shall be mechanically compacted in accordance with Table 1. Compaction of structure backfill by rolling
will be permitted provided the desired compaction is obtained and damage to the structure is prevented.
Compaction of structure backfill by inundation with water will not be permitted.
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 14 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Backfill material shall be composed of earth only and, to the extent possible, shall be void of wood, grass,
roots, broken concrete, stones, trash, or other debris.
No tamped, rolled, or otherwise mechanically compacted backfill shall be deposited or compacted in
water.
All backfill material shall consist of loose earth having a moisture content required in Table 1 to obtain the
specified density (Table 1) of the compacted soil. Moisture content shall be distributed uniformly. Water
added for correction of moisture content shall be distributed uniformly prior to compaction. Granular
material shall be wet, not just damp, when compacted.
02220.3.18 Compacted Rock Fill
Compacted rock fill shall consist of crushed rock. Compaction shall be performed with vibrating
mechanical compactors. Crushed concrete meeting gradation and requirements may be used with
approval of the Site QA Manager.
Crushed rock for compacted fill shall be handled and placed in a manner that will prevent segregation of
sizes. The fill material shall have the moisture content specified in Table 1 to achieve compaction
required in Table 1.
If concrete is to be placed on the compacted rock fill, the fill shall be finished with a thin layer of clean
concrete sand to fill all voids and interstices to obtain the required subgrade elevation.
02220.3.19 Compacted Sand Fill
Compacted sand fill material shall consist of clean, natural sand.
Sand fills shall be placed on undisturbed or compacted subgrade. Sand shall be compacted using
mechanical vibrators. Compaction and moisture content shall be in accordance with Table 1.
02220.3.20 Drainage Fills
Sand drainage fills and drainage filter material shall be as indicated on the drawings. Unwashed material
is unacceptable.
Sand drainage fill and drainage filter material shall be compacted with a vibrating compactor.
Compaction and moisture content shall be in accordance with Table 1.
02220.3.21 Controlled Low Strength Material
Not used.
02220.3.22 Maintenance and Restoration of Fills, Embankments, and Backfills
Fills, embankments, and backfills that settle or erode before final acceptance of the work, and pavement,
structures, and other facilities damaged by such settlement or erosion, shall be repaired. The settled or
eroded areas shall be filled, compacted, and graded to conform to the elevation indicated on the drawings
or to the elevation of the adjacent ground surface. Damaged facilities shall be repaired in a manner
Earth slopes of the roads and railroads constructed under these specifications shall be maintained to the
lines and grades indicated on the drawings until the final acceptance of the work.
02220.3.23 Final Grading
After all construction work has been completed, all ground surface areas disturbed by construction
activities shall be graded. The grading shall be finished to the contours and elevations indicated on the
drawings or, if not indicated, to the matching contours and elevations of the original, undisturbed ground
surface. The final grading shall provide smooth uniform surfaces and effective drainage of the ground
areas.
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 15 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02220.3.24 Disposal of Materials

Surplus earth and materials not suitable for the work shall be spoiled on the site in a manner and location
designated by the Site Construction Manager. Material not suitable for work shall be spoiled separately
from surplus material. Stockpiles of surplus material shall be free from brush, trees, debris, or other
organic or deleterious materials and stored at the site at locations that do not interfere with the progress
of general construction work. Offsite disposal may be used, if allowed by the Site Construction Manager.
Disposal shall be in accordance with all federal and local requirements.
02220.3.25 Existing Underground Utilities
The Contractor shall conduct operations on the basis that existing underground installations may exist
that are not indicated on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall locate and identify all existing underground installations such as, but not limited to,
oil, water, air, and gas lines; sewers and other drains; circulating water lines; telephone lines; electrical
duct banks and raceway; grounding grid conductors; or buried structures within the construction limits of
the work and elsewhere where any penetration such as, but not limited to, excavation, plowing, trenching,
driving of wellpoints, or insertion of any tool or device below the surface is anticipated or required. The
Contractor shall pothole and positively identify all existing underground installations. All information
relative to the underground installations shall be recorded by the Contractor and incorporated into the
records.
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 16 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Materials, Compaction, and Testing Requirements
Plasticity
Requirements
Gradation
Requirements
Roadwa
y
roadbed
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
Fill and
embank
-ment
subgrad
e
none
none
Fills and
embank
-ments
150 mm
max; 76
mm max
in upper
450 mm.
Material
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Maximum
Density
Test
Frequency
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
ASTM
D6938;
and
ASTM
D1556
or (10%
of tests
to be
ASTM
D1556)
One test
per 400 sq.
m., or as
required
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556)
200 mm.
depth
90% Max.
Dry
Density
ASTM
D2922
One test
per 840 sq.
m. or as
required
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D3017
200 mm
depth
Subgrade
shall be
scarified and
rolled to
provide for
bonding of
overlying
lifts.
90% Max.
Dry
Density
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556 )
One test
per 380
cu.m., or
as required
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556)
200 mm.
thick lift
prior to
compaction
(loose lift)
Top 25 mm.
of each lift
shall be
scarified to
promote
bonding
between
lifts.
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
3 initial
tests;
further
tests as
directed
95% Max.
Dry
Density
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
3 initial
tests;
further
tests as
directed
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
3 initial
tests,
further
tests as
directed
Maximum
Density
Earthwork
Required
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
Page 17 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Plasticity
Requirements
Gradation
Requirements
Structur
e
subgrad
e
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
Structur
al fill
(Fills
beneath
structur
es)
LL < 40
PL < 15
76mm
max 85
percent
minus No.
200
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
Material
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Maximum
Density
Maximum
Density
Test
Frequency
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556)
One test
per 840
sq.m, or as
required.
Min one
per
foundation
for
foundations
over 8.3
sq. m
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556)
200 mm.
depth
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556)
One test
per 150
cu.m, or as
required
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556)
200 mm.
thick lift
prior to
compaction
(loose lift)
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
1 initial
test; further
tests as
directed
95% Max.
Dry
Density
3 initial
tests,
further
tests as
directed
95% Max.
Dry
Density
Earthwork
Required
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
Page 18 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Plasticity
Requirements
Gradation
Requirements
Structur
e
backfill
Structure
backfill
placed
against
below
grade
walls shall
be nonswelling
material
with a
liquid limit
(LL) less
than 40
and a PI
less than
15.
76 mm
max 85
percent
minus No.
200
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
Compac
ted rock
fill
Nonplastic
38 mm
max. to
crusher
fines;
ASTM C3
3
ASTM
D4253
and
D4254
Material
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Maximum
Density
Maximum
Density
Test
Frequency
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556
or
ASTM
D2167)
One test
per 150
cu.m, or as
required
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
200 mm.
thick lift
prior to
compaction
(loose lift)
Compaction
by
inundation
with water
will not be
permitted.
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556
or
ASTM
D2167)
One test
per 150
cu.m, or as
required
As
required
to achieve
field
density
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
200 mm.
thick lift
prior to
compaction
(loose lift)
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
3 initial
tests;
further
tests as
directed
95% Max.
Dry
Density
3 initial
tests;
further
tests as
directed
70%
Relative
Density
Earthwork
Required
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
Page 19 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Plasticity
Requirements
Gradation
Requirements
Compac
ted sand
fill
Nonplastic
75%
minus
No. 4;
10%
minus
No. 200;
ASTM
C33
Surplus
earth
and
material
s not
suitable
for the
work
Material
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Maximum
Density
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
Maximum
Density
Test
Frequency
3 initial
tests;
further
tests as
directed
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
90% Max.
Dry
Density
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556
or
ASTM
D2167)
Earthwork
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
One test
per 150
cu.m., or
as required
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
Required
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
200 mm.
thick lift
prior to
compaction
(loose lift)
Spread
uniformly in
approximat
ely 300
mm. thick
lifts
Spoil in a
manner and
location
designated
by the Site
Construction
Manager.
Page 20 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Plasticity
Requirements
Gradation
Requirements
Sand
drainag
e fill
Nonplastic
Uniformly
graded
from No. 4
to No. 100
sieve
ASTM
D4253
and
D4254
Lime
treated
soil
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
Material
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Maximum
Density
Maximum
Density
Test
Frequency
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556
or
ASTM
D2167)
One test
per 380
cu.m., or
as required
As
required
to achieve
field
density
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
100 mm.
compacted
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556
or
ASTM
D2167)
One test
per 380
cu.m., or
as required
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
200 mm.
thick lift
prior to
compaction
(loose lift)
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
3 initial
tests;
further
tests as
directed
65%
relative
density
3 initial
tests;
further
tests as
directed
95% Max.
Dry
Density
Earthwork
Required
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
Clean
concrete
sand
Page 21 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Material
Drainag
e filter
material
Plasticity
Requirements
Gradation
Requirements
Nonplastic
Uniformly
graded
from 38
mm to No.
4
(4.75mm)
Maximum
Density
Maximum
Density
Test
Frequency
ASTM
D4253
and
D4254
1 initial
test; further
tests as
directed
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
65%
relative
density
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM
D1556
or
ASTM
D2167)
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
One test
per 380
cu.m., or
as required
As
required
to achieve
field
density
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556(1
0% of
tests to
be
ASTM D
1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
Required
Lift
Thickness
100 mm.
compacted
Remarks
Washed
rock or
crushed
gravel
ASTM C33 = Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

ASTM D698 = Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Standard Effort (600 m-kN/m).
ASTM D1556 = Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method.
ASTM D1557 = Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil using Modified Effort (2700 m-kN/m)
ASTM D2167 = Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Rubber-Balloon Method.
ASTM D4253 = Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils using a Vibratory Table.
ASTM D4254 = Standard Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density.
ASTM D6938 = Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
Source: 02220, 2010, v.1.7
Earthwork
Page 22 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

02315 - Trenching
02315.1 General
Scope of Work shall include completing trenching and shall include other services as specified under
these technical specifications.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for trenching are indicated in Article 02315.3.
standards. Unless otherwise specified, the applicable governing edition and addenda to be used for
all references to codes or standards specified herein shall be interpreted to be the jurisdictionally
approved edition and addenda. If a code or standard is not jurisdictionally mandated, then the current
edition and addenda in effect at the date of this document shall apply. These references shall govern
the work except where they conflict with these specifications. In case of conflict, the latter shall
govern to the extent of such difference:
Work
In Accordance With
Standard Specification for Aggregates or

"Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction"
ASTM C33
Standard Practice for Classification of

Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System)
ASTM D2487
Standard Practice for Description and

Identification of Soils (Visual-Manual
Procedure)
ASTM D2488
02315.1.5 Materials
Not used.
02315.1.6 Not Used
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted
By
ASTM D698 (Standard Proctor)
Contractor
Refer to Table 1 at the end of this

section.
Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (600 kn-m/m3)
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.3
Trenching
Page 23 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted
By

characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (2,700 kn-m/m3)
ASTM D1557 (Modified Proctor)
Contractor

Maximum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory
Table
ASTM D4253
Contractor

Minimum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils and Calculation of
Relative Density
ASTM D4254
Contractor

by the Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1556
Contractor
Standard Test Method for InPlace Density and Water Content

of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by
ASTM D6938
Contractor

by the Rubber Balloon Method
ASTM D2167
Contractor
Standard Test Method for Particle

Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D422
Contractor
Standard Test Methods for Liquid

Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM D4318
Contractor

The following attachments accompany these specifications in either paper or electronic format. The
information contained in these documents constitutes requirements under the defined Scope of Work:
Document
Number/Description
Title
Revision
81112-DS-0054
Pipe Embedment

Not used.
02315.2 Products
Not used.
02315.3 Execution
02315.3.1 General
As specified in Article 02220.3.
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.3
Trenching
Page 24 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02315.3.2 Sheeting and Shoring

02315.3.3 Removal of Water
02315.3.4 Blasting
02315.3.5 Classification of Excavated Materials
02315.3.6 Freezing Weather Restrictions
02315.3.7 Preservation of Trees
02315.3.8 Maintenance of Traffic
02315.3.9 Unauthorized Excavation
02315.3.10 Testing
As specified in Section 02220.3
02315.3.11 Trench Subgrades
Subgrades for the bottom of trenches shall be firm, dense, free from mud, thoroughly compacted, and
sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact. Compaction shall be as specified in Table 1 at the end of
this section.
Subgrades that are otherwise solid, but become mucky on top due to construction operations, shall
be stabilized by reinforcing them with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel.
Not more than 13 mm depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms
when pipe embedment material is placed.
02315.3.12 Pipe Trench Excavation
No more trench shall be opened in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work.
Trenches for all underground mechanical and electrical lines shall be excavated in lines and levels as
shown in drawings. Sewer lines, water pipes, and electric conduits shall each be laid in separate
trenches, except where otherwise allowed.
Trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface except where boring is required.
02315.3.12.1 Alignment and Grade. The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline shall
be fixed and determined by means of batter boards and offset stakes, laser beam equipment, or
surveying instruments, unless otherwise accepted.
If piping elevations are not indicated on the drawings, underground piping shall be installed with a
minimum of 0.9 meters of cover above the top of the pipe.
02315.3.12.2 Limiting Trench Widths. Trench widths shall provide adequate working space and
pipe clearance during installation. The trench width below a point 300 mm above the top of the pipe
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.3
Trenching
Page 25 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
shall not be more than 600 mm greater than the outside diameter of the pipe unless otherwise
indicated on the drawings. Trench width shall be kept to a minimum to allow installation and
compaction around the piping.
Where necessary to reduce earth load on trench banks to prevent sliding and caving, banks may be
cut back on slopes that shall not extend lower than 300 mm above the top of the pipe.
For single pipes, the maximum trench width measured at the bottom of the pipe shall be the pipe
outside diameter plus 600 mm for pipes 1,200 mm outside diameter and smaller. For single pipes
larger than 1,200 mm outside diameter, the maximum width measured at the bottom of the pipe shall
be the pipe outside diameter plus 1,200 mm.
For multiple pipes in a common trench, the maximum trench width shall be based on the outside
diameter of the outside pipes. The maximum clear distance between the trench wall and the adjacent
pipe shall be 600 mm for 1,200 mm and smaller pipes and shall be 600 mm for pipes larger than
1,200 mm.
02315.3.12.3 Unauthorized Trench Widths. If the width of the lower portion of the excavated
trench exceeds the maximum specified, corrective measures shall be taken. These may include the
use of a stronger pipe, special pipe embedment, or concrete encasement, as required by the loading
conditions. The corrective measures shall be submitted to the EPC Contractors Consultant for
engineering review.
02315.3.12.4 Mechanical Excavation. Mechanical equipment shall not be used in locations where
operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, or other existing property, utilities, or
structures above or below ground. Hand excavating methods shall be used in these locations.
02315.3.12.5 Trench Depth. Pipe trenches shall be excavated to the depth required for the
installation of embedment material or concrete for encasement below the underside of the pipe.
02315.3.12.6 Bell Holes. Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used to
install the pipe. No part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, walls, or
embedment when the pipe is jointed. Bell holes shall be excavated so that entire length of the pipe
will rest on solid ground.
02315.3.13 Pipe Embedment
Embedment materials and placement shall conform to the requirements of these specifications and to
the drawing included as an attachment to this specification.
02315.3.13.1 Embedment Classes. Pipe embedment classes shall be as indicated on the attached
drawing and the following requirements:
Class B bedding shall be used with the following piping materials:
All buried piping
02315.3.13.2 Placement and Compaction. Embedment material shall be spread on the trench
bottom and the surface graded to provide a uniform and continuous support beneath the pipe at all
points between bell holes or pipe joints. The material shall be compacted with vibrating platform type
compactors. Compactive effort and moisture content shall be adjusted to provide a firm but slightly
yielding support for the pipe. After each pipe has been placed in final position on the bedding
material and shoved home, sufficient pipe embedment material shall be deposited and compacted
under and around each side of the pipe and back of the bell or end to hold the pipe in proper position
and alignment during subsequent pipe jointing and embedment operations.
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.3
Trenching
Page 26 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Embedment material shall be deposited and compacted uniformly and simultaneously on each side of
the pipe to prevent lateral displacement. Using a vibratory compactor, embedment material placed
over large areas shall be compacted in lifts of 0.2 meters or less loose thickness. In areas with
limited access, where a hand operated compactor is used, the lift thickness shall be 0.15 meters or
less. Each layer shall be uniformly compacted.
Embedment materials shall be placed in uniform layers and shall have the moisture content required
to obtain the specified density with the compaction method used. Vibrating compactors shall be used
to compact sand, crushed rock, and crushed gravel. Pipe coatings shall not be damaged during
placement and compaction.
02315.3.13.3 Ground Water Barrier. Continuity of embedment material for piping shall be
interrupted by low permeability ground water barriers that impede passage of water through the
embedment. Barriers shall be constructed with cohesive material or lean concrete. Ground water
barriers for sewer lines shall be the compacted soil around each manhole. Barriers for all other
pipelines shall be compacted soil the full depth of the embedment material, the full trench width,
approximately 1,200 mm long, and spaced not more than 122 m apart. Barriers shall be installed for
pipelines as specified on drawings.
02315.3.14 Trench Backfill
Trench backfill above the pipe embedment shall be compacted for the full depth of the trench above
the embedment.
The top portion of backfill beneath established lawn areas shall be finished with at least 300 mm of
topsoil similar to the topsoil in adjoining lawn areas.
Compacted backfill material shall be either job excavated material or material from offsite sources.
The method of compaction and the equipment used shall be appropriate for the material being
compacted and shall not transmit damaging shocks to the pipe. Backfill material obtained from offsite sources shall be free of contamination.
02315.3.15 Duct Bank Trenching
Trenches for duct banks shall be excavated to lines indicated on the drawings or at other locations
acceptable to the EPC Contractors Consultant and to within 12 mm of the depth required. Trenches
shall be excavated to permit the duct bank to rest on undisturbed earth or rock. Where it is necessary
to trench through backfill, the earth shall be well compacted before the duct bank is installed.
Trenches shall be wide enough to provide ample room for workmen engaged in handling and
installing the ducts. Where it is necessary to reduce the earth load on trench banks to prevent sliding
or caving, trench banks may be cut back on slopes.
02315.3.16 Not Used
02315.3.17 Pipe Casing Under Roadways
Where traffic must be maintained on roadways, pipelines and duct banks may be installed in a casing
bored under the roadway or railroad. As a minimum HS20 loading should be used for design as
applicable. The casing shall be installed at the locations indicated on the drawings by pipe jacking.
Complete details of the proposed methods, materials, and time schedule shall be submitted to the
EPC Contractors Consultant. Work shall not begin on the crossing until written notification to
proceed has been obtained from the Site Construction Manager.
Casing pipe shall be new smooth wall pipe of welded steel construction with a minimum yield point of
240 MPa. The pipe size shall be as indicated on the construction drawings. The casing pipe shall be
cleaned and coated both inside and outside with two coats of coal tar paint. Paint shall be Kop-Coat
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.3
Trenching
Page 27 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
"Bitumastic Super Service Black" as manufactured by Sherwin Williams or 46-465 H.B. Tnemecol as
manufactured by Tnemec or approved equal.
Joints in the casings shall be welded. Pipe ends shall be machine cut and beveled at an angle of
37-1/2 degrees. The beveled ends shall be butted and aligned axially and welded to provide a full
strength joint capable of resisting all stresses, including jacking stresses.
The casing pipe shall be installed using jacking equipment. The hole shall be encased as the earth is
removed from the interior of the casing. Excavation without the concurrent installation of the casing
pipe is unacceptable. The installation of the casing shall not disrupt traffic nor damage the railroad or
highway grade and shall provide accurate alignment and grade of the pipe. There shall be no space
between the earth and the outside of the casing.
Water shall be prevented from entering the excavation. If necessary, a dewatering system shall be
provided to dewater the jacking pits.
02315.3.17.1 Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) Backfill
Not used.
02315.3.18 Maintenance and Restoration of Trench Backfills
Trench backfills that settle or erode before final acceptance of the work, and pavement, structures,
and other facilities damaged by such settlement or erosion, shall be repaired. The settled or eroded
areas shall be filled, compacted, and graded to conform to the elevation indicated on the drawings or
to the elevation of the adjacent ground surface. Damaged facilities shall be repaired in a manner
02315.3.19 Final Grading
After all construction work has been completed, all ground surface areas disturbed by construction
activities shall be graded. The grading shall be finished to the contours and elevations indicated on
the drawings or, if not indicated, to the matching contours and elevations of the original, undisturbed
ground surface. The final grading shall provide smooth uniform surfaces and effective drainage of the
ground areas.
02315.3.20 Disposal of Materials
Surplus earth and materials not suitable for the work shall be spoiled on the site in a manner and
location designated by the Site Construction Manager. Disposal shall be in accordance with all
national, province, and local requirements.
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.3
Trenching
Page 28 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Gradation
Requirements
Trench
subgrades
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
1 initial test;
further tests
as directed
90% of
maximum dry
density
ASTM
D2922
1 test every
30 lineal
meters of
trench
-3% to
+3% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D3017
Trench subgrades
shall be firm,
dense, free from
mud, and
sufficiently stable
to remain firm and
intact.
760 mm pipe
or smaller
Perform at least
two gradation tests;
at least 95%
passing 12.7 mm
sieve and not more
than 5% passing
US Sieve No. 4
Nonplastic
ASTM
D4253 and
ASTM
D4254
2 initial tests;
further tests
as directed
70% Relative
Density
ASTM
D6938; and
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167
(10% of
tests to be
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167)
One test per

30 meters of
trench for
each lift
200 mm
max
Minimum 4 passes
with a vibratory flat
plate tamper
Perform at least
at least 95%
passing 19 mm
sieve and not more
than 5% passing
US Sieve No. 4
Nonplastic
ASTM
D4253 and
ASTM
D4254
2 initial tests,
further tests
as directed
70% Relative
Density
ASTM
D6938; and
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167
(10% of
tests to be
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167)
One test per

30 meters of
trench for
each lift
200 mm
max
Material
Crushed rock
or crushed
gravel
embedment
> 760 mm to
1525 mm
pipe
Crushed rock
or crushed
gravel
embedment
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.2
Maximum
Density
Maximum
Density Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
Field
Water
Content
Test
Plasticity
Requirements
Trenching
Frequency
Field
Water
Content
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
Page 29 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Material
Pipe larger
than 1525
mm
Gradation
Requirements
Plasticity
Requirements
Maximum
Density
Maximum
Density Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
Perform at least
at least 95%
passing 38 mm
sieve, 50% passing
19 mm sieve, and
not more than 5%
passing US Sieve
No. 4
Nonplastic
ASTM
D4253 and
ASTM
D4254
2 initial tests;
further tests
as directed
70% Relative
Density
ASTM
D6938; and
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to be
ASTM
D1556)
One test per

30 meters of
trench for
each lift
200 mm
max
Sand
embedment
Perform at least
at least 95%
passing US Sieve
No. 4 and not more
than 5% passing
US Sieve No. 100
Nonplastic
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
2 initial tests;
further tests
as directed
90% Max.
Dry Density
ASTM
D6938; and
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to be
ASTM
D1556)
One test per

30 meters of
trench for
each lift
200 mm
max
Clean sand
Groundwater
barrier
Cohesive
material
(Soil
Classification GC,
SC, CL, or
ML as
indicated
in ASTM
D2487,
Table 1
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
2 initial tests;
further tests
as directed
90% Max.
Dry Density
ASTM
D6938; and
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to be
ASTM
D1556)
One test for

each
groundwater
barrier
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167
(10% of
tests to
be ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
200 mm
max
Material may be
finely divided
suitable job
excavated
material, free from
stones, organic
matter, and debris
Trench
backfill
76 mm max particle
size
LL < 40
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
2 initial tests;
further tests
as directed
90% Max Dry

Density
ASTM
D6938; and
ASTM
D1556
(10% of
tests to be
ASTM
D1556)
One test per

30 meters of
trench for
each lift
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167
(10% of
tests to
be
200 mm
max
Crushed rock
or crushed
gravel
embedment
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.2
PI < 15
Trenching
Page 30 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Table 1
Material
Gradation
Requirements
Plasticity
Requirements
Maximum
Density
Maximum
Density Test
Frequency
Required
Field
Density
Field
Density
Test
Frequency
Field
Water
Content
Field
Water
Content
Test
Lift
Thickness
Remarks
ASTM D
1556 or
ASTM D
2167)
Trench
backfill
traversing
subgrades of
streets,
roads,
railroads,
parking
areas,
underground
piping,
underground
electrical
ducts and
conduit, and
other
facilities
subject to
damage by
settlement
76 mm max particle
size
Source: 02315, 2010, v.1.2
ASTM
D1557,
Method C
2 initial tests;
further tests
as directed
90% Max Dry

Density
ASTM
D6938; and
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167
(10% of
tests to be
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167)
Trenching
One test per

30 meters of
trench for
each lift
-2% to
+2% of
optimum
water
content
ASTM
D6938;
ASTM
D1556 or
ASTM
D2167
(10% of
tests to
be ASTM
D1556 or
ASATM
D2167)
200 mm
max
Page 31 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02371 - Seeding and Sodding

02371.1 General
Scope of work shall include furnishing materials, labor, incidentals and equipment required to perform
seeding and sodding work, in accordance with applicable laws, ordinances, and this specification.
Not applicable.
For more performance and design requirements, refer to Article 02371.3.
Not used.
02371.1.5 Materials
Not used.
02371.1.6 Approved Manufacturers of Components
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
Not used.
02371.2 Products
Not used.
02371.3 Execution
02371.3.1 Sodding
Sodding shall include preparation of the soil surface, fertilizing, laying the sod, rolling, and watering.
Sod shall be placed only when the soil is moist and in proper condition to induce growth.
Sod shall be of a Mexican or Burmese grass type or types suitable to the local climate and conditions.
The grass type and source nursery shall be approved by the Site Construction Manager.
Sod shall be placed after preparing the soil and applying fertilizer as specified. The native soil on the
roots of the sod shall be retained during placement. Dumping sod from vehicles will not be permitted.
Sod shall be transplanted within 24 hours from the time of stripping, unless stored in a satisfactory
manner. After delivery and while in stacks, sod shall be kept moist and protected from exposure to
the air and sun. During periods of high temperature, after all unevenness in the soil surface has been
corrected, the soil shall be lightly moistened immediately prior to laying the sod.
As sodding is completed in any one section, sod shall be pressed into contact with the sod bed by
tamping or rolling to eliminate air pockets. A true and even surface shall be provided to ensure
knitting without displacement of the sod or deformation of the surface of sodded areas. Following
Source: 02371, 2010, v.1.2
Seeding and Sodding
Page 32 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
compaction, good quality screened soil shall be used to fill all cracks. The excess soil shall be
worked into the grass with rakes or other suitable equipment. The quantity of fill soil shall be adjusted
so that it will not smother the grass. The sod shall be watered to a depth such that both the
underside of the new sod and the soil immediately below the sod are thoroughly wet.
02371.3.2 Seeding
Seeding shall include preparation of the soil surface, fertilizing, seeding, compacting, mulching, and
watering.
Mulch, seed, and fertilizer may be applied simultaneously with a hydraulic applicator manufactured
specifically for this purpose. The hydraulic applicator shall be capable of applying the mulch, seed,
and fertilizer slurry in the proper proportions under its own power to slopes at least as steep as 2
meters horizontal for 1 meter vertical.
Fertilizing, seeding, or mulching operations will not be permitted when wind velocities exceed 7
meters per second). Seeds shall be sown only when the soil is moist and in proper condition to
induce growth. Areas to be seeded shall be scarified by disc or cultivated by other approved method
to a depth of 100 mm prior to seeding.
Seeding shall be conducted under favorable weather conditions during seasons that are normal for
such work as determined by accepted practice in project locality. Seeding operation shall proceed on
moist soil, but only after free surface water has drained away. Seeding mixtures shall be in
accordance with Article 02371.3.5.
02371.3.3 Fertilizer
Commercial fertilizers shall comply with national and local laws regulating the use of fertilizers and
shall be approved for use in the area being seeded.
02371.3.4 Mulch
Mulch shall be either vegetative mulch consisting of stalks of oats or wheat or a wood cellulose fiber
mulch. Mulch shall be free of noxious weeds. Mulch shall be spread at a rate of 730 kg per 1,000
square meters at a minimum or as required by national and local laws.
02371.3.5 Seed
Seed shall be of a Mexican or Burmese grass type or types suitable to the local climate and
conditions. The grass type shall be approved by the Site Construction Manager.
Seed shall comply with all applicable state and local laws and regulations. Sealed standard
containers, plainly labeled as to variety, percentage of germination, purity, and the date tests were
made shall be provided. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged will not be
acceptable.
Seed with the minimum percentages by weight of pure live seed according to local and state
requirements shall be used.
The balance of material in an acceptable seed mixture (other than pure live seed) shall, for the most
part, consist of nonviable seed, chaff, hulls, live seed of crop plants, and harmless inert matter. The
percentage of weed seed shall not exceed 1 percent by weight for the mixture.
02371.3.6 Topsoil
Topsoil imported to the site shall be fertile, friable, natural loam containing a liberal amount of humus
and shall be capable of sustaining plant growth. Topsoil shall be free of subsoil and shall be
reasonably free of stone, lumps, clods of hard earth, plants or their roots, stalks, and other
extraneous matter.
Source: 02371, 2010, v.1.2
Seeding and Sodding
Page 33 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02371.3.7 Guarantee
Not used.
02371.3.8 Watering
Watering will be required to promote the establishment of healthy turf. Areas that have been seeded
or sodded shall be watered such that water will penetrate 25 mm into the soil.
Additional applications of water will be required until the grass is well established after planting.
Water and all pipes, pumps, hoses, sprinklers, and all other necessary materials shall be supplied to
apply water.
02371.3.9 Maintenance
All planted areas shall be maintained and protected until final acceptance of the work.
Over watering shall be avoided on the sloped areas to prevent erosion.
Source: 02371, 2010, v.1.2
Seeding and Sodding
Page 34 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02375 - Riprap
02375.1 General
Scope of supply shall include riprap, riprap bedding, and geotextile as specified under these
specifications.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for riprap are indicated in Article 02375.3.
standards. The version that is the latest adopted, published, and effective at the date of this document shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise. These references shall govern the work except
where they conflict with these specifications. In cases of conflict, the latter shall govern to the extent
of such difference:
Work
In Accordance With
Sampling Aggregates.
AASHTO T2-85
Organic Impurities in Sands for Concrete.
AASHTO T21-81
Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse

Aggregates.
AASHTO T27-84
Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine

Aggregate.
AASHTO T85-85
Resistance to Abrasion of Small Size

Coarse Aggregate by Use of the Los
Angeles Abrasion Machine.
AASHTO T96-83
Soundness of Aggregates by Freezing

and Thawing.
AASHTO T103-83
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in

Aggregate.
AASHTO T112-81
Lightweight Pieces in Aggregate.
AASHTO T113-86
02375.1.5 Materials
General
Component
Material
Riprap stone
Per Vietnamese specifications
Geotextile
Per Vietnamese specifications
Source: 02375, 2009, v.1.1

Draft
Rip Rap
Page 35 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

workmanship required by these specifications. Components by nonlisted manufacturers must equal
or exceed the performance of those listed:
Component
Manufacturer
Geotextile
Tensar, Tencate

Testing shall be conducted in accordance with the appropriate Vietnamese codes.
Not used.
02375.2 Products
Not used.
02375.3 Execution
02375.3.1 General
This article covers materials and procedures for the installation of dumped riprap and riprap bedding
as well as the placement of the underlying geotextile.
Geotextile, riprap and riprap bedding shall be placed at the locations indicated on the drawings.
Thickness of riprap and bedding shall be as indicated on the drawings.
Riprap and bedding materials shall be obtained from offsite sources.
Riprap and riprap bedding material sources shall be acceptable to the Site Construction Manager.
Unless otherwise specified herein, materials, sampling and testing, and placement of riprap shall
comply with the appropriate Vietnamese standards.
02375.3.2 Control Testing
Control testing shall be provided. Testing shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory.
One copy of test results shall be submitted to the Site QA Manager.
02375.3.3 Materials
Stone used for dumped riprap shall meet the gradation requirements for the class specified and be
hard, durable, angular in shape; resistant to weathering and to water action; and free from
overburden, spoil, shale, and organic material. The width and thickness of stones shall be at least
one third their length. Rounded stones or boulders and shale and stones with shale seams shall not
be used
The riprap bedding blanket shall consist of gravel, crushed rock, sand, or a combination of these
placed to the thickness indicated on the drawings. The gradation of material in the blanket shall meet
the requirements for the class specified. The riprap bedding blanket shall be composed of tough,
durable particles, free from thin, flat, and elongated pieces, and shall not contain organic matter or
soft, friable particles in quantities in excess of those specified.
02375.3.3.1 Riprap Bedding. Riprap bedding and gradation requirements shall be per the local
Vietnamese requirements referenced on the drawings.
Source: 02375, 2009, v.1.1

Draft
Rip Rap
Page 36 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02375.3.3.2 Dumped Riprap. Each load of riprap shall be well graded from the smallest to the
maximum size specified. Stones smaller than the specified 10 percent size and spalls shall not
exceed 10 percent by weight of each load. Sand and rock dust shall not exceed 5 percent by weight
of each load.
The dumped riprap gradation requirements shall be per the local Vietnamese requirements
referenced on the drawings.
02375.3.4 Reference Samples
Gradation control will be by visual inspection. A 5 ton sample of stone meeting the gradation for each
riprap class shall be placed near the location designated to receive riprap. The sample shall be used
as a reference for judging the gradation of the riprap placed. These samples shall be in place and
acceptable to the Site Construction Manager before riprap work begins. Disputes over gradation
shall be resolved by dumping and checking the gradation of two random truckloads of stone. The
Contractor will check the gradation of this stone. Equipment and labor needed to assist the checking
of gradation shall be provided.
02375.3.5 Preliminary Review
Acceptance of the source and quality of riprap and riprap bedding blanket materials shall be obtained
before beginning the riprap work. Certified reports shall be submitted to the Site QA Manager. The
reports shall certify compliance with the requirements of these specifications and the appropriate
Vietnamese standards. Continued compliance with all contract provisions will be required. Riprap
shall match existing riprap in color and appearance to the maximum extent practicable.
02375.3.5.1 Riprap Bedding. Riprap bedding materials shall meet the following requirements:
Test
Designation
Requirements
Sampling
AASHTO T2-85
No special requirements.
Sieve analysis
AASHTO T27-84
Percentages passing
standard sieve sizes 50
mm, 38 mm, 25 mm, 13
mm, 10 mm, and 5 mm.
Organic matter (Alternate

Procedure A)
AASHTO T21-81
Test solution lighter in

color than standard.
Clay lumps
AASHTO T112-81
Not to exceed 1.5 percent

by weight.
Lightweight pieces
AASHTO T113-86
Not to exceed 2 percent by

weight.
The bedding materials shall meet the specific gravity and abrasion test requirements specified in the
article titled Dumped Riprap.
02375.3.5.2 Dumped Riprap. The stone sources shall be selected well in advance of the scheduled
time for riprap construction work. Stone acceptability shall be determined by testing. Suitable
samples of stone shall be taken at least 25 days before riprap work is scheduled to begin. The
acceptance of some rock fragments from a quarry site shall not construe acceptance of all rock
fragments from that quarry.
Dumped riprap materials shall meet the following requirements:
Test
Source: 02375, 2009, v.1.1

Draft
Designation
Requirements
Rip Rap
Page 37 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Specific gravity (bulk

saturated surface dry)
AASHTO T85-85
Greater than 2.50.
Abrasion (Abrasive
Grading A)
AASHTO T96-83
Less than 40 percent loss

of weight after 500
revolutions.
Documented service records of the proposed material shall be furnished to the Site QA Manager for
evaluating acceptability of the stone.
02375.3.5.3 Geotextile. Geotextile shall be a nonwoven fabric consisting of continuous chain or
stapled polymeric filaments or yarns of polyester, formed into a stable network by needle punching.
The geotextile shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals and hydrocarbons. It shall be
resistant to mildew and rot, ultraviolet radiation, insects, and rodents. The geotextile shall conform to
the properties in the following table. The average roll minimum value for strength properties shall be
in excess of the average roll minimum value stipulated below. The average roll minimum value is
defined as the sampling average in the weakest principal direction of the designated physical
properties for the roll within a production lot designated first quality.
Test
Designation
Requirements
Grab tensile strength
ASTM D4632
1,100 N
Elongation at failure
ASTM D4632
50 percent minimum
Puncture strength
ASTM D4833
600 N
Weight
ASTM D3776
0.34 kg/sq m
AOS
ASTM D4751
0.210 0.125 mm
Water flow rate
ASTM D4491
3,260 lpm/sq m
02375.3.6 Placement
Riprap work shall not start until the riprap materials are accepted by the Site Construction Manager.
Dumped riprap and riprap bedding materials shall be placed where indicated on the drawings.
Earth slopes shall be prepared and compacted as specified in the section titled EARTHWORK.
The geotextile fabric shall be placed over the subgrade prior to placing the riprap. Geotextile shall be
placed per the manufacturers instructions.
Riprap bedding blanket layers shall be placed on the prepared areas to the full layer thickness in one
operation without causing segregation of particle sizes. Additional layers shall be placed without
mixing the material between layers. The finished surface shall be even and free from mounds or
windrows.
Riprap shall be placed on the prepared areas to produce a well graded mass of stone with a minimum
percentage of voids. The entire stone mass shall be placed to the lines and grades indicated on the
drawings. Riprap shall be placed to the indicated thickness in one operation without displacing the
underlying material. Riprap shall be placed without segregation of material. Riprap shall not be
dropped more than 600 mm onto the underlying geotextile fabric. Fabric damaged during the
placement of the riprap shall be uncovered and repaired or replaced as required.
Large stones shall be well distributed and the entire stone mass shall conform to the specified
gradation. Riprap protection shall be placed and distributed to avoid large accumulations of either the
larger or smaller sizes of stone.
Source: 02375, 2009, v.1.1

Draft
Rip Rap
Page 38 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
The finished riprap shall be uniformly distributed so that the smaller rock fragments fill the spaces
between the larger rock fragments resulting in a compact, uniform layer of the specified thickness.
The lines and grades indicated on the drawings shall be provided within a tolerance of 75 mm.
Deviations from the designated lines, at the limits of the specified tolerance, shall not extend over an
area greater than 20 square meters.
Source: 02375, 2009, v.1.1

Draft
Rip Rap
Page 39 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02541 - Oil/Water Separators/Underground Tanks

02541.1 General
Scope of supply shall include installing oil/water separators, and associated components, and
underground tanks detailed under these technical specifications.
Purchase specifications for the oil/water separator and underground tanks are provided under a
separate specification.
Not used.
Work
In Accordance With
Oil/water separator design
American Petroleum Institute (API) Manual

on Disposal of Refinery Wastes
API Bulletin No. 421
Steel separator manufacture
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL),

Subject UL-58 standards
Monitor panel manufacture

Subject UL-913 standards
Fiberglass separator manufacture

Subject UL-1316 and UL-2215 standards
Underground tanks manufacture
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Type

1 and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 1746
listed tank
02541.1.5 Materials
General
Component
Material
Oil/water separators and underground

tanks
Steel or concrete

Not used.
Source: 02541, 2010, v.1.4
Oil/Water Separators/Underground Tanks
Page 40 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011


Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the standards listed in the following table.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Recommended by oil water

separator manufacturer
Manufacturer's users manual
Supplier

Not used.
The oil/water separators manufacturers installation specifications shall be followed.
02541.2 Products
02541.2.1 General
This technical specification describes the installation requirements for oil/water separators, and
associated components, and underground tanks.
02541.2.2 Acceptable Manufacturers
Not used.
02541.2.3 Material
Not used.
02541.3 Execution
02541.3.1 Installation
Oil/water separators and underground tanks will be installed where located on the project drawings
and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The work shall include proper
placement, anchorage, and backfill of the oil/water separator, as well as installation of all associated
pumps, piping, alarms, monitoring panels, and other items purchased with the oil/water separator.
Source: 02541, 2010, v.1.4
Oil/Water Separators/Underground Tanks
Page 41 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02581 - Electrical Manholes

02581.1 General
Electrical manholes shall also include utility vaults, telephone vaults, and pull boxes that are part of
the underground ductbank system.
The following specification is written assuming the manholes are precast concrete. If it is determined
the manholes will be cast-in-place, then construction of the manholes shall follow the requirements
provided in specification 03311 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Scope of supply shall include furnishing electrical manholes and installing electrical manholes and
providing miscellaneous materials and services complete as specified herein:
Scope of Supply:
Design, detailing and production of calculations and drawings.
Material procurement, fabrication and shipping in accordance with these
specifications and the drawings.
Components supplied:
Precast concrete sections
Joint seals for precast sections
Access castings
Continuous inserts for cable racks
Pulling-in irons
Lifting lugs for all precast sections
RGS or PVC conduits cast into walls with plugs installed at each end
Neoprene gaskets at manhole lid
Hydrophilic seals at ductbank connections
Scope of Installation:
Receipt, inspection, unloading, storage and installation of materials furnished
under these specifications or furnished by others, in accordance with the
specifications and the drawings.
02581.1.1.1 Miscellaneous Materials and Services. Miscellaneous materials and services not
otherwise specifically called for shall be furnished in accordance with the following:
All other component parts and connection materials required to complete the
electrical manholes.
Tests and inspections required by the specifications.
02581.1.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials and Services for Erection. Miscellaneous materials and
services not otherwise specifically called for shall be furnished in accordance with the following:
Supply, install and remove all temporary bracing, rigging, attachments, and supports.
Source: 02581, 2009, v.1.1
Electrical Manholes
Page 42 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Survey and lay out the work from the designated control points.
Remove knock-out panels where required.
Supply and install masonry materials and grout where required.
Supply and install bedding materials.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for the electrical manholes are indicated in these
specifications and on the drawings:
Traffic load criteria
AASHTO H-20 loading
Groundwater level (distance below top of

manholes)
at top of manhole
Ground surcharge due to crane loading of

adjacent ground surface area
130 kN/square meter
Unit weight of backfill material
18.4 kN/cubic meter
Coefficient of at-rest earth pressure, Ko
0.50

standards. The version that is the latest adopted, published, and effective at the date of this
document shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise. These references shall govern the work
except where they conflict with these specifications. In cases of conflict, the latter shall govern to the
Work
In Accordance With
Precast Concrete Quality
Fabricated in accordance with the National

Precast Concrete Association Quality
Control Manual.
Manhole Loading
ASTM C857, Standard Practice for

Minimum Structural Design Loading for
Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures
Manhole Design and Construction
ASTM C858, Standard Specification for

Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures, except as modified herein
Reinforced Concrete Design
ACI 318
In addition, all concrete work shall meet the applicable requirements of TCXDVN 356:2005 and local
and Vietnamese National building codes and standards.
02581.1.5 Materials
Source: 02581, 2009, v.1.1
Electrical Manholes
Page 43 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Component
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Material
Precast sections
Concrete
Minimum 28 day compressive strength =

28 MPa
Portland cement ASTM C150 Type II
Water-cement ratio = 0.45 or less
Air content = 3.0 to 6.0 percent
Reinforcing steel
Wire
ASTM A82 or ASTM A496
Welded wire fabric
Bars
Manholes: ASTM A615/A615M
Admixtures
Water reducing
ASTM C494
Air-entraining
ASTM C260
Waterproofing
Xypex Admix C-1000 as sold by Xypex

Chemical Corporation of Richmond, British
Columbia or approved equal
Openings
As indicated on the drawings
Infill masonry (when required to fill

unnecessary openings in the precast )
Concrete block
Solid units conforming to ASTM C139
Brick
ASTM C32, Grade MS or ASTM C62

Grade SW
Mortar
One part Portland cement (ASTM C150),

one-quarter part hydrated lime (ASTM
C207, Type S), four parts sand (ASTM
C144 natural sand, 95 percent passing No.
16 sieve) with integral waterproofing
(aluminum stearate, ammonium stearate
or calcium stearate, 2 percent of weight of
cement)
Precast joint sealant
Preformed butyl rubber joint sealant

meeting the requirements of ASTM C990
Iron castings for manhole access
ASTM A48, Class 35 or better
Pulling-in irons
Cooper Power Systems, Condux

International or Osburn Associates, 12
inch with retaining plate and crossbar,
galvanized
Source: 02581, 2009, v.1.1
Electrical Manholes
Page 44 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Component
Material
Continuous inserts for concrete
Cooper B-Line B22-ISeries, hot-dip

galvanized
Lifting lugs for precast sections
Dayton/Richmond Utility Anchor Lifting

System. Lugs designed for safe working
loads
Hydrophilic seals
Adeka Ultra-Seal MC2010M
General purpose nonshrinking

cementitious grout
Grout shall meet ASTM C1107 criteria

Component
Manufacturer
Iron castings for manhole access
Neenah Foundry
Pulling-in irons
Cooper Power Systems, Condux

International, Osburn Associates
Continuous inserts for concrete
Cooper B-Line
Lifting lugs for precast sections
Dayton/Richmond
Hydrophilic seals
Adeka

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Precast concrete compressive

strength
ASTM C31, C192, C39
Supplier
Precast concrete air content
ASTM C231 or C173
Supplier

Not used.
Not used.
02581.2 Products
02581.2.1 General
This article covers materials and construction of electrical manholes. Manholes shall be constructed
complete with cover, precast necks, wall and top sections, bottom, wall openings, sump depressions,
pulling-in irons, and other appurtenances in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings.
If shown on the drawings, capped RGS or PVC conduits for future connections shall be provided in
manholes at the locations indicated on the drawings.
Source: 02581, 2009, v.1.1
Electrical Manholes
Page 45 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
The top surface of the manhole bottom slab shall be sloped toward the sump as indicated on the
drawings.
Embedments shall be located as indicated on the drawings.
Precast manholes shall be constructed to the dimensions indicated on the drawings. Embedments
shall be firmly fixed in the forms to prevent dislodgment during construction. Lifting eyes or lugs shall
be provided in each precast section. The wall sections shall have interlocking joints that provide a
watertight seal.
02581.2.2 Design
The precast Supplier shall design the electrical manholes for all design loads in accordance with ACI
318 and these specifications. The load combinations that produce the maximum shear and moment
shall be used to design the structure. Manholes shall be adequately reinforced to resist the maximum
design stresses. The dead load shall consist of soil surcharge and structure weight. Live and impact
loads shall be determined by the traffic load conditions specified in Article 02581.1.3.
Electrical manholes shall be designed to prevent flotation with the manhole empty and the
groundwater level at a distance from the top of the manhole as specified in Article 02581.1.3.
02581.2.3 Drawings
Not used.
02581.2.4 Precast Concrete Fabrication
Precast concrete fabrication shall be in accordance with industry standards and the following.
02581.2.4.1 Forms. Forms for manufacturing precast concrete products shall be of the type and
design consistent with industry standards. They shall be capable of consistently providing uniform
products and dimensions. Forms shall be constructed so that the forces and vibrations to which the
forms will be subjected can cause no product damage.
Forms shall be cleaned of concrete buildup after each use.
Form release agents shall not be allowed to build up on the form casting surfaces.
02581.2.4.2 Reinforcement. Cages of reinforcement shall be fabricated either by tying the bars,
wires or welded wire fabric into rigid assemblies or by welding where permissible in accordance with
ANSI/AWS D1.4. Reinforcing shall be positioned as specified by the design and so that the concrete
cover conforms to requirements. Positive means shall be taken to assure that the reinforcement does
not move significantly during the casting operations.
02581.2.4.3 Placing Concrete. Concrete shall be deposited into forms as near to its final location
as practical. The free fall of the concrete shall be kept to a minimum. Concrete shall be consolidated
in such a manner that segregation of the concrete is minimized and honeycombed areas are kept to a
minimum. Vibrators used to consolidate concrete shall have frequencies and amplitudes sufficient to
produce well-consolidated concrete.
Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.
02581.2.4.4 Curing by Moisture Retention. Moisture shall be prevented from evaporating from
exposed surfaces until adequate strength for stripping is reached by one of the following methods:
Cover with polyethylene sheets a minimum of 0.16 mm thick.
Cover with burlap or other absorptive material and keep continually moist.
Source: 02581, 2009, v.1.1
Electrical Manholes
Page 46 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Use of a membrane-curing compound applied at a rate not to exceed 5 sq. meters

per liter, or in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
02581.2.4.5 Curing with Heat and Moisture. Concrete shall not be subjected to steam or hot air
until after the concrete has attained its initial set. Steam, if used, shall be applied within a suitable
enclosure, which permits free circulation of the steam. If hot air is used for curing, precautions shall
be taken to prevent moisture loss from the concrete. The temperature of the concrete shall not be
permitted to exceed 70 degrees C.
02581.2.4.6 Stripping Products from Forms. Precast sections shall not be removed from the
forms until the concrete reaches the compressive strength for stripping required by the design. If no
such requirement exists, products may be removed from the forms after the final set of concrete,
provided that stripping damage is minimal.
02581.2.4.7 Shipping. Precast sections shall not be shipped until they are at least 5 days old,
unless it can be shown that the concrete strength has reached at least 75 percent of the specified 28
day strength.
02581.3 Execution
02581.3.1 General
Precast concrete sections shall be inspected when delivered to the site. Cracked or otherwise visibly
defective units shall be rejected and removed from the site.
02581.3.2 Construction
Manholes shall be constructed and installed to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. The
sections shall be lifted by suitable lifting devices at points provided by the precast Supplier and
installed in accordance with the precast Suppliers recommendations. Joints between precast
sections shall be sealed with a rubber gasket.
Where masonry is required to close the ductbank openings in the manhole walls,, mortar shall be
used within 40 minutes after mixing. Mortar that begins to set shall be discarded. Outside surfaces
of brick and block masonry shall be plastered with mortar.
Source: 02581, 2009, v.1.1
Electrical Manholes
Page 47 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02621 - Geosynthetic Drainage Layer

02621.1 General
Scope of supply liner, and associated quality control/quality assurance inspection and testing.
Subgrade requirements are provided in Section 02220 - Earthwork.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for the geotextiles are indicated in Article 02344.1.5.
02621.1.4 Materials
The polymer used to manufacture the geonet component of the geosynthetic drainage layer shall be
polyethylene which is clean and free of any foreign contaminants. Regrind material which consists of
edge trimmings and other scraps may be used to manufacture the geonet; however, post-consumer
recycled materials shall not be used. The geosynthetic drainage layer shall conform to the property
requirements listed below. Component criteria for the geonet alone and geotextile alone are also
listed below. The geonet shall be covered on both sides with nonwoven geotextile. Geocomposite
shall be created by heat bonding geotextile to the geonet. The geotextile shall not be bonded to the
drainage net within 150 millimeters of the edges of the rolls. Where applicable, property values below
represent minimum average roll values (MARV). The value for AOS represents the maximum
average roll value (MaxARV).
Geonet Properties
Thickness, minimum avg., mm, see Note 1
Polymer specific gravity, minimum avg.
0.94
Carbon Black Content, percent
1-3
Tensile Strength, minimum avg., kN/m, see Note

2
Geotextile Properties
Apparent Opening Size (mm)
0.25
Permittivity, Sec
0.2
Puncture, kN
0.25
Elongation at break, percent
50
Grab Tensile, kN
0.7
Trapezoidal tear, kN
Mass/Unit Area, kg/m
0.25
2
70
UV Stability, percent retained (500 hrs), Note 3
50
Geocomposite Properties
Transmissivity, min, including attached
geotextiles, see Note 4
Source: 02344, 2005, v.1.0
3.05 x10-5 min-m
Geosynthetic Drainage Layer
Page 48 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Geonet/Geotextile Adhesion, minimum avg.

kN/m, see Note 5
0.36
Note 1: The diameter of the presser foot shall be minimum 50 millimeter and the
pressure shall be 2100 kg/m2. For other thickness options, see manufacturer's
literature.
Note 2: This is the average peak value for five equally spaced machine direction tests
across the roll width.
Note 3: Manufacturer's historical data.
Note 4: Manufacturing quality control transmissivity tests shall be measured using a
gradient of 1.0 under a normal pressure of 10,000 kg/m2. A minimum seating period of
15 minutes shall be used. The test shall be performed between rigid end platens.
Note 5: Average of five tests across the roll width. Discounting the outer foot of each
side of the roll, samples shall be collected at the 10, 30, 50, 70, and 90 percent
positions across the roll width. Both sides shall be tested for double sided
geocomposites.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Thickness
ASTM D5199
Manufacturer
Polymer Density
ASTM D1505
Manufacturer
Carbon Black Content
ASTM D1603
Manufacturer
Tensile Strength
ASTM D5035
Manufacturer
Apparent Opening Size
ASTM D4751
Manufacturer
Permittivity
ASTM D4833
Manufacturer
Puncture, N
ASTM D4833
Manufacturer
Elongation at break, percent
ASTM D4632
Manufacturer
Grab Tensile, N
ASTM D4632
Manufacturer
Trapezoidal tear, N
ASTM D4533
Manufacturer
Mass/Unit Area, g/m2
ASTM D5261
Manufacturer
UV Stability
ASTM D4355
Manufacturer
Transmissivity
ASTM D4716
Manufacturer
Geonet/Geotextile Adhesion
GRI GC7
Manufacturer
Geonet
Geotextile
Geocomposite
02621.2 Products
Source: 02344, 2005, v.1.0
Page 49 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02621.2.1 General
This section covers the material requirements for geocomposite material as specified in
Article 02344.1.5. The geotextile shall be installed to the limits indicated on the drawings in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications.
02621.2.1.1 Quality Control. Quality control (QC) shall be performed in accordance with these
specifications. Quality control testing requirements and frequency shall be in accordance with
Article 02621.3.5, Field Quality Control. All quality control field and laboratory testing will be
performed by the Contractor.
02621.2.2 Drawings and Data
Not used.
02621.2.3 Materials
The Manufacturer shall be responsible for establishing and maintaining a quality control program to
assure compliance with the requirements of the specification. Documentation describing the quality
control program shall be made available upon request. Manufacturing quality control sampling and
testing shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's approved quality control manual.
As a minimum, geotextiles shall be randomly sampled for testing in accordance with ASTM D 4354,
Procedure A. Acceptance of geotextile shall be in accordance with ASTM D 4759. Tests not meeting
the specified requirements shall result in the rejection of applicable rolls.
02621.3 Execution
The geomembrane liner surface underlying the geocomposite shall be free of all materials that could
damage the liner or geocomposite.
The Contractor shall keep the previously prepared receiving surface in the accepted condition until the
geocomposite installation is complete.
02621.3.2 Delivery and Storage
Rolls of geotextile shall be protected from construction equipment, chemicals, sparks and flames,
temperatures in excess of 71 degrees C, or any other environmental condition that may damage the
physical properties of the geotextile. To protect geotextile from becoming saturated, rolls shall either
be elevated off the ground or placed on a sacrificial sheet of plastic in an area where water will not
accumulate.
Rolls shall be packaged in an opaque, waterproof, protective plastic wrapping. The plastic wrapping
shall not be removed until deployment. If quality assurance samples are collected, rolls shall be
immediately rewrapped with the plastic wrapping. Geotextile or plastic wrapping damaged during
storage or handling shall be repaired or replaced, as directed. Each roll shall be labeled with the
manufacturer's name, geotextile type, roll number, roll dimensions (length, width, gross weight), and
date manufactured.
02621.3.3 Geocomposite Installation
Geocomposite rolls shall be handled and unloaded with load carrying straps, a fork lift with a stinger
bar, or an axial bar assembly. Rolls shall not be dragged along the ground, lifted by one end, or
dropped to the ground.
All rips, tears, punctures, or other injuries to the geotextile or geocomposite shall be repaired the same
day they occur in accordance with procedures as specified herein.
Cleanup within the work area shall be an ongoing responsibility of the Contractor. Particular care shall
be taken to ensure that no trash, tools, and other unwanted materials are dragged across or trapped
beneath the geotextile.
Source: 02344, 2005, v.1.0
Page 50 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
The geosynthetic drainage layer shall not be damaged during placement. The drainage layer shall be
unrolled in the direction of maximum slope, keeping the net flat against the subgrade to minimize
wrinkles and folds. The drainage layer shall not be dragged across textured geomembrane if a
geotextile is attached to the surface facing the geomembrane. Adequate ballast (e.g. sandbags) shall
be placed to prevent uplift by wind prior to covering.
The geocomposite shall be protected during installation from clogging, tears, and other damage.
Damaged geotextile shall be repaired or replaced as directed. Repairs shall be made by placing a
patch of the geosynthetic drainage layer over the damaged area. The patch shall extend a minimum
of 0.6 meters beyond the edge of the damage. Approved fasteners, spaced every 150 millimeters
around the patch, shall be used to hold the patch in place. If more than 25 percent of the roll width is
damaged, approval must be obtained to repair or replace the damaged roll.
Damaged geotextile shall be repaired by placing a patch of geotextile over the damaged area with a
minimum of 0.3 meters of overlap in all directions. The geotextile patch shall be thermally bonded in
place.
02621.3.4 Seaming
02621.3.4.1 Geonet Side Seams. Geonet side seams shall be overlapped a minimum of 150
millimeters. Side seam fastener spacing shall be a maximum of 1.5 meter. In anchor trenches,
fastener spacing shall be a maximum of 0.3 meter.
02621.3.4.2 Geonet End Seams. Geonet end seams shall be overlapped a minimum of 0.3
meters. End seam fastener spacing shall be a maximum of 150 millimeters. The overlaps shall be in
the direction of flow.
02621.3.4.3 Geonet Fasteners. Geonet rolls shall be tied together with plastic fasteners. The
fasteners shall be a contrasting color from the geonet and attached geotextiles. Metallic fasteners will
not be allowed.
02621.3.4.4 Geotextile Seams. The geotextile component of the geocomposite shall be
overlapped in the direction of flow or thermally bonded using approved methods.
02621.3.4.5 Geotextile Cap Strips. Geotextile cap strips shall be placed over any exposed edges
of geocomposite. Cap strips shall be a minimum of 0.6 meters in width and shall be thermally bonded
to the geotextile component of the geocomposite.
02621.3.4.6 Inspection and Testing. Geotextile shall not be covered or geomembrane liner placed
prior to inspection and approval by the Site QA Manager. Drainage fill shall be placed in a manner
that prevents fill from entering the geotextile overlap zone, prevents tensile stress from being
mobilized in the geotextile, and prevents wrinkles from folding over onto themselves. On side slopes,
drainage fill shall be placed from the bottom of the slope upward. Drainage fill shall not be dropped
onto the geotextile from a height greater than 1 meter. No equipment shall be operated directly on
top of the geotextile without approval of the Site QA Manager. A minimum of 150 millimeters of soil
shall be maintained between construction equipment and the geotextile. Drainage fill material type,
compaction, and testing requirements are described in Section 02220 EARTHWORK. Equipment
placing cover soil shall not stop abruptly, make sharp turns, spin their wheels, or travel at speeds
exceeding 8 kmph.
02621.3.5 Field Quality Control
This article describes the activities necessary to monitor the construction of the geomembrane.
Specific tests mentioned in this section shall be performedas part of the construction quality control
for the project.
Source: 02344, 2005, v.1.0
Page 51 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02621.3.5.1 Preconstruction. Preconstruction activities for the liners include observation of the raw
materials, manufacturing operations, fabrication operations, and final product quality; observations
related to transportation, handling, and storage of the synthetic liner; monitoring of the subgrade
(base) preparation; and evaluation of the personnel and equipment to be used to install the liners.
These activities are discussed in the following articles.
02621.3.5.1.1 Quality control of manufacturer. Documentation must be provided confirming that
the raw materials comply with the manufacturer's product properties and performance requirements.
02621.3.5.1.2 Transportation and storage. Confirm that the geocomposite has been protected
with appropriate covering material. The roll of finished liner material must be marked to show the
following minimum information:
Name of manufacturer.
Product type.
Manufacturing batch code.
Date of manufacture.
Physical dimensions (length and width).
The geocomposite material will be observed to confirm that it is not damaged by the following:
Punctures from handling, nails, splinters, etc.
Tears from operation of equipment or inadequate packaging.
Exposure to temperature extremes resulting in unusable material.
Crumpling or tearing from inadequate packaging support.
When damage to a roll cover has occurred, examination of the underlying material will be conducted.
If damage is found, the entire shipment shall be examined for damage.
Review delivery tickets and quality control documentation to confirm that the liner rolls received onsite
meet the project specifications.
Confirm that the geocomposite material is stored in a secure area with provisions for protection from
adverse weather to avoid damage caused by heavy winds, precipitation, temperature extremes,
vandals, and any other causes.
02621.3.5.2 Construction. The observations and tests necessary to detect defects during
construction are discussed in the following articles.
02621.3.5.2.1 Geocomposite placement. Identifying labels from each roll will be taken and saved
for future reference. Monitoring activities that are necessary and that will be documented during liner
placement include the following:
Observations regarding the geocomposite placement.
Observations of the weather conditions (i.e., temperature, humidity, precipitation, and
wind) and that they are appropriate for geocomposite placement.
Source: 02344, 2005, v.1.0
Page 52 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Measurements to confirm that the required overlaps of adjacent geotextile sheets

were achieved.
As each geocomposite roll is placed, it shall be inspected for tears, punctures, and thin spots. To
accomplish this, the panels will be traversed by inspection personnel in such a way that the entire
surface is observed.
If the weather becomes unacceptable for installation of the geocomposite, the Site QA Manager will
stop the installation until conditions again become favorable, thus minimizing the potential for
unacceptable installation.
Source: 02344, 2005, v.1.0
Page 53 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02622 - Plant Drain Piping (Gravity Piping)

02622.1 General
The Plant Drain Piping includes inslab, underslab, and underground drain piping that is associated
with one or more of the process drain systems. These systems include GMD (Chemical Wastewater), GQA (Sanitary Drainage), GNK (Wastewater Collection), and GMB (Oil Spill Prevention).
The site underground storm drain piping and culverts are covered in the 02623 - Culverts and Storm
Drain Piping specification. Underground pressure piping is covered in the Section 15226.
Scope of work shall include furnishing materials, labor, incidentals, and equipment required to
perform the piping work, in accordance with applicable laws, ordinances and this specification.
Scope of Work
Material procurement, fabrication, surface preparation, coating application and
shipping in accordance with these specifications, the pipeline list and the
drawings. Materials supplied shall include all piping, floor drains, fittings,
gaskets, bolts and other appurtenances required by these specifications or
otherwise required to construct a complete piping system.
specifications and the drawings. Installation shall include trenching, bedding,
pipe assembly and backfill.
Testing required by these specifications and the pipeline list.

Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for drainage piping are indicated herein and in the pipeline list.
Work
In Accordance With
Drainage piping work
All applicable codes and ordinances and

laws and regulations of the state that
pertain
Plumbing work
Local or state plumbing codes and

ordinances, if available; otherwise, all
applicable provisions of the Uniform
Plumbing Code
Source: 02622, 2010, v.1.1
Plant Drain Piping
Page 54 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Work
In Accordance With
Installation of seamless polyethylene

tube protection for ductile iron piping
ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 Method A
Water drainage design
TCVN 7957: 2008 Water drainage

System and outside works Design
standard
02622.1.5 Materials
The following materials shall be used where indicated in the pipeline list or on the drawings:
Component
Material
Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP)
ASTM A746
Cement linings
ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4
Push-on joints with neoprene or

synthetic rubber gaskets capable
of withstanding temperatures up
to 100 C.
Ductile iron fittings
Polyethylene encasement
ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 Method A
Carbon Steel Pipe (CS)
ASTM A106 Grade B
50 mm or smaller
Schedule 80 (Unless otherwise noted in

the pipeline list)
65 mm or larger
Schedule 40 (Unless otherwise noted in

the pipeline list)
Fittings
ASTM A234/A234M or ASTM

A216/A216M Grade WCB
Flanges, ANSI Pressure Class

150

A105/A105M
High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
PE 3408 materials meeting ASTM D3350

cell classification 345464C
Pipe fabrication (50 mm, 75 mm)
ASTM D3035
Pipe fabrication (100 mm and

larger)
ASTM F714
Fittings
ASTM D2683, ASTM D3261
Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe (FRP)
ASTM D2997
Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC)
ASTM D2665
Solvent
Cast Iron Soil Pipe (CISP)
Joints
Source: 02622, 2010, v.1.1
ASTM D2564
ASTM A74
ASTM C564 and CISPI 301
Plant Drain Piping
Page 55 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011


For the following components, only the listed manufacturers are recognized as maintaining the level
of quality of workmanship required by these specifications. Components by nonlisted manufacturers
must equal or exceed the performance of those listed.
Component
Manufacturer
Ductile Iron Pipe
American Cast Iron Pipe Company, U.S.

Pipe and Foundry Company
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
CPChem Performance Pipe DriscoPlexTM

4100
Fiberglass Reinforced Pipe
Smith-Fibercast Centricast Plus RB-2530

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Hydrostatic
Article 02622.3.7
Contractor

Not used.
Not used.
02622.2 Products
02622.2.1 General
This article covers the furnishing of materials, devices, and appurtenances for complete drain piping
systems.
02622.2.2 Materials
02622.2.2.1 Pipe Lengths. Ductile iron and FRP pipes shall be furnished in the manufacturer's
standard lengths. Carbon steel, HDPE and PVC piping shall be furnished in 12 meter lengths.
HDPE piping shall be furnished in straight sections, not in rolls.
02622.2.2.2 Pipe Joints. Pipe joint materials shall be provided in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer and these specifications.
Ductile iron pipe connections shall be capable of withstanding temperatures up to 100 degrees C.
Carbon steel pipe shall be supplied with weld end preps for both ends. Unless otherwise indicated in
the attachment(s), carbon steel fittings 65 mm and larger shall be butt welding type and steel fittings
50 mm and smaller shall be socket welding type. Butt welding fitting wall thickness shall be equal to
the pipe wall thickness with which they are used. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, elbows
shall be of the long radius type. Forged steel fittings shall be used for socket-welded and threaded
connections.
Fittings for HDPE piping systems shall have pressure ratings equivalent to the straight pipe section
with which they will be used. Fittings shall be of the molded type unless otherwise accepted by the
Site Construction Manager. Fittings shall be of the butt fusion weld, socket fusion weld, or saddle
type as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the point of application within the system.
Source: 02622, 2010, v.1.1
Plant Drain Piping
Page 56 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
FRP and PVC piping shall be furnished with compatible fittings, solvents and adhesives.
02622.2.2.3 Floor Drains. Floor drains shall be the type and size indicated on the drawings. Floor
drains shall be adjusted to the elevation designated on the drawings.
02622.2.2.4 Pipe Coatings. Protective coatings shall be furnished and applied to the exterior
surfaces of underground piping as indicated in the Pipeline List.
02622.2.2.5 Polyethylene Tube Protection. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings included in
these specifications, all ductile pipe embedded or encased in concrete or installed underground shall
be provided with seamless polyethylene tube protection. Installation of the tubing shall be in
accordance with Article 02622.1.4.
02622.3 Execution
This article covers the installation of complete drainage pipe systems from the top of the ground floor
or finished grade elevation to the limits indicated on the drawings.
02622.3.1 Handling
All piping, fittings, and accessories shall be unloaded, handled and stored in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Equipment, tools, and methods used in loading, unloading,
reloading, and hauling shall not cause damage to the pipe and fittings. Damaged pipe shall be
removed from the site. Damaged pipe coating shall be repaired before installing the pipe.
Pipe having premolded joints shall be handled to prevent damage to the joints.
02622.3.2 General Pipe Installation Requirements
All necessary provisions shall be taken in laying out piping to provide for expansion and contraction.
Piping shall be supported and anchored to prevent displacement or flotation.
Bell-ups shall be installed with the top rim at the elevation indicated on the drawings. Tolerances for
bell-up and other above grade or below grade terminal points shall be +/- 12 mm in plan and
elevation.
02622.3.2.1 Cutting. Cutting shall be performed in a neat manner without damaging the pipe. Cuts
shall be smooth, straight, and at right angles to the pipe axis. Pipe shall be cut with mechanical pipe
cutters. Where the use of mechanical cutters is difficult or impractical, the proposed method of cutting
shall be acceptable to the Site Construction Manager.
02622.3.2.2 Cleaning. All dirt and scale shall be thoroughly cleaned from the interior of all pipe and
fittings before installation. Pipe shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted. Burrs in the
ends of pipe shall be removed by reaming.
Surfaces shall be wire brushed, if necessary, and wiped clean, dry, and free from oil and grease
before the joints are assembled. Joint contact surfaces shall be kept clean until the jointing is
complete.
Foreign matter shall be prevented from entering the pipe during installation. No debris, tools, clothing,
or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
02622.3.2.3 Inspection. Pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects
immediately before installation. Defective pipe and fittings shall be removed from the work site.
02622.3.3 Alignment
Piping shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings. Laser beam equipment or
surveying instruments shall be used to maintain alignment and grade.
Source: 02622, 2010, v.1.1
Plant Drain Piping
Page 57 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Laser beam equipment shall have periodic elevation measurements made with surveying instruments
to verify accuracy of grades. If measurements indicate thermal deflection of the laser beam,
precautions shall be taken to prevent or minimize further thermal deflections.
02622.3.4 Laying Pipe
Drainage piping shall be laid on uniformly descending grades. Trenching, embedment, and
backfilling shall be as specified in Section 02315 - Trenching.
Lateral displacement of the pipe shall be prevented during embedment operations. Pipe shall not be
laid in water.
Pipe laying shall begin at the lowest elevation with bell ends facing the direction of laying, except
when reverse laying is permitted by the Site QA Manager. Piping installed within foundations shall be
held securely in place to prevent displacement during concrete placement.
Pipe laying shall be set according to the elevations indicated on the drawings.
When pipe laying is stopped, the open end of the pipe shall be closed with an end board closely fitting
the end of the pipe to prevent entry of sand and earth. The end board shall have several small holes
near the center to permit water to enter the pipe and prevent flotation.
The pipe shall form a true and smooth line when jointed in the trench. Pipe shall not be trimmed
except for closures. Pipe not making a good fit shall be removed. For pipe with acceptable defects,
the pipe shall be placed with the defect in the top of the line.
Maximum allowable diametral deflection of HDPE pipe shall not exceed the requirements of ASTM
F714 and the recommendations of the pipe manufacturer.
02622.3.5 Jointing
Joint preparation and jointing operations shall comply with written instructions and recommendations
of the pipe manufacturer.
02622.3.5.1 Carbon Steel Pipe Joints. Carbon steel piping shall be field welded in accordance with
the welding requirements included herein.
02622.3.5.2 PVC Pipe Welded Joints. Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with the
recommendations of the pipe manufacturer. Before joining, the ends of the pipe shall be cut square
and smooth and wiped clean. Solvent cement shall be applied to the outside of the pipe and inside of
the fitting socket with a small paintbrush. The coated surfaces shall be immediately pushed snugly
together and the pipe rotated approximately one-half turn to uniformly distribute the cement. Excess
solvent cement shall be removed.
02622.3.5.3 HDPE Butt Heat Fusion Joints. Butt heat fusion welds or electrofusion welds (if
acceptable by local codes) in HDPE pipe shall be performed according to the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations.
02622.3.6 Concrete Encasement
Drainage piping installed under the ground floor slab shall be encased in concrete where indicated on
the drawings. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with 03311 - Cast-in-Place
Concrete. Piping being encased shall be rigidly supported and blocked in position and anchored
against flotation or movement. Mechanically joined pipe shall be sufficiently protected to prevent
damage during the placement of concrete. All piping penetrations shall be monitored during the
placement of concrete for location and elevation in accordance with the drawings.
Source: 02622, 2010, v.1.1
Plant Drain Piping
Page 58 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02622.3.7 Testing
All drain piping shall be tested for leakage and obstructions. Piping designated to be embedded in
concrete or below concrete shall be tested before the concrete is placed. Piping that will be
completely embedded in concrete need not be tested for exfiltration.
Pipe shall be rodded throughout its entire length if a blockage or obstruction is realized after the
system has been tested or completed. All defects shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Site QA
Manager.
The Contractor shall conduct an exfiltration test on each reach of drain piping. The first line of each
pipe material shall be tested before backfilling and before any pipe is installed in the remainder of the
work. After this, individual or multiple reaches may be tested, provided the testing is acceptable to
the Site QA Manager.
Exfiltration tests shall be conducted by blocking off all openings except those connecting to the reach
being tested, filling the line with water, and measuring the water required to maintain a constant level.
During the exfiltration test, the average water depth above the pipe invert at the lower end shall be at
least to the elevation of the ground surface. The maximum depth at the lower end shall not exceed 8
meters , and the minimum depth at the upper end shall be at least 1.5 meters above the crown of the
pipe or 1.5 meters above ground water elevation, whichever is higher.
The total exfiltration shall not exceed 15 liters per 25 mm of nominal diameter per 30 meters of pipe
per day for each reach tested. Exfiltration tests shall be maintained on each reach for at least 2 hours
and as long as necessary to locate all leaks to the satisfaction of the Site QA Manager.
All necessary piping between the reach being tested and the source of water, and all labor,
equipment, and materials required for the tests, shall be provided. The methods used and the length
of time for conducting the exfiltration tests shall be acceptable to the Site QA Manager. If the leakage
in any reach exceeds the allowable maximum, repairs shall be made and the piping retested.
Upon completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be clean. All pipe and fittings shall be
cleaned to remove grease, metal cuttings, and sludge. Stoppage or other damage, caused by the
failure to clean the piping system properly, shall be immediately repaired.
Source: 02622, 2010, v.1.1
Plant Drain Piping
Page 59 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02623 - Culverts and Storm Drain Piping

02623.1 General
Culverts and storm drain piping include all of the underground piping systems used to drain
stormwater on the site. The underground plant process drain systems are covered in the 02622 Plant
Drain Piping Specification. Underground pressure piping is covered in the 15XXX series
specifications.
Scope of work shall include furnishing materials, labor, incidentals and equipment required to perform
the drain piping work, in accordance with applicable laws, ordinances and this specification:
Scope of Work
Material procurement, fabrication, surface preparation, coating application and
shipping in accordance with these specifications and the drawings. Materials
supplied shall include all piping, fittings, gaskets, bolts, lubricants and other
appurtenances required by these specifications or otherwise required to
construct a complete piping system.
specifications and the drawings. Installation shall include, but not be limited to
trenching, bedding, pipe assembly and backfill.
Testing required by these specifications or indicated on the drawings.

Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for culverts and storm drain piping are indicated herein.
Work
In Accordance With
Drainage piping work
All applicable codes and ordinances and laws and

regulations of the state that pertain
Drainage piping
TCVN 7957: 2008 Water drainage System and

outside works Design standard
Source: 02623, , v.1.1
Culverts and Storm Drain Piping
Page 60 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02623.1.5 Materials
The following materials shall be used where indicated on the drawings:
Component
Material
Corrugated High Density Polyethylene

(CHDPE)
100 250 mm
AASHTO M252, Type S with Mannings n

value less than or equal to 0.012
300 1500 mm
AASHTO M294, Type S with Mannings n

value less than or equal to 0.012
Gaskets
ASTM F477
Fittings
AASHTO M252 or M294, compatible with

the parent pipe material
High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE)
PE 3408 materials meeting ASTM D3350

cell classification 345464C
Pipe fabrication (50 mm, 75 mm)
ASTM D3035
Pipe fabrication (100 mm and

larger)
ASTM F714
Fittings
ASTM D2683, ASTM D3261
Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP)

Pipe, fittings and specials
ASTM C76, Wall B (minimum) except as

modified hereinafter; Class III
Joints
Tongue and groove
Joint sealant
Pre-formed butyl gaskets
Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts

Sections
ASTM C1433, designed for HS20 loading;

size and earth cover as shown on the
drawings
Joints
Tongue and groove
Joint sealant
Pre-formed butyl gaskets
Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP)
ASTM A760/A760M galvanized steel pipe,

Type I with helical corrugations at 70 mm
pitch and 12 mm depth; wall thickness = 2
mm; diameter and length as shown on the
drawings.
Joints
Where required, joints shall be constructed

using manufacturer recommended gaskets
and coupling bands as required for a soil
tight condition.
Secondary coating
None
Source: 02623, , v.1.1
Page 61 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011


Component
Manufacturer
Corrugated High Density Polyethylene

Pipe
Hancor Sure-Lok F477 or Advanced

Drainage Systems N-12 IB ST Pipe
High Density Polyethylene Pipe
CPChem Performance Pipe DriscoPlexTM

4100
Reinforced Concrete Pipe and Box

Culverts
Hanson Pipe & Precast , Inc.

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
CHDPE Pipe Gasket Manufacture
ASTM F477
Supplier
Reinforced Concrete Pipe

Manufacture
ASTM C76, Section 5.1.1
Supplier
Reinforced Concrete Box Culvert

Manufacture
ASTM C1433, Section 5.1
Supplier
Lamping
Article 02623.3.6
Contractor
Mandrel Test
Article 02623.3.6
Contractor

Not used.
Not used.
02623.2 Products
02623.2.1 General
This article covers the furnishing of materials, devices, and appurtenances for complete culvert and
storm drain piping systems.
02623.2.2 Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (CHDPE) Pipe
CHDPE pipe shall be manufactured with annular corrugations on the outside of the pipe and an
integrally formed smooth waterway on the inside of the pipe. All pipe sections and fittings shall be
made from virgin polyethylene compounds which conform to the AASHTO standards referenced in
Article 02623.1.5. Pipes shall be furnished in the manufacturers maximum standard lengths, except
as required to complete a pipe run of non-standard length. Pipes shall have square cut ends or flared
end sections where indicated on the drawings. Flared end sections shall be the manufacturers
standard for the size and shape of the pipe provided.
All fittings, clean-outs, area drains, and other special appurtenances shall be furnished. Fittings shall
neither reduce nor impair the overall integrity of the pipeline.
Source: 02623, , v.1.1
Page 62 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Pipe joint materials shall be provided in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer
and these specifications. CHDPE pipe joints shall be silt-tight and leak resistant. All gaskets,
couplers, and lubricants required to construct a complete joint shall be provided. Gaskets shall be
composed of synthetic rubber only. Natural rubber will not be acceptable.
CHDPE pipe gaskets shall meet the test requirements indicated in Article 02623.1.7.
02623.2.3 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
Site Construction Manager. Fittings shall be of the butt fusion weld, socket fusion weld, or saddle
type as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the point of application within the system.
Butt heat fusion welds or electrofusion welds (if acceptable by local codes) in HDPE pipe shall be
performed according to the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.
02623.2.4 Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP) and Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts
Pipes shall be furnished in the manufacturers standard lengths, except as required to complete a
pipe run of non-standard length. All fittings, headwalls, endwalls, pipe bends and other special
sections or appurtenances shall be provided.
and these specifications. Reinforced concrete pipe and box culvert joints shall be silt-tight and leak
resistant. Joints shall be in accordance with Article 02623.1.5. Joint sealant and lubricants required
to construct a complete joint shall be provided. Natural rubber will not be acceptable as a gasket
material.
Prior to commencing manufacture, drawings of all concrete sections, fittings, reinforcing steel and
joint details shall be provided for EPC Contractors review and approval. Manufacturing shall not
begin until the EPC Contractor has approved the drawings.
Acceptance of the concrete piping and box culverts shall be based on the tests prescribed in Article
02623.1.7.
Concrete pipe shall not be delivered to the site of the work until concrete control cylinders
representing the pipe have attained a compressive strength of at least 80 percent of the specified
minimum 28 day strength.
Concrete piping and box culverts shall be plainly and permanently marked with the following
information:
Pipe Class.
Date of Manufacture.
Manufactures Name or Trademark.
Angle Turned (on bends).
02623.2.5 Corrugated Metal Pipe (CMP)
Corrugated metal pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from new zinc-coated steel sheets meeting
the requirements of ASTM A929. Pipes shall be furnished in the manufacturers maximum standard
lengths, except as required to complete a pipe run of non-standard length. Pipes shall have either
square or bevel cut ends, or flared end sections where indicated on the drawings. Flared end
sections shall be the manufacturers standard for the size and shape of pipe provided.
Source: 02623, , v.1.1
Page 63 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
All fittings and other special appurtenances shall be furnished. Fittings shall not reduce nor impair the
overall integrity of the pipeline.
and these specifications. Corrugated metal pipe joints shall be silt-tight and leak resistant. All
gaskets, couplers, and lubricants required to construct a complete joint shall be provided. Steel
coupling materials and bolts shall be galvanized.
Where indicated herein or on the drawings, pipe, end sections, and accessories shall be coated
inside and out with an acceptable bituminous coating to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.3 mm
measured on the crests of the corrugations. The coating shall adhere tenaciously, shall not chip off
during handling and installation, and shall protect the metal against damage during installation and
against deterioration after installation.
02623.3 Execution
This article covers the installation of complete culvert and storm drain piping systems as indicated on
the drawings.
02623.3.1 Unloading and Handling
All pipe, fittings and accessories shall be unloaded, handled and stored in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations. Equipment, tools, and methods used in loading, unloading,
reloading and hauling pipe and fittings shall not damage the pipe or pipe accessories. Hooks inserted
in the ends of pipe shall have broad, well padded contact surfaces and shall not come into contact
with joint surfaces. Damaged pipe shall be removed from the site and replaced with new materials.
Damaged pipe coatings shall be repaired before installing the pipe.
02623.3.2 Cleaning
The interior of pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter before being installed
and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted. Surfaces shall be wire brushed if
necessary, shall be wiped clean and dry, and shall be free from oil and grease before the joints are
assembled. Joint contact surfaces shall be kept clean until jointing is completed.
Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being
installed. No debris, tools, clothing, or other materials shall be placed in the pipe.
02623.3.3 Trenching and Embedment
Trenching, embedment, and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 02315 - Trenching. Trenches
shall be excavated not less than 100 mm below the bottom of the pipe in earth and 250 mm in rock,
to allow for pipe embedment material.
A minimum of 100 mm of embedment material shall be placed below the bottom of the storm drain
pipes and culverts in earth and 250 mm in rock.
02623.3.4 Laying Pipe
Storm drain piping and culverts shall be installed to the lines and grades indicated on the drawings.
Pipe grades between designated invert elevations shall be uniform to provide unrestricted flow and to
eliminate low spots that would retain water. Under no circumstances shall pipe be laid in water and
no pipe shall be laid under unacceptable weather or trench conditions.
Pipe shall be laid starting at the lowest elevation, with the groove ends facing upstream. Flared end
sections shall have groove end on outlet end section and tongue end on inlet end section.
Longitudinal seams shall be placed at the side of the trench.
When pipe laying is stopped for the day, the open end of the pipe shall be closed with an end board
or plug closely fitting the end of the pipe to prevent the entry of earth. The end board or plug shall
have several small holes near the center to permit entry of water and prevent floatation.
Source: 02623, , v.1.1
Page 64 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Culvert pipes shall be laid on the prepared bed starting at the outlet end with sections firmly joined.
Cutting shall be performed in a neat manner without damaging the pipe. Cuts shall be smooth,
straight and, unless approved by the Site QA Manager, shall be made at right angles to the pipe axis.
Pipe shall be cut with mechanical pipe cutters unless alternate methods are approved by the Site QA
Manager.
02623.3.5 Jointing
Joints shall be installed in strict accordance with the pipe and culvert manufacturer's
recommendations. Immediately before jointing the pipe, the outside of the tongue and gasket and the
inside of the receiving groove shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with the recommended lubricant.
Flared end sections shall be tied to the adjacent straight section in a manner acceptable to the Site QA
Manager. Tie and handling holes, if present, shall be sealed in a manner acceptable to the Site QA
Manager prior to backfilling.
02623.3.6 Testing
Culverts and sections of storm drain piping that are accessible at both ends shall be lamped (visually
inspected from the pipe ends). Storm drain piping that is not accessible for lamping shall be checked
for obstructions and excessive deflection by pulling a mandrel through the pipe in accordance with the
pipe manufacturers recommendations. The pipe shall be inspected in the presence of the Site QA
Manager.
Pipes shall be free and clear of all obstructions. Pipes that exhibit signs of deflections in excess of
the manufacturers recommendations shall be uncovered and the excessive deflection corrected.
Source: 02623, , v.1.1
Page 65 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02631 - Manholes and Catch Basins

02631.1 General
Manholes and catch basins shall also include drop inlets, junction boxes and other underground
structures that form part of the stormwater or plant drain systems.
The following specification is written assuming the manholes and catch basins are precast concrete.
If it is determined the manholes and catch basins will be cast-in-place, construction shall follow the
requirements provided in Specification 03311 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
Work under these specifications shall include furnishing and installing manholes and catch basins
and providing miscellaneous materials and services complete as specified herein:
Scope of Supply:
Design, detailing and production of calculations and drawings
Material procurement, fabrication and shipping in accordance with these
specifications and the drawings
Components supplied:
Precast concrete sections
Access and inlet castings
Hydrophilic seals for pipe connections
Joint seals for precast sections
Scope of Installation:
specifications and the drawings
Supply and install masonry materials and grout at pipe connections
Supply and install concrete fill for invert transitions in the base of precast
concrete manholes and catch basins
Waterproofing
02631.1.1.1 Miscellaneous Materials and Services. Miscellaneous materials and services not
otherwise specifically called for shall be furnished in accordance with the following:
All other component parts and connection materials required to complete the
manholes and catch basins.
Tests and inspections required by the specifications.
02631.1.1.2 Miscellaneous Materials and Services for Erection. Miscellaneous materials and
services not otherwise specifically called for shall be furnished in accordance with the following:
Supply, install and remove all temporary bracing, rigging, attachments, and supports.
Survey and lay out the work from the designated control points.
Source: 02631, 2009, v.1.1
Manholes and Catch Basins
Page 66 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Remove knock-out panels where required.

Supply and install bedding materials.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for the manholes and catch basins are indicated in these
specifications and on the drawings:
Traffic load criteria
AASHTO HS-20 loading
Groundwater level (distance below top of

manholes and catch basins)
At top of manhole
Unit weight of backfill material
18.4 kN/cubic meter
Coefficient of at-rest earth pressure, Ko
0.50
Ground surcharge due to crane loading of

adjacent ground surface area
130 kN/square meter

Work
In Accordance With
Precast Concrete Quality
Fabricated in accordance with the National

Precast Concrete Association Quality
Control Manual
Manhole Construction

Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections, except as modified herein
Catch Basin, Drop Inlet, and Rectangular

Junction Box Design and Construction

Precast Concrete Water and Wastewater
Structures, except as modified herein
Reinforced Concrete Design
ACI 318
02631.1.5 Materials
Component
Material
Precast sections
Source: 02631, 2009, v.1.1
Page 67 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Component
Material
Concrete
Minimum 28 day compressive strength = 28

MPa
Portland cement ASTM C150 Type II
Water-cement ratio = 0.45 or less
Air content = 3.0 to 6.0 percent
Reinforcing steel
Wire
Welded wire fabric
Bars
Manholes: ASTM A615/615M
Admixtures
Water reducing
ASTM C494
Air-entraining
ASTM C260
Waterproofing
Xypex Admix C-1000 as sold by Xypex

Chemical Corporation of Richmond, British
Columbia or approved equal
Openings
Circular or horseshoe shaped boxout for each

connecting pipe, with surfaces properly
prepared for pipe-to-manhole connectors
Infill masonry (when required to fill

the horseshoe shaped boxout below
the pipe)
Concrete block
Solid units conforming to ASTM C139
Brick
ASTM C32, Grade MS or ASTM C62, Grade

SW
Mortar
One part Portland cement (ASTM C150), onequarter part hydrated lime (ASTM C207, Type
S), four parts sand (ASTM C144 natural sand,
95 percent passing 1.0 mm sieve) with integral
waterproofing (aluminum stearate, ammonium
stearate or calcium stearate, 2 percent of
weight of cement)
Precast joint sealant
Preformed butyl rubber joint sealant meeting

the requirements of ASTM C990
Iron castings
ASTM A48, Class 35 or better
Pipe-to-manhole connections
Field grouted with Adeka hydrophilic seals as


cementitious grout
Source: 02631, 2009, v.1.1
Grout shall meet ASTM C1107 criteria.
Page 68 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Component
Manufacturer
Iron castings
Neenah Foundry
Hydrophilic seal
Adeka

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Precast concrete compressive

strength
ASTM C31, C192, C39
Supplier
Precast concrete air content
ASTM C231 or C173
Supplier

Not used.
Not used.
02631.2 Products
02631.2.1 General
Manholes and catch basins shall be constructed complete with covers, fittings, and other
appurtenances in accordance with the drawings.
If required, stubs for future connections shall be provided in manholes at the locations indicated on
the drawings. Stubs shall be installed with the bell flush with the exterior manhole face and plugged
with a watertight precast concrete or vitrified clay disk designed for this service.
The precast Supplier shall design the manholes and catch basins for all design loads in accordance
with ACI 318 and these specifications. The load combinations that produce the maximum shear and
moment shall be used to design the structure. Manholes and catch basins shall be adequately
reinforced to resist the maximum design stresses. The dead load shall consist of soil surcharge and
structure weight. Live and impact loads for manholes and catch basins shall be determined by the
traffic load conditions specified in Article 02631.1.3.
Manholes and catch basins shall be designed to prevent flotation of each manhole and catch basin
with the manhole and catch basin empty and the groundwater level at a distance from the top of each
manhole and catch basin as specified in Article 02631.1.3.
02631.2.2 Drawings
Not used.
02631.2.3 Precast Concrete Fabrication
Precast concrete fabrication shall be in accordance with industry standards and the following.
Source: 02631, 2009, v.1.1
Page 69 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02631.2.3.1 Forms. Forms for manufacturing precast concrete products shall be of the type and
design consistent with industry standards. They shall be capable of consistently providing uniform
products and dimensions. Forms shall be constructed so that the forces and vibrations to which the
forms will be subjected can cause no product damage.
Forms shall be cleaned of concrete buildup after each use.
Form release agents shall not be allowed to build up on the form casting surfaces.
02631.2.3.2 Reinforcement. Cages of reinforcement shall be fabricated either by tying the bars,
wires or welded wire fabric into rigid assemblies or by welding where permissible in accordance with
ANSI/AWS D1.4. Reinforcing shall be positioned as specified by the design and so that the concrete
cover conforms to requirements. Positive means shall be taken to assure that the reinforcement does
not move significantly during the casting operations.
02631.2.3.3 Placing Concrete. Concrete shall be deposited into forms as near to its final location
as practical. The free fall of the concrete shall be kept to a minimum. Concrete shall be consolidated
in such a manner that segregation of the concrete is minimized and honeycombed areas are kept to a
minimum. Vibrators used to consolidate concrete shall have frequencies and amplitudes sufficient to
produce well-consolidated concrete.
Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.
02631.2.3.4 Curing by Moisture Retention. Moisture shall be prevented from evaporating from
exposed surfaces until adequate strength for stripping is reached by one of the following methods:
Cover with polyethylene sheets a minimum of 0.15 mm thick.
Cover with burlap or other absorptive material and keep continually moist.
Use of a membrane-curing compound applied at a rate not to exceed 5 sq. meters per liter, or
in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
02631.2.3.5 Curing with Heat and Moisture. Concrete shall not be subjected to steam or hot air
until after the concrete has attained its initial set. Steam, if used, shall be applied within a suitable
enclosure, which permits free circulation of the steam. If hot air is used for curing, precautions shall
be taken to prevent moisture loss from the concrete. The temperature of the concrete shall not be
permitted to exceed 70 degrees C.
02631.2.3.6 Stripping Products from Forms. Precast sections shall not be removed from the
forms until the concrete reaches the compressive strength for stripping required by the design. If no
such requirement exists, products may be removed from the forms after the final set of concrete,
provided that stripping damage is minimal.
02631.2.3.7 Shipping. Precast sections shall not be shipped until they are at least 5 days old,
unless it can be shown that the concrete strength has reached at least 75 percent of the specified 28
day strength.
02631.3 Execution
02631.3.1 Construction
Precast concrete sections shall be inspected when delivered to the site. Cracked or otherwise visibly
defective units shall be rejected and removed from the site.
Manholes and catch basins shall be constructed and installed to the lines and grades shown on the
drawings. The sections shall be lifted by suitable lifting devices at points provided by the precast
Supplier and installed in accordance with the precast Suppliers recommendations. Joints between
Source: 02631, 2009, v.1.1
Page 70 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
precast sections shall be sealed with a rubber gasket. The space between connecting pipes and the
manhole wall of precast sections shall be completely filled with nonshrinking grout.
Where masonry is required to close the pipe openings in the precast sections, mortar shall be used
within 40 minutes after mixing. Mortar that begins to set shall be discarded. Outside surfaces of brick
and block masonry shall be plastered with mortar.
Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, concrete fill shall be placed in the bottom of the precast
manholes and catch basins to form an invert transition. The invert section transition shall be uniform
from the incoming pipe or pipes to the outgoing pipe. The shape of the invert shall conform to the
lower half of the pipe it connects. Side branches entering the manholes shall be connected with as
large a radius of curve as practicable. Inverts shall be troweled to a smooth, clean surface.
02631.3.2 Waterproofing
When indicated on the drawings or specified herein, the entire outside surface of each manhole or
catch basin shall be waterproofed with a modified moisture or chemically curing urethane, specifically
designed to waterproof the vertical surfaces of concrete located below grade. Surfaces shall be clean
and dry; free from oil, grease, and loose materials. Application shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
Source: 02631, 2009, v.1.1
Page 71 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02731 Aggregate Roads and Area Aggregate Surfacing

02731.1 General
Scope of work shall include the materials and construction for aggregate surfaced access roads, road
base/subbase, parking areas,, area aggregate surfacing, and other areas indicated on the drawings.
Road base/subbase for roads installed to support construction access shall be covered under
Specification Section 02220R Construction Roadway.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for aggregate surfacing are indicated in Article 02731.1.5.
Work
In Accordance With
Aggregate roads
22 TCN 211 06: Soft Pavements

Requirements and Design Guidelines
Work shall be also be performed in accordance with Vietnamese Standard No. 22TCN 334-2006.
02731.1.5 Materials
General Area Aggregate Surfacing
Component
Material
Aggregate surfacing material
Crushed stone aggregate free from lumps

or balls of clay and other soft and
objectionable material
Dust palliative asphalt material
Asphalt shall be a slow curing, a medium

curing, or an emulsified type, and shall be
applied as directed by the Site
Construction Manager.
Weed eradicator and soil fumigant
Allied Chemical "UROX" or "URAB"

DuPont "Hyvar-X" or "Hyvar-XL"
US Borax "Ureabor"
US Standard Sieve Size (square):
Master Range % Passing:
63 mm (2-1/2 inch)
Source: 02731, 2010, v.1.2
100
Aggregate Surfacing
Page 72 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
General Area Aggregate Surfacing

Component
Material
37.5 mm (1-1/2 inch)
88 - 100
19 mm (3/4 inch)
60 - 97
9.5 mm (3/8 inch)
40 - 77
4.75 mm (No. 4)
25 - 60
600 m (No. 30)
7 - 30
Aggregate base/subbase material
Crushed aggregate shall consist of hard,

durable particles or fragments of stone,
and a filler of sand or other finely divided
mineral matter. Crushed aggregate shall
be uniformly graded from coarse to fine
and shall conform to the requirements
given below. The portion of the material
passing through No. 4 sieve shall be
known as filler. The materials shall be
free from vegetable matter and clay balls.
US Standard Sieve Size (square):

76 mm (3 inch)
51 mm (2 inch)
37.5 mm (1-1/2 inch)
25mm (1 inch)
19 mm ( inch)
13 mm ( inch)
10 mm (3/8 inch)
4.75 mm (No. 4)
2.0 mm (No. 10)
0.425 mm (No. 40)
0.075 mm (No. 200)
Master Range % Passing:

100
70 100
55 85
50 80
40 70
30 60
20 50
10 30
5 - 15
Note: The fraction passing through the

0.075 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not be
greater than two-thirds the fraction
passing through the 0.425 mm (No. 40)
sieve.
Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 50 for 500 revolutions as
determined by AASHTO T 96.
For all grading, that portion passing through a 0.425 mm (No. 40) sieve, including blending filler, shall
be non-plastic or shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 6
as determined by AASHTO T 89 and T90 respectively.
Source: 02731, 2010, v.1.2
Aggregate Surfacing
Page 73 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

The material must pass the ASTM soundness test so that the decrease after 5 cycles will be not more
than 12% when sodium sulfate is used, or not more than 18% when magnesium sulfate is used.
The grading percentages specified above shall apply to the material after it has been processed on
the road as well as when tested at the pit or other source of supply.
If fine aggregate or filler in addition to that naturally present in the sub-base course material is
necessary in order to meet the grading requirements, or for satisfactory bonding of the materials, it
shall be uniformly blended with the sub-base course materials at the screening and crushing plant or
on the road. The material for such purpose shall be obtained from sources approved by the Site QA
Manager and shall be free from hard lumps.
02731.1.6 Not Used
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Maximum dry density and optimum

moisture content
ASTM D698 or
ASTM D1557
Contractor
Los Angeles abrasion
ASTM C131
Contractor
Sodium sulfate or magnesium

sulfate soundness
ASTM C88
Contractor
In-place density by nuclear

methods (shallow)
ASTM D2922
Contractor
Aggregate sampling
ASTM D75
Contractor
Sieve analysis of fine and coarse

aggregates
ASTM C136
Contractor
California Bearing Ratio of

laboratory-compacted soils
ASTM D1883
Contractor
Sand equivalent value
ASTM D2419
Contractor
Liquid limit, plastic limit, and

plasticity index
ASTM D4318
Contractor

Not used.
Not used.
02731.2 Products
02731.2.1 General
This article covers materials for aggregate surfaced access roads, road base/subbase, parking areas,
and area aggregate surfacing. Work shall include furnishing all material, equipment, and labor
necessary for installing and testing aggregate surfacing as specified herein and as required in
Article 02731.1.5.
Source: 02731, 2010, v.1.2
Aggregate Surfacing
Page 74 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02731.2.2 Source
The sources of materials shall be acceptable to the Site QA Manager. Except as modified herein,
materials shall conform to the requirements of the governing standards.
02731.2.3 Aggregate Surfacing Material
The gradation for the aggregate base course and surface course shall be as indicated in
Article 02731.1.5. Aggregate roads and aggregate surfaced areas constructed under these
specifications shall be maintained until final acceptance of the work.
The abrasion loss shall be no more than 40 percent when subjected to 500 revolutions in a Los
Angeles abrasion machine.
That fraction passing the 19 mm sieve and retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall have a loss
not greater than 15 percent by weighted average at five cycles of a sodium sulfate or magnesium
sulfate soundness test. The specific gravity shall not be less than 2.54. That fraction of the material
passing the 19 mm sieve and retained on the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve shall contain less than
20 percent by weight of flat and elongated particles. The materials shall consist of angular particles
with not less than 90 percent of particle count having two or more fractured surfaces.
02731.3 Execution
A job mix formula shall be established and shall be acceptable to the Site QA Manager prior to the
start of work. This mix shall not be changed without prior authorization from the Site QA Manager.
02731.3.1 Protection of Subgrade
Ditches and drains along the subgrade shall be maintained to provide effective drainage. When ruts
are formed that are 50 mm or more in depth and are unacceptable to the Site QA Manager, the
subgrade shall be brought to grade, reshaped, and recompacted. In no case shall aggregate
surfacing be placed on a muddy subgrade. Storage or stockpiling of materials on the subgrade will
not be permitted.
Immediately prior to surfacing, the subgrade shall be shaped to the grade and cross section indicated
on the drawings. The top 300 mm of the subgrade shall be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum
dry density, ASTM D698. During compaction, the subgrade shall be at minus 2 to plus 2 percent of
the optimum moisture content.
This operation shall include any scarifying, reshaping, and wetting required to obtain the specified
compaction. Soft, organic, and other unacceptable material shall be removed from the subgrade and
replaced with material meeting the requirements of Section 02220 - Earthwork.
Any deviation of the subgrade surface in excess of 10 mm, as indicated by a 3 meter straightedge or
template cut to typical section, shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material,
reshaping, and recompacting. The subgrade elevation shall be within plus or minus 10 mm of the
specified elevation shown on the drawings.
02731.3.3 Application
Aggregate shall be placed on the subgrade in layers of uniform thickness not exceeding 100 mm in
compacted depth. The aggregates for each course shall be handled and spread in a manner that will
prevent segregation of sizes. A greater layer thickness may be considered if it can be clearly
demonstrated that the desired compaction can be obtained for the entire layer thickness.
Each layer shall be cleaned of loose and foreign matter before the subsequent layer is placed. Water
content of the material shall be maintained during placement.
The aggregate surfaced access roads, road base/subbase, and parking areas shall be compacted to
a dry density of not less than 98% relative compaction.
Source: 02731, 2010, v.1.2
Aggregate Surfacing
Page 75 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Top surface of the compacted aggregate base course shall be finished by blading or with automated
equipment especially designed for the purpose and rolled with a steel-wheeled roller. The addition of
thin layers of fine materials to the top of the base course to meet the grade will not be acceptable.
Instead, scarify the top surface, add material, and recompact.
Surfaces of the completed aggregate base shall not deviate more than 10 mm when tested with a 3 m
straightedge. The completed compacted thickness of any course shall not be greater than
minus 13 mm of indicated thickness, and the average thickness shall not be less than the design
thickness indicated. The top surface elevation shall be within plus or minus 15 mm of the specified
elevation shown on the drawings.
02731.3.4 Dust Palliative
Not used.
02731.3.5 Sampling and Testing
All field and laboratory sampling and testing shall be provided by an independent testing laboratory
retained by the Contractor. The laboratory shall be acceptable to the Site QA Manager.
Samples of the in-place compacted aggregate shall be taken at random, in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM D75. A minimum of one sample per day and one sample for every 50 meters
of road length or 150 square meters of compacted in-place aggregate shall be taken.
One copy of the test results shall be provided to the Site QA Manager
02731.3.6 Weed Eradicator and Soil Fumigant
After subgrade preparation and prior to applying the final aggregate layer, the area designated on the
drawings shall be treated with a weed eradicator and soil fumigant.
Weed eradicator and soil fumigant shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Weed eradicator and soil fumigant shall be applied only to areas indicated on the drawings. This
material shall not be applied when wind conditions may cause drifting to areas not specified to be
treated.
Source: 02731, 2010, v.1.2
Aggregate Surfacing
Page 76 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
02771 - Curbs, Combination Curbs and Gutters, and Sidewalks

02771.1 General
Scope of supply shall include furnishing materials for and the construction of curbs, combination
curbs and gutters, and sidewalks, and shall include other services as specified herein and as
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for the curbs, combination curbs and gutters, and sidewalks
are indicated in Article 02771.1.5.
Work
In Accordance With
Concrete work under this specification
Reference 03311 Cast-in-Place

Concrete Specification
02771.1.5 Materials
General
Component
Material
Expansion joint filler
Nonextruding and resilient bituminous type

conforming to ASTM D1751
Expansion joint sealing compound
ASTM D1190 or ASTM D1850

Specific
The following items define the Scope of

Work to be constructed:
Curbs
Yes
Combination curbs and gutters
Yes
Sidewalks
Yes
The thickness of the layer of compacted

rock fill placed on the subgrade of
sidewalks, mm
Source: 02771, 2005, v.1.0
As indicated on drawings
Curbs, Combination Curbs and Gutters, and Sidewalks
Page 77 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Precast concrete parking bumpers shall

be used
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Not used.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Concrete testing
Reference 03311 Cast-inPlace Concrete

Specification
Reference 03311 Cast-inPlace Concrete

Specification

Not used.
Not used.
02771.2 Products
Not applicable.
02771.3 Execution
02771.3.1 General
This article covers the construction of concrete curbs, combination curbs and gutters, and sidewalks.
Concrete curbs and combination curbs and gutters may be constructed by conventional forming and
placing methods or by an acceptable slip form process approved by the Site Construction Manager.
Curbs and combination curbs and gutters shall be constructed as indicated on the drawings. Tool
marks shall not be left in the exposed portions of curbs and combination curbs and gutters.
For slip forming, an acceptable slip form curb machine shall be used to place, consolidate, and finish
the concrete in one complete pass. The slip formed concrete shall be dense, homogeneous, and
require a minimum of hand finishing.
Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed in the locations and to the dimensions indicated on the
drawings. Sidewalks shall be edged and grooved.
02771.3.2 Subgrades
Subgrades for curbs, combination curbs and gutters, and sidewalks shall be in accordance with the
requirements specified in Section 02220 - Earthwork.
Subgrades shall have the lines, grades, and cross sections as indicated on the drawings.
The subgrade shall be compacted and finished to a uniform surface without depressions that hold
water or prevent proper drainage. The subgrade shall be finished to within 15 mm of the elevation
indicated on the drawings. Deviations of the subgrade surface in excess of 10 mm as indicated by a
3 m straightedge, or template cut to typical section, shall be corrected.
Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on finished subgrades.
Source: 02771, 2005, v.1.0
Page 78 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Soft, organic, and other unacceptable materials shall be removed from the subgrade and replaced.
02771.3.3 Forms
Forms for curbs shall be rigid steel forms except on returns or curved sections. Forms for sidewalks
may be wood or steel. Wood forms shall be nominally 50 mm in the least dimension and lumber shall
be free of loose knots and knotholes. When required for forming curved sidewalks, 3 mm thick
plywood may be used. It shall be supported at appropriate intervals to prevent displacement of forms
when concrete is poured. Side forms shall have a depth at least equal to the edge thickness of the
concrete being formed.
Forms shall be in good condition with not more than 6 mm variation in horizontal and vertical
alignment for each 3 m in length. Forms shall be set true to line and grade and shall be adequately
supported to stay in position while depositing and compacting concrete. Forms shall be designed and
constructed to permit removal without damaging the concrete.
02771.3.4 Joints
Joints shall be formed at right angles to the alignment of curbs, combination curbs and gutters, and
sidewalks. Joints in curbs and combination curbs and gutters shall coincide with pavement joints.
02771.3.4.1 Expansion Joints in Curbs and Combination Curbs and Gutters. Expansion joints
shall be formed by a preformed joint filler to the thickness indicated on the drawings and shall be cut
to the configuration of the full size cross section. Joint material shall be secured to prevent
movement during concrete placement. Edges of joints shall be rounded with an edging tool of 3 mm
radius. Exposed joint surfaces shall be sealed.
Expansion joints in slip form construction shall be made by removing a portion of the freshly placed
concrete, inserting the joint filler, and replacing hand finished concrete at the joint. Rigid forms shall
be placed at these joints and left in place until the concrete begins to set.
Expansion joints shall be placed at the beginning and end of all radii where the curbs abut structures
at intervals not greater than indicated on the drawings.
02771.3.4.2 Expansion Joints in Sidewalks. Expansion joints in sidewalks shall be formed to the
thickness indicated on the drawings and shall extend the full depth of the slab. All but the top 13 mm
of the joint shall be filled with expansion joint material. Sealer shall be poured into the top of the joint
to the level of adjacent concrete surfaces.
Expansion joints shall be placed where the sidewalks abut structures and curbs at intervals not
greater than indicated on the drawings.
02771.3.4.3 Contraction Joints in Curbs and Combination Curbs and Gutters. Contraction
joints shall be constructed to the depth and thickness indicated on the drawings at intervals not
greater than indicated on the drawings.
Contraction joints in curbs and combination curbs and gutters shall be formed by a template cut to the
configuration of the curb section to the extent indicated on the drawings. These templates shall be
secured so they do not move during placement and compaction of concrete. As soon as concrete
has hardened sufficiently, the templates shall be removed from the joints. Joint edges shall be
rounded with a 3 mm radius edging tool.
When approved by the Site Construction Manager, contraction joints may be constructed by sawing
through the curbs and combination curbs and gutters.
02771.3.4.4 Contraction Joints in Sidewalks. Contraction joints in sidewalks shall be located to
provide square panels with a maximum dimension as indicated on the drawings. Joints shall be to
Source: 02771, 2005, v.1.0
Page 79 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
the depth and width indicated on the drawings and may be formed either by inserting a fiber strip, by
tooling, or by cutting with a concrete saw.
02771.3.5 Finishing
Each curb and combination curb and gutter shall be tooled to the required radii as soon as possible
after the concrete takes its initial set. After the forms and templates are removed, the joints shall be
tooled and the surface finished with a wood or cork float to remove all imperfections without adding
mortar or dryer. The resulting surface shall be smooth with uniform color. All rough spots,
projections, and form stakes shall be removed. Each finished curb and combination curb and gutter
shall have a uniform appearance and shall have the lines, grades, and configurations indicated on the
drawings.
The final finish shall be provided by light brooming transverse to the line of the curb and combination
curb and gutter.
Sidewalks shall be finished with a wood or cork float and then given a burlap or broom finish. The top
surface of sidewalks shall be uniform in color, and edges shall be tooled. Sidewalk edges shall have
a straight, neat appearance.
The slip forms shall support the concrete for a sufficient time to prevent the concrete from slumping.
02771.3.6 Curing and Protection
Concrete surfaces shall be membrane or water cured as specified in Section 03311 - Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
Concrete work shall be protected from damage of any kind until acceptance. Concrete that has been
damaged shall be replaced or repaired.
02771.3.7 Sidewalk Electric Heating
Not used.
02771.3.8 Precast Concrete Bumpers
Plant produced, precast reinforced concrete parking bumpers shall be furnished and installed as
indicated on the drawings, complete with anchor pins. The bumpers shall be the manufacturer's
standard size, approximately 1.8 meters long.
Source: 02771, 2005, v.1.0
Page 80 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
03210 - Concrete Reinforcement

03210.1 General
Scope of supply shall include detailing, furnishing, and installing of concrete reinforcement and
appurtenances and shall include other services as specified under these technical specifications.
Scope of supply shall include the items in the below table:
Deliverables, Materials or Work
Scope of work
Reinforcement detailing (reinforcing steel placement

drawings and cut sheets
Included
Field placement of reinforcement
Included
Mechanical couplings
Included
Bar Supports
Included
Detailing of bar supports
Included

Not applicable.
03210.1.3 Performance Requirements
Performance requirements for the materials to be furnished under this section of these specifications
are indicated below:
Materials
Requirements
Reinforcing steel sizes indicated on drawings, mm
Metric
Billet steel bars, grade
415 MPa
Low alloy steel bars, grade
415 MPa
Shop coatings for reinforcing steel
Epoxy coated where indicated on

the drawings
Mechanical splices shall develop
Ultimate tensile strength of bars

to be developed

Work
Source: 03210, 2010, v.1.4
In Accordance With
Concrete Reinforcement
Page 81 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Work
In Accordance With
Fabrication of reinforcement and

appurtenances
ACI 301, Structural Concrete for Buildings; ACI

315, Details and Detailing of Concrete
Reinforcement; ACI 318, Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
03210.1.5 Materials
Component
Material
Reinforcing steel
Billet steel
ASTM A615
Low alloy steel
ASTM A706, Grade 415
Epoxy coating
ASTM D3963
Bar supports
CRSI Class 3 unexposed, Class 1 exposed
Mechanical splices
Metal filled or threaded couplers, designed for

a minimum of 125 percent of the bar yield
strength
Welded wire fabric
ASTM A185 or A497

Component
Manufacturer
Mechanical splices - metal filled
Erico Products Cadweld
Mechanical splices - threaded coupler
LENTON taper threaded couplers as

manufactured by ERICO
(http://www.erico.com/erico_public/general
_info/CouplersEStdA12.asp) or Dayton
Superior Dowel Rebar Splicing Products
(http://www.daytonsuperior.com/RebarSplicing.html)

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Coated Reinforcing Bars

Certification
ASTM D3963
Manufacturer
Tensile Tests
ASTM A615 and A706
Manufacturer

Not used.
Source: 03210, 2010, v.1.4
Page 82 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Not used.
03210.2 Products
03210.2.1 Work Included Under These Specifications
The work under this specification shall include furnishing concrete reinforcement and providing
miscellaneous materials and services complete as specified.
03210.2.2 Materials
03210.2.2.1 Reinforcing Steel. Straight bars of all diameters and bent bars with a diameter less
than 38 mm shall be deformed billet steel bars. Bent bars with a diameter greater than 38 mm shall
be deformed low alloy steel bars.
Reinforcing steel shall be accurately formed. The details of fabrication shall conform to the codes
and standards specified.
03210.2.2.2 Epoxy Coating. When required, reinforcing steel shall be epoxy coated in accordance
with the requirements of the specified codes and standards.
Written certification shall be furnished stating that the coated reinforcing bars meet the requirements
of the specified codes and standards.
An adequate amount of coating material for field touchup of damaged coatings shall be furnished.
03210.2.2.3 Accessories. Bar supports, standees, ties, spacers, bolsters, inserts, and other
concrete accessories used to secure reinforcing in position shall be furnished.
03210.2.2.4 Certification. Certification of compliance with these specifications shall be provided for
all reinforcing steel furnished. Certification of compliance with all tests required by the material
specification shall be included. These tests shall include material composition, bend tests, and
tensile tests as a minimum.
03210.2.2.5 Welding. Unless specifically approved by the EPC Contractors Consultant, welding of
reinforcement is prohibited. Reinforcement with unauthorized welds shall be removed and replaced.
Welded chairs and supports may be used.
03210.2.3 Placement Drawings and Bar Lists
Bar lists and reinforcement placement drawings shall be prepared and submitted to the Site
Construction Manager for acceptance. Each bar list and placement drawing shall clearly identify the
grade of reinforcing required by that drawing.
03210.2.3.1 Drawing Requirements. Each drawing submitted shall indicate the name of the
project, the unit designation, the contract title, the contract number, the name of the building structure,
the concrete placement number, and the reinforcing Supplier's name (as applicable).
03210.2.3.2 Reinforcing Spacing. Reinforcement for concrete shall have the concrete protective
cover specified below.
Surface below grade and in contact with soil or water 75 mm
Surfaces above grade and not in contact with soil or water
Exterior columns and beams 50 mm
Interior columns and beams 40 mm
Slabs 30 mm
Source: 03210, 2010, v.1.4
Page 83 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Precast concrete (excluding piles) 30 mm

The clear distance between individual parallel bars shall not be less than 1.5 times the maximum size
of coarse aggregate in the concrete; nor less than one nominal bar diameter; nor less than 25 mm in
beams, 38 mm in columns, or 50 mm in other locations. Where reinforcements in beams are placed
in two or more layers, the bars in the upper layer shall be placed directly above the bars in the lower
layer and the clear distance between layers shall not be less than 25 mm. Clear distance limitations
between individual bars shall also apply to the clear distance between a contact lap splice and
adjacent splices or bars.
03210.2.3.3 Splices. Splices shall conform to the codes and standards specified. Lap splice
lengths shall permit all bars to be spliced at the splice location with no reduction in splice length as a
result of staggered splice locations or excess reinforcement unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings. Splices in horizontal reinforcement placed in vertical wall sections shall be detailed in
accordance with top reinforcement requirements. Splices shall not be used in regions of maximum
bending stress.
Splices for bars with a diameter greater than 38 mm shall be mechanical splices.
Mechanical splices under tension shall develop the minimum strength specified herein. Mechanical
splice manufacturer's inspection criteria shall be furnished to the Site QA Manager.
03210.3 Execution
Reinforcement shall be delivered to the jobsite packaged in bundles. Each shipment shall contain all
bundles required for one or more concrete placements. Each bundle shall be tagged with a sturdy,
durable, weatherproof tag which includes the following information:
Placement number. If bar is a dowel bar, the placement number shall be the first of
the two placements.
Bar diameter.
Number of bars in bundle.
Position/Shape number.
Bar length.
Weight of bundle.
Graphical description of bar shape.
Each shipment shall contain a complete bundle-by-bundle inventory that duplicates all the information
listed on all the tags of all the bundles listed.
Each bundle shall be securely bound. Every binding shall be capable of safely holding the entire
weight of the entire bundle.
Source: 03210, 2010, v.1.4
Page 84 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
03311 - Cast-in-Place Concrete

03311.1 General
Scope of work shall include receiving and placing concrete and reinforcement, constructing required
formwork, and furnishing materials, equipment, and labor to complete the cast-in-place concrete work
including other services as specified herein.
Not applicable.
Performance requirements for the cast-in-place concrete shall be as follows:
Component
Material
Mechanical splices shall develop
Ultimate tensile strength of bars to be

spliced
Finishes for formed concrete surfaces

exposed to view
Standard finish (rough form finish)
Finishing unformed surfaces

Screeding
Where indicated on the drawings
Floating
Flat surfaces and floors not otherwise

specified
Brooming
Roads, sidewalks, and walkways
Troweling
Aggregate exposure
Special finish

Work
In Accordance With
Structural concrete for buildings
ACI 301
Hot weather concreting
ACI 305R
Cold weather concreting
ACI 306R and ACI 301
Building code requirements for reinforced concrete
ACI 318
Recommended practice for concrete formwork
ACI 347R
Splices in reinforcing steel
ACI 318
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Page 85 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Work
In Accordance With
Tolerances
AISC Manual of Steel

Construction, Code of
Standard Practice, ACI 117,
ACI 301
Finishes and finishing
ACI 301
Sampling and Testing for Strength
ACI 318, Section 5.6
03311.1.5 Materials
General
Component
Material
Form ties
Removable end, permanently embedded

body type. In liquid retaining structures,
provide integral water stops.
Polyethylene sheeting
ASTM D4397, 150 m
Water stops (where indicated on the

drawings)
Construction joints
PVC ribbed or serrated,150 mm by 10 mm,

with "O" bulb closed center section
Expansion or isolation joints
PVC ribbed or serrated, 230 mm by 10 mm,

with "O" bulb closed center section
Concrete joints and pipe

penetrations through concrete
walls with doubly reinforced and
200 mm or greater thickness
Hydrophilic type -- expanding preformed

rubber strip, expansion coefficient by
volume exceeding 1.5 when saturated
Curbs and concrete joints with

less than 200 mm thickness
Hydrophilic type -- bentonite/butyl rubber

strip
Expansion joint filler
ASTM D1752, Type 1 sponge rubber or

closed cell PVC or polyethylene foam
Polyurethane sealant
ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25,

Use T
Membrane curing compound and floor

sealer
ASTM C1315, Type 1, Class A, acrylic

copolymer, with a minimum 25 percent
solids, nonyellowing, maximum moisture
loss 0.40 kg/m2 in 72 hours
Membrane curing compound, dissipating

type, where specified herein or indicated
on the drawings
ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A, maximum

moisture loss 0.55 kg/m2 in 72 hours
Epoxy bonding adhesive (joints between

existing and new concrete)
ASTM C881, Types I and V, moisture

insensitive, 100 percent solids
Anchor and reinforcing adhesive
ASTM C881, Type IV, Grade 3
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 86 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
General
Component
Material
Anchor rod sleeves
Plastic

Component
Manufacturer
PVC water stops - 230 mm
Vinylex RB9-38, Greenstreak Style 709,

and W. R. Meadows Sealtight Type 9380
PVC water stops - 150 mm
Vinylex RB6-316 and Greenstreak Style

716, W.R. Meadows Sealtight Type 6380
Hydrophilic water stops
Adeka Ultra Seal MC 2010MN and

Greenstreak Hydrotite CJ 1020
Hydrophilic water stops (curbs and

concrete surfaces less than 200 mm
thickness)
Volclay RX-102
Anchor and reinforcing adhesive
Hilti HIT RE-500-SD
Epoxy bonding adhesive (joints between

existing and new concrete)
Sika Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Master Builders

Concresive Liquid LPL, Euclid Chemical
Super Diamond Clear VOX
Form coating
Nox-Crete Form Coating, L&M Debond,

Richmond Clean Strip Ultra, Symons
Magic Kote

The following testing shall be conducted in accordance with the specified source. Testing intervals
and execution are specified in Article 03311.3.17.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Slump test
ASTM C143
Contractor
Air content
ASTM C231
Contractor
Concrete test cylinders

or
Concrete test cubes
ASTM C31 (cylinders)
Contractor
Compression test
ASTM C39 (cylinders)

TCVN 3118:1993 (cubes)
Contractor
Compression strength test
ACI 318, Chapter 5

(cylinders)
Contractor
Concrete temperature
ASTM C1064
Contractor
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 87 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Not used.
Not used.
03311.2 Products
Materials and product requirements are provided in Articles 03311.1.5 and 03311.1.6.
03311.3 Execution
03311.3.1 General
Work shall include design and construction of formwork; installation of reinforcing steel and other
embedments; concrete placement, finishing, curing and other appurtenant work; and provision of
miscellaneous materials and services complete as specified. Concrete reinforcement and
embedments are covered in separate sections.
03311.3.2 Placement of Steel Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned and secured in place with wire ties or suitable clips.
Bare metal supports shall not be used in contact with forms for exposed concrete surfaces.
The clear distance between individual parallel bars shall not be less than 1.5 times the maximum size
of coarse aggregate in the concrete; not less than one nominal bar diameter; and not less than 25
mm in beams, 40 mm in columns, or 50 mm in other locations. Where reinforcements in beams are
placed in two or more layers, the bars in the upper layer shall be placed directly above the bars in the
lower layer and the clear distance between layers shall not be less than 25 mm. Clear distance
limitations between individual bars shall also apply to the clear distance between a contact lap splice
and adjacent splices or bars.
03311.3.2.1 Splices. Splices shall conform to the specified codes and standards. Lap splice
lengths shall permit all bars to be spliced at the splice location with no reduction in splice length due
to staggered splice locations or excess reinforcement unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
Splices in horizontal reinforcement placed in vertical wall sections shall be spliced in accordance with
top reinforcement requirements. Splices shall not be used in regions of maximum bending stress.
Lapped splices shall not be used for bars with a diameter greater than 40 mm. Splices for bars with a
diameter greater than 40 mm shall be made with mechanical splices.
Mechanical splices under tension shall develop the minimum strength specified in Article 03311.1.5.
The first four splices made by each operator shall be made in the presence of the mechanical splice
manufacturer's representative and the Site QA Manager. Each operator shall make splices in the
same splicing positions (vertical, horizontal, angle, or special) to be made for the project. All
procedures used shall be acceptable to the mechanical splice manufacturer's representative and the
Site QA Manager.
Reinforcing bar splices shall be welded only when directed by the EPC Contractors Consultant.
03311.3.2.2 Coatings. Rebar coatings that are damaged during installation shall be repaired as
specified by the coating manufacturer's standards.
03311.3.2.3 Reinforcement Installed in Hardened Concrete. Reinforcement installed in hardened
concrete shall be anchored with the specified reinforcing adhesive. Holes shall be drilled to a depth
sufficient to develop the tensile strength of the reinforcing bar as recommended in the manufacturer's
literature. Reinforcement shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 88 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
03311.3.3 Formwork
Forms shall be designed and constructed to produce hardened concrete having the shape, lines, and
dimensions indicated on the drawings.
Vertical surfaces of footings extended above finished grade shall be formed.
03311.3.3.1 Construction. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and shall
maintain position, shape, and alignment during and after placement of concrete.
Suspended members supported by concrete columns or piers shall be formed to allow the column or
pier forms to be removed without disturbing the supports for the suspended members.
03311.3.3.2 Form Ties. Form ties shall have sufficient strength, stiffness, and rigidity to support and
maintain the form in proper position and alignment without the use of auxiliary spreaders. Outer ends
of the permanently embedded portions of form ties shall be at least 25 mm back from adjacent outer
concrete faces. Permanently embedded portions of form ties that are not provided with threaded
ends shall be constructed to allow the removable ends to be broken off by twisting without chipping or
spalling the concrete surface.
Form ties in exposed surfaces shall be uniformly spaced.
03311.3.3.3 Edges and Corners. Chamfer strips shall be placed in forms to bevel all salient edges
and corners except buried edges and edges that are designated on the drawings to receive special
treatment. Equipment bases shall have formed beveled projecting edges for all vertical and
horizontal corners unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Bevel dimensions shall be 20 mm by
20 mm unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.
03311.3.3.4 Form Removal. Forms shall not be removed from structures until the concrete in the
structure has sufficient strength to support the weight of the structure and any superimposed load,
including loads from construction operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for limiting any
applied loadings. There shall be no evidence of damage to concrete and no excessive deflection or
distortion of members due either to the removal of forms or to loss of support.
Supporting formwork shall not be removed from horizontal members until the concrete has attained at
least 75 percent of the specified 28 day compressive strength as determined by cylinders made and
cured in the field. Shores shall not be removed before concrete has attained 28 day compressive
strength as specified herein. Shoring shall be left in place and reinforced as necessary to carry any
construction equipment or materials placed thereon.
When forms are removed before the specified curing is completed, measures shall be taken to
immediately continue curing. In cold weather conditions, adequate thermal protection for the
concrete shall be provided.
03311.3.4 Embedments
Anchor rods, castings, steel shapes, conduit, sleeves, masonry anchorages, and other materials
embedded in the concrete shall be accurately positioned and securely anchored.
Location tolerances for anchor rods, and for structural members, embedded structural steel shapes,
and plates, shall be in accordance with AISC Manual of Steel Construction Code of Standard
Practice.
Tolerances for equipment anchorages shall be as required by Article 03311.3.15.1.
Anchor rods shall be provided with sufficient threads to permit a nut to be installed on each side of the
form or template. The nuts shall secure the anchor rod in its proper position.
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 89 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Pipe sleeves, conduit, and other embedments shall be within 6 mm of their design locations unless
specified otherwise on the drawings or other specification sections.
Embedments shall not be welded to structural reinforcement.
Embedments shall be clean when they are installed. After concrete placement, exposed surfaces of
embedments shall be cleaned of all concrete spatter and other foreign substances.
Anchor rod sleeves, handrail sleeves, and similar openings in concrete susceptible to filling with water
and freezing shall be filled with closed cell PVC expansion joint filler for protection until grouting. The
upper neck of plastic anchor rod sleeves shall be cut out and the annular space filled with closed cell
PVC expansion joint filler or other equivalent means.
03311.3.4.1 Water Stops. Water stops shall be clean and free from coatings that weaken the bond
with concrete. Each PVC water stop shall be continuous throughout the length of the joint.
Intersections shall be made using factory prefabricated crosses, tees, and ells. The performance of
the splice shall be equal to that of the continuous material and shall be made in strict conformance
with the recommendations of the water stop manufacturer. Hydrophilic water stops shall be installed
as recommended by the water stop manufacturer.
Water stops shall be maintained in proper position until the concrete has been deposited and
compacted.
03311.3.5 Placement
The handling, depositing, and compacting of concrete shall conform to these specifications.
Adjustments may be made for weather or placement conditions.
Concrete shall not be pumped through aluminum or aluminum alloy pipe.
Construction joints indicated on the drawings shall define the limits of each concrete pour.
Subgrades shall be moistened with water prior to concrete placement. The subgrade shall not
contain puddles or wet, soft, unstable or muddy areas when the concrete is placed.
Concrete placed against rock or existing concrete shall have loose pieces of rock removed and the
exposed surface cleaned with a high-pressure hose before concrete is placed.
The space receiving concrete shall be clean and clear of debris and standing water.
Surfaces encrusted with dried mortar or concrete from previous placement operations shall be
cleaned before placing new concrete.
03311.3.5.1 Bonding to Hardened Concrete. The surface of hardened concrete, upon which fresh
concrete is placed, shall be rough, clean, and damp. The hardened surface shall be cleaned of all
laitance and foreign substances, shall be washed with clean water, and shall be in a saturatedsurface-dry condition by soaking with potable water for 8 to 24 hours before the fresh concrete is
placed. Excess water shall be removed from the surface receiving concrete prior to placement.
The surface of hardened concrete shall be prepared by one of the following methods:
At the time of the initial concrete placement, a retarding agent shall be applied to the fresh
concrete. After hardening, the concrete shall be pressure washed to remove the laitance and
to expose the aggregate.
The hardened concrete shall be roughened to approximately 6 mm amplitude. The concrete
may be roughened at the time of the initial concrete placement or by mechanical means after
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 90 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
the concrete has hardened. The roughened surface shall expose the aggregate and have an
open pore structure.
The prepared surface shall receive one of the following surface bonding treatments:
A 50 mm thick mortar puddle shall be deposited on hardened concrete in wall and column
forms immediately before placing fresh concrete. The mortar puddle shall be the specified
concrete mix, at the same water content, with the coarse aggregate omitted.
An epoxy bonding adhesive shall be used. The epoxy bonding adhesive shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Concrete shall be placed before the
adhesive sets.
03311.3.5.2 Conveyance and Distribution. Concrete shall be conveyed to the placement location
by methods that prevent separation or loss of the ingredients.
03311.3.5.3 Depositing Concrete. Concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers. The depth of a
layer shall not exceed 600 mm. Each layer of concrete shall be plastic when succeeding layers are
placed. Concrete shall be deposited without moving it laterally in the forms for a distance exceeding
1,500 mm, unless otherwise accepted by the Site QA Manager.
Plastic concrete is defined as concrete that allows the head of an operating immersion type vibrator
head to penetrate its full length into the previously placed concrete by means of its own weight.
Concrete that is no longer plastic shall be prepared as specified in Article 03311.3.5.1 and slushed
with mortar puddle. Mortar puddle shall be the specified concrete mix with the coarse aggregate
omitted. The preparation of the in-place concrete shall be acceptable to the Site QA Manager before
the successive layer of concrete is placed.
03311.3.5.3.1 Underwater concrete placement. Concrete placed under water shall be placed with
a tremie system or other method acceptable to the Site Construction Manager and EPC Contractors
Consultant. A placement plan covering the number of tremie pipes, locations, and rate of placement
shall be provided to the Site Construction Manager prior to beginning placement activities. At the
option of the Site Construction Manager, a pre-placement meeting may be scheduled to review this
plan and to coordinate placement activities and construction interfaces associated with this
placement.
Tremie pipes shall be between 200 to 255 mm in diameter or as required to prevent aggregate
blockage within the pipe during concrete placement. The concrete shall be placed at a rate to
maintain the tremie pipe in the concrete mass with a minimum 900 mm head of concrete above the
tremie pipe mouth.
03311.3.5.4 Consolidation. Concrete shall be compacted using mechanical immersion type
vibrating equipment. Mechanical vibrators shall maintain at least 9,000 cycles per minute when
immersed in the concrete. Each vibrator shall be driven by a 1 kW or larger motor. The number and
type of vibrators shall be acceptable to the Site Construction Manager.
03311.3.5.5 Hot Weather Concreting. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the codes and standards specified and the following:
At air temperatures of 32 C and above, special procedures shall be used to keep the concrete as
cool as possible during placement and curing.
The Contractor shall ensure that the concrete is not adversely affected by the climate factors, namely,
higher air temperature, low relative humidity and wind. The Contractor shall complete calculations or
testing to confirm that the dry bulb temperature of the placed concrete, taking into consideration the
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 91 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
heat of hydration of cement, does not exceed 38 degrees C. and that the rate of water evaporation
does not exceed 980 g/sq.m. per hour. Documentation of calculations or testing shall be submitted to
the EPC Contractors Consultant for approval.
When the air temperature is expected to approach 38 degrees C. or the rate of water evaporation is
expected to reach 980 g/sq. m. per hour, precautions consisting of dampening the subgrade and the
forms, erecting sunshades and windbreaks and reducing time between placement of concrete and
start of curing shall be taken.
The Contractor shall take precautionary measures to prevent or minimize the undesirable hot weather
effects by conforming to the requirements of ACI-305R, except as modified herein. The Contractor
shall lower the water temperature by mechanical refrigeration or by mixing water with crushed ice or
by pre-cooling the aggregates so that the temperature of the concrete as delivered shall not exceed
16 degrees C. for massive types of heavy construction and 32 degrees C. for other concrete
structures. Ice, when used as part of and for cooling mixing water, shall be limited to a maximum of
90% of the total water content. Ice shall be completely melted in mixing water prior to adding water to
the mixer.
Evaporation shall be minimized, particularly during the first few hours subsequent to placing concrete,
by suitable means such as applying moisture by fog spraying or any other means approved by the
Company. A water-reducing, set-retarding chemical admixture conforming to the requirements of
ASTM C494 Type D may be used in varying proportions under different air temperature conditions.
The admixture shall meet the requirements specified in 6.01.7. During the placing of all concrete
exposed or subject to rapid evaporation from drying conditions, including hot weather, heated interior
during cold weather, drying winds, and sunlight, work shall be protected (immediately following
screeding) with a protective application of "Confilm" or equivalent.
Material shall be sprayed over the entire surface of fresh, plastic concrete immediately following
screeding at a rate of not less than one liter of sprayable solution for each 5 square meters of surface
area.
Sprayable solution shall be prepared at the ratio of one part Confilm to nine parts of water.
Under severe drying conditions, additional applications may be required following bullfloating or
darbying, wood floating, flat trowelling, or raised trowelling.
Recommendations of the manufacturer shall be followed.
03311.3.5.6 Cold Weather Concreting.
Not used.
03311.3.5.7 Mass Concrete. Concrete sections with thickness in excess of 0.9 meters and surface
area in excess of 40 square meters (with least plan dimension greater than 2 meters) shall be
considered mass concrete. Mass concrete shall meet the following additional requirements.
The temperature of concrete when deposited shall not exceed 21 C nor be less than 2 C, unless an
alternative placement plan is submitted to and accepted by the Site QA Manager.
The concrete shall be cooled gradually so that the drop in concrete surface temperature during the
specified curing period does not exceed 11 C in any 24 hour period.
03311.3.6 Joints
03311.3.6.1 Construction Joints. Construction joints shall be located and constructed as indicated
on the drawings. If an alternative arrangement of construction joints is desired or if they are not
located on the drawings, drawings locating and detailing the proposed joints shall be submitted to the
EPC Contractors Consultant for approval before detailing and fabricating reinforcing steel.
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 92 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
All construction joints subjected to differential hydrostatic pressure shall be provided with a water
stop. Water stops shall be furnished in other joints as indicated on the drawings.
03311.3.6.2 Movement Joints. Movement joints may be expansion, contraction, or isolation joints.
These joints shall be located and constructed as indicated on the drawings. Expansion joint filler
shall be firmly bonded to the previously placed joint face with a suitable adhesive. The new concrete
shall be poured directly against the joint filler. Accessible edges of each joint shall be sealed with
polyurethane sealant.
Movement joints shall be as detailed on the drawings.
Joints indicated on the drawings and those subjected to differential hydrostatic pressure shall be
provided with a water stop installed as indicated on the drawings.
03311.3.6.3 Slab Control Joints. If sawed control joints are used, sawed joints shall be 3 mm to 4
mm wide with a minimum depth of one fourth of the slab thickness but not less than 25 mm.
Reinforcement shall not be cut during joint sawing. These joints shall be located as indicated on the
drawings. Cutting shall begin as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent dislodging
aggregate. Sawing shall be completed within 12 hours of completing placement.
03311.3.7 Openings in Concrete
Concrete wall and floor openings for piping and other fixtures, installed after the walls and floors are
built, shall allow sufficient space to properly compact concrete to fill the space around the pipe or
fixture. The top of each wall opening shall be sloped or beveled to provide adequate space for
placing and compacting the pipe embedment concrete. Water stops shall be provided around wall
openings below grade and floor openings that are exposed to weather or submergence.
03311.3.8 Finishing Formed Surfaces
The standard finish shall be a rough form finish. Fins and other surface projections exceeding 6 mm
shall be removed from all formed surfaces except exterior surfaces that will be covered with earth
backfill. Surface finish shall be that imparted by the forms.
03311.3.9 Finishing Unformed Surfaces
No surface treatment will be required for buried or permanently submerged concrete. Unformed
surfaces, designated as screeded surfaces on the drawings, shall be finished by screeding only.
Surfaces designated as floated surfaces and all surfaces not otherwise designated shall be finished
by screeding and floating. Surfaces designated as troweled surfaces shall be finished by screeding,
floating, and troweling.
Float finished and screeded surfaces shall be finished to provide a flat profile within 6 mm deviation
as measured from a 3.0 m straightedge. Trowel finished surfaces shall be finished to form a flat
plane. The surface profile shall not deviate more than 3 mm when measured from a 3.0 m
straightedge.
03311.3.9.1 Screeding. Screeding shall provide a concrete surface conforming to the designated
elevations and contours with all aggregates completely embedded in adjacent mortar. Surface
irregularities in screeded surfaces shall be limited to the tolerances specified.
03311.3.9.2 Floating. The surfaces shall be screeded and given an initial float finish as soon as the
concrete has stiffened sufficiently to work. Coarse aggregate disturbed by the float or causing a
surface irregularity shall be removed and replaced with mortar. Initial floating shall produce a surface
of uniform texture and appearance.
Initial floating shall be followed by a second floating at the time of initial set. The second floating shall
produce a smooth float finish of uniform texture and color.
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 93 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Floating shall be performed with hand floats or suitable mechanical compactor floats.
03311.3.9.3 Troweling. Surfaces designated on the drawings shall receive a steel trowel finish.
Troweling shall be performed after the second floating when the surface has hardened sufficiently to
prevent excess cement from being drawn to the surface. Troweling shall produce a dense, smooth,
uniform surface free from blemishes and trowel marks.
03311.3.9.4 Brooming. Brooming shall follow the float finish for surfaces so designated on the
drawings. Brooming shall be done with an acceptable steel or fiber broom not less than 450 mm
wide. Adjacent strokes of the broom shall overlap slightly. Broomed surfaces shall be free of porous
spots, irregularities, depressions, and small pockets or rough spots.
03311.3.9.5 Aggregate Exposure. Surface mortar shall be removed and the aggregate exposed
from surfaces that will be covered with mortar, concrete, or grout at a later time. The method used
shall be effective and acceptable to the Site Construction Manager.
03311.3.9.6 Edging. Unless specified to be beveled, exposed edges of floated or troweled surfaces
shall be edged with a tool having a 6 mm corner radius.
03311.3.9.7 Finishing Mortar. Finishing mortar shall be added if there is not sufficient mortar
available from the concrete mix. The proportions for this finishing mortar shall be 2.4 parts of
concrete sand to one part of portland cement, by weight, mixed with enough water for proper
application. Slump for finishing mortar shall not exceed 50 mm.
03311.3.10 Separate Finishes
Certain slab surfaces shall be finished with a separate concrete finish or floor covering as indicated
on the drawings.
Base slab surfaces shall be ground or filled until each surface is within the specified tolerances and is
acceptable to the Purchaser. Low areas shall be filled. High spots shall be ground slightly lower than
required and then filled and smoothed to the proper elevation and surface.
Surfaces that receive epoxy set quarry tile and resilient tile shall be flat with a profile that shall not
deviate more than 3 mm from a 3.0 m straightedge placed on any part of the surface. These surfaces
shall be either trowel finished concrete at the elevation indicated on the drawings or a float finished
surface set 3 mm low and leveled with trowel finished fill material.
Surfaces that receive a mortar set quarry tile, ceramic tile, or terrazzo finish shall be given a smooth,
tight, and uniform float finish with a profile tolerance of 6 mm as measured from a 3.0 m straightedge.
03311.3.11 Curing
Concrete shall be protected from loss of moisture for not less than 7 days after the concrete is placed.
Troweled surfaces, except those that receive a separate finish or coating, shall be cured with a
membrane curing compound. Float finished surfaces, except those that receive a separate finish,
may be cured with either a membrane curing compound or with water. Only water curing shall be
used if the surface receives a separate finish unless the curing compound is compatible with the
surface finish that will be installed.
03311.3.11.1 Water Curing. Water saturation of concrete surfaces shall begin as quickly as
possible after initial set of the concrete, but not more than 30 minutes. The rate of water application
shall be regulated to provide complete surface coverage with a minimum of runoff. The concrete
surface shall not be permitted to dry.
Water retaining structures shall be water cured.
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 94 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
03311.3.11.2 Membrane Curing. Membrane curing compound shall be applied within 30 minutes
after final finishing of the surface or as soon as possible after finishing without causing damage to the
surface. Membrane curing compound shall be spray applied at a coverage rate recommended by the
compound manufacturer. A dissipating curing membrane may be used in lieu of wet curing on
surfaces that will be covered at a later date with mortar, concrete, dampproofing, tile, or coating.
03311.3.12 Floor Sealer
Where indicated on the drawings, concrete floors shall be given a coat of clear floor sealer in addition
to that applied as membrane curing compound. The coating shall be applied at the end of the curing
period before any traffic is permitted on the floor. A second coat, if required, shall be applied after the
floor has been cleaned in preparation for the final inspection. Floor sealer shall be applied in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
03311.3.13 Repairing Defective Concrete
Surface defects in formed concrete shall be repaired within 24 hours. Concrete that is porous,
honeycombed, or otherwise defective to a depth in excess of 25 mm shall be cut out and removed to
sound concrete. Edges shall be square cut to avoid feathering. Bonding surfaces shall have the
laitance removed and the coarse aggregate exposed. A bonding compound shall be used between
the hardened and repair concrete profile. When epoxy bonding adhesive is used, surfaces shall be
prepared and the compound applied as recommended by the bonding agent manufacturer.
Defective concrete shall be replaced within 48 hours after the forms have been removed.
Concrete repair work shall not interfere with the curing of surrounding concrete. Mortar and concrete
used in repair work shall be adequately cured and shall be finished to match adjacent surfaces.
03311.3.14 Duct Banks
Reinforcing steel and other magnetic materials installed in duct banks shall be parallel to the lengths
of the ducts unless they enclose all the ducts of the duct bank.
Hardened surfaces that receive additional concrete shall have the surface prepared in accordance
with Article 03311.3.5.1. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and a thin coating of cement mortar
shall be spread over the surface before concrete is placed.
Duct bank concrete shall be carefully compacted to avoid damaging the conduit. Concrete shall be
worked around reinforcements and embedments and into the corners of the forms.
03311.3.15 Tolerances
Tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 117. The offset between adjacent pieces of formwork
facing material for surfaces exposed to view shall not exceed 13 mm and for concealed surfaces shall
not exceed 25 mm. Embedments shall meet the tolerances of Article 03311.3.4.
03311.3.15.1 Equipment Bases. Concrete bases and their embedments for structures and
equipment shall meet the following tolerance requirements in addition to those already specified,
unless otherwise specified by the equipment supplier.
Concrete form dimensions and placement shall be within 13 mm of the dimensions and locations
indicated on the drawings. The top of the forms shall be accurately set to the designated elevation
and within the specified tolerances.
The elevation of all points on all float finished surfaces shall be within 6 mm of the elevation indicated
on the drawings. The elevation of all points on all trowel finished surfaces shall be within 3 mm of the
elevation indicated on the drawings.
Anchor rods and all other materials that are embedded in the concrete shall be accurately positioned
and securely anchored. The center of each anchor rod group or cluster shall be within 3 mm of the
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 95 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
location indicated on the drawings. The center-to-center dimensions between the anchor rods in a
group or cluster shall be within 2 mm of the dimensions indicated on the drawings.
Elevation of top of anchor rods shall be within 6mm of the elevation indicated on the drawings.
03311.3.16 Field Control Testing
03311.3.16.1 Sampling. Field control tests shall be made at the point of placement in the presence
of the Site QA Manager or his designee. Equipment, supplies, and qualified personnel necessary for
the field control testing shall be supplied.
Tests shall be performed by an acceptable independent testing laboratory or Contractor's qualified
QA personnel in accordance with the codes and standards specified in Article 03311.1.7. The
frequency specified for each field control test is a minimum.
03311.3.16.2 Slump. A slump test shall be made from each of the first three batches mixed each
day. An additional slump test shall be made for each additional 38 cubic meters of concrete placed
that day.
When plasticizers and superplasticizers are added at the site, the slump shall be measured and
recorded before and after the addition.
03311.3.16.3 Air Content. An air content test shall be made from one of the first three batches
mixed each day and from each batch of concrete used to make compression test cylinders or cubes.
03311.3.16.4 Concrete Temperature. A concrete temperature test shall be made from one of the
first three batches mixed each day and from each batch of concrete used to make compression test
cylinders or cubes.
03311.3.16.5 Compression Tests. Concrete compression test cylinders or cubes shall be made
each day concrete is placed. A set of six test cylinders (or cubes) shall be made from the same batch
at 75 m3 intervals required by the referenced standard in Article 03311.1.4 unless alternate intervals
are specified by the Site QA Manager.
Each set of compression test cylinders/cubes shall be marked or tagged with the date and time of day
the cylinders/cubes were made, the location in the work where the concrete represented by the
cylinders/cubes was placed, the delivery truck or batch number, the air content, and the slump.
If Type II or Type V cement is used in the concrete, two extra cylinders/cubes shall be made for each
set and may be tested at an age of 45 days if the minimum strength requirements are not met at 28
days as outlined in the following paragraph.
For each set of cylinders/cubes, three cylinders/cubes shall be tested at an age of 7days and the
results shall be not less than 0.75 of the minimum allowable f'c specified. At 28 days the remaining
three cylinders/cubes shall be tested and the average strength of said cylinders shall not be less than
the minimum allowable f'c specified. If the average of the compressive strengths of two
cylinders/cubes minimum in each set of three tested is less than the minimum allowable f'c specified,
the test shall be discarded and the Contractor shall perform tests in accordance with ASTM C42 or a
nondestructive test as approved by the EPC Contractors Consultant. Additionally, if the average of
the strength tests of the cylinders/cubes for any portion of the structure falls below the minimum
allowable f'c specified at 28 days, the EPC Contractors Consultant may require a change in the
proportions of the water content, cement or admixtures in the concrete mix for the remaining portions
of the structures.
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 96 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
If the Contractor requires additional cylinders/cubes to be taken for early testing to support
advancement or removal of forms, the additional testing can be coordinated as part of the overall
concrete testing program.
03311.3.16.6 Test Reports. Test reports shall contain the information specified by ASTM C39 and
the following additional information:
Date, time, and ambient temperature of pour.
Location of pour.
Mix class.
All test reports shall be kept by the Site QA Manager. Copies of all failed tests shall be submitted to
the EPC Contractors Consultant.
Source: 03311, 2011, v.1.8
Page 97 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

03316 - Concrete Supply

03316.1 General
Scope of supply shall include furnishing materials and batching, mixing, and delivering concrete to the
point of placement. The scope of supply also includes other services as specified under these
technical specifications.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for concrete supply include the following:
Specific
General Requirements
Range for anticipated daily volumes of
concrete supply
Minimum, m3
Maximum, m
As required by EPC Contractor
Primary source
Onsite batch plant
Minimum guaranteed delivery

rate required, m3 per hour of
primary source
Secondary source
EPC Contractor to determine if one of the

following secondary sources is required:
Offsite ready-mix facility or Onsite batch
plant
Minimum guaranteed delivery

rate required, m3 per hour of
secondary source
Mix Criteria and Limiting Requirements
Mix
Class
Usage
Design
Strength at
28 Days,
MPa
Maximum
Coarse
Aggregate
Size, mm
Maximum
Slump,
mm
Maximum
Slump with
Superplasticizer
(HRWR),*
mm
A1
Leveling concrete
or work slabs,
mud mats, nonstructural fill
concrete
10
38
150
250
A2
General use for

ductbanks, pipe
21
38
150
250
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 98 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Mix Criteria and Limiting Requirements
Mix
Class
Usage
trenches and
covers
Design
Strength at
28 Days,
MPa
Maximum
Coarse
Aggregate
Size, mm
Maximum
Slump,
mm
Maximum
Slump with
Superplasticizer
(HRWR),*
mm
B1
General usage for

foundations and
substructures
28
25
100
200
B2
Chimneys, silos,
and lowering wells
28
19
100
N/A
C1
Boiler foundation,
Turbine mat and
pedestal, water
retaining
structures, or
structures
exposed to
aggressive
environment
35
25
100
200
D1
Foundation piers
(See Specification
71.0401 for
concrete
requirements for
Precast
Prestressed
concrete piling)
28
20
100
200
E1
Underwater
concrete
28
25
150-225
--
* High range, water reducing.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 99 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Mix
Class

Usage
Maximum
Water/
Cementitious
Materials
Ratio
Air Content,
percent
Cement
Type
A1
Leveling concrete
or work slabs,
mud mats, nonstructural fill
concrete
0.75
N/A
II
A2
General use for

ductbanks, pipe
trenches and
covers
0.5
3-6
II
B1
General usage for

foundations and
substructures
0.5
3-6
II
B2
Chimneys, silos,
and lowering wells
0.45
3-6
II
C1
Boiler foundation,
Turbine mat and
pedestal, water
retaining
structures, or
structures
exposed to
aggressive
environment
0.40
3-6
II
D1
Foundation piers
(See Specification
71.0401 for
concrete
requirements for
Precast or
Prestressed
concrete piling)
0.45
N/A
II
E1
Underwater
concrete
0.45
3-6
II
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Work performed under these specifications shall be in accordance with the following codes and
Work
In Accordance With
Mix design and qualification
ACI 301 and ACI 318
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 100 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Work
In Accordance With
Concrete proportions
ACI 318, Chapter 5
Batch plant and production facilities
ASTM C94 and Concrete Plant Standards

of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers
Bureau
Ready-mix concrete
ASTM C94
Making, curing, and storing concrete

cylinders
ASTM C192
Water soluble chloride limits
ACI 318, Chapter 4
03316.1.5 Materials
General
Component
Material
Cement
ASTM C150; Type II
Supplementary Cementitious Materials

Fly ash
ASTM C618, Class F
Loss on ignition
4 percent maximum
Fine aggregate
ASTM C33; clean, natural sand
Coarse aggregate
ASTM C33, Class Designation 4S (include

requirements of Appendix XI with
documentation)
Chemical admixtures
Water reducing
ASTM C494, Type A
Retarding
ASTM C494, Type B
Water reducing, normal, midrange, and retarding
ASTM C494, Type D
Water reducing, high range

(extended slump life type)
ASTM C494, Type F
Water reducing, high range and

retarding (extended slump life
type)
ASTM C494, Type G
Air-entraining agent
ASTM C260
03316.1.6 Not Used

The following testing to support the mix designs shall be conducted in accordance with the specified
source.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 101 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Water soluble chloride ion

testing
ASTM C1218
Contractor
Total air content
ASTM C231 and verified with

ASTM C138
Contractor
Aggregate compliance
ASTM C33
Contractor
Aggregate soundness
ASTM C88
Contractor
Sand equivalent for fine

aggregate
ASTM D2419
Contractor
Aggregate bulk specific

gravity
ASTM C127 and C128
Contractor
Potential reactivity of
aggregates
ASTM C33, Appendix XI
Contractor
Mortar bar method
ASTM C227
Contractor
Chemical method
ASTM C289
Contractor
Concrete cylinder
compressive strength tests
at 7 and 28 days
ASTM C39
Contractor
Initial set
ASTM C403
Contractor
Slump
ASTM C143
Contractor
Air content
ASTM C231
Contractor
Sulfate resistance
ASTM C452 or ASTM C1012
Contractor
Total water soluble chloride

ion content
AASHTO Method T260
Contractor
Concrete temperature
ASTM C1064
Contractor
Aggregate sampling
ASTM D75
Contractor
Aggregate sieve analysis

(aggregate gradation)
ASTM C136
Contractor
Unit weight of concrete
ASTM C138
Contractor
Concrete Material Control Testing

Intervals
Fine aggregate testing interval
250 metric tons
Coarse aggregate testing interval
250 metric tons
Sand equivalent
250 metric tons

Not used.
Not used.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 102 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

03316.2 Products
03316.2.1 Work Included Under These Specifications
Concrete and miscellaneous materials and services shall be furnished complete as specified.
03316.2.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the specifications listed in Article 03316.1.5.
03316.2.2.1 Material Control Testing. The following tests and the test reports shall be performed
during the progress of the work. The testing frequency is specified in Article 03316.1.7.
03316.2.2.1.1 Aggregate gradation. Sampling and testing shall occur as specified in Article
03316.1.7 and at least every 6 months.
03316.2.2.1.2 Sand equivalent. The sand equivalent test shall be conducted each time the sand
gradation tests are conducted.
03316.2.2.1.3 Supplementary cementitious materials (fly ash). Certified copies of subsupplier's
(source) test reports showing chemical composition and physical analysis for each shipment shall be
provided to the Site QA Manager. The certification shall confirm compliance with the specifications.
The certificate shall be signed by the mineral admixture subsupplier.
03316.2.2.1.4 Cement. Certified copies of Supplier's (source) test reports showing chemical
composition and physical analysis shall be submitted for each shipment delivered. Certification shall
show that the cement complies with these specifications. The certificate shall be signed by both the
cement manufacturer and the Supplier.
03316.2.3 Limiting Requirements
Unless otherwise specified, each concrete mixture shall be designed and controlled, within the
following limits, to provide a dense, durable concrete suitable for the expected service conditions.
Each concrete mixture shall be designed and concrete shall be controlled within the limits specified in
Article 03316.1.5.
03316.2.3.1 Cement Content Limits. The minimum quantity of portland cement or combined
portland cement and mineral admixture in the concrete shall be as specified below.
Maximum cement content, when Type I cement is used, shall not be more than 1.15 times the
minimum cement content specified. When a Type II or Type V cement is used, the cement content
shall not be increased more than necessary to achieve the required compressive strength average
(f'cr).
Minimum Cement Content
Aggregate Size,
mm
Normal
Exposures, kg/m3
Water Retaining
Structures and
Chemical Exposures,
kg/m3
38
280
308
357
25
310
318
369
19
320
336
380
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Concrete Placed
Underwater,
kg/m3
Page 103 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

03316.2.3.2 Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio. The maximum water-cement ratio

shall be determined on a cement mass basis. If fly ash is used, the combined mass of cement and
pozzolan shall be used to determine the water-cementitious materials ratio.
03316.2.3.3 Supplementary Cementitious Materials. When included in the concrete,
supplementary cementitious material shall be within the following percentages of the combined
weight of cementitious material:
Fly ash (Class F)
15 to 25 percent
Class C fly ash shall not be used. Testing shall be by ASTM C452, ASTM C1012, or other method
acceptable to the Engineer.
03316.2.3.4 Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall be clean, natural sand. Artificial or manufactured
sand will not be acceptable. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed rock, washed gravel, or other inert
granular material.
Final gradation of the coarse aggregate shall conform to maximum nominal size grading requirements
of the referenced standards when one size of aggregate or a combination of two or more sizes is
used.
When specified to be performed in Article 03316.1.7, sand equivalent for fine aggregate shall not be
less than 75 for an average of three samples tested.
The maximum coarse aggregate content consistent with workability and minimizing shrinkage shall
be used in the mixture.
03316.2.3.5 Ratio of Fine to Total Aggregates. The ratio of fine to total aggregates, based on solid
volumes (not weights), shall be as follows:
Ratio
Coarse Aggregate Size from No. 4

(4.75 mm) Sieve to
Minimum
Maximum
19 mm
0.35
0.50
25 mm
0.30
0.46
38 mm
0.25
0.42
03316.2.3.6 Slump. Concrete slump shall be kept as low as possible, consistent with proper
handling and thorough consolidation. When a superplasticizer is used, slump shall be at least 50 mm
and shall not exceed 75 mm before the addition of the superplasticizer.
If superplasticizer is to be dispensed at the ready-mix plant, the concrete mix design shall be based
on the maximum slump specified in Article 03316.1.3. If superplasticizer is to be dispensed at the
site, the slump shall not exceed the maximum specified slump before superplasticizer is added.
03316.2.3.7 Initial Set. The initial set shall be attained 5-1/2 hours 1 hour after the water and
cement are added to the aggregates for each concrete mixture. The quantity of retarding admixture
shall be adjusted to compensate for variations in temperature and job conditions.
03316.2.3.8 Total Air Content. The total volumetric air content of concrete after placement shall be
within the specified range of values. Air-entraining admixture may be omitted from concrete for
interior slabs to be trowel finished.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 104 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
A plan for maintaining the specified air content during transit and placement shall be submitted to the
Site QA Manager before placement begins.
03316.2.3.9 Chemical Admixtures. Unless otherwise acceptable to the EPC Contractors
Consultant, all chemical admixtures shall be from one manufacturer and shall be compatible.
Chemical admixtures that are compatible with other admixtures and concrete materials shall not have
an adverse effect on the required properties of the concrete nor the specified limiting requirements.
The chemical admixture content, batching method, and time of introduction to the mixture shall
comply with these specifications and with the manufacturer's recommendations. The chemical
admixture manufacturer shall provide qualified field services as necessary.
Chemical admixtures used in the concrete shall minimize shrinkage and shall be as recommended in
writing by the chemical admixture manufacturer prior to conducting the laboratory trial concrete
mixture testing. No calcium chloride or admixture containing calcium chloride shall be used.
Chemical admixtures containing unrefined or raw lignosulfonic acids ("lignins") or their salts will not
be acceptable.
Combinations of chemical admixtures which cause premature or local dehydration or postcompaction settlement of the concrete surface shall not be used. If any such undesirable
characteristics are observed, the use of the mixture shall be discontinued and an alternate mix design
used.
A water reducing chemical admixture shall be included in all structural concrete. When specified, a
superplasticizer shall also be used in concrete. At the option of the Contractor, a superplasticizer
may be used in all concrete. When a superplasticizer is used, the chemical admixture manufacturer
shall recommend to the EPC Contractors Consultant, in writing, the type of superplasticizer to be
used with the required water reducing admixture to achieve the specified initial set times.
Superplasticizer may be dispensed into the concrete at the plant or at the jobsite and shall be mixed
in accordance with the admixture manufacturer's recommendations. Each superplasticizer dose,
when dispensed at the site, shall be easily verifiable and recorded on the delivery ticket. The
superplasticizer for each load shall be accurately proportioned into a separate container prior to
dispensing the admixture into the concrete. When truck mounted dispensers are used, the system
shall not be flushed or cleaned with water until after the entire load of concrete has been discharged.
When redosing of superplasticizer at the site is permitted by the Site QA Manager, redosing shall be
done only once. Redosing procedures shall be as recommended by the chemical admixture
manufacturer.
When chemical admixtures are used in large dosage rates 283 g or more per 45 kg of cementitious
material, their water content shall be included in the total unit water content.
03316.2.3.10 Pumped Concrete. Coarse aggregate size for pumped concrete mixtures shall be
limited to a maximum of 38 mm.
The slump of concrete, with or without a superplasticizer, that is discharged into the pump may
exceed the specified maximum slump value by the amount of slump loss in the pumping system, up
to a maximum of 25 mm. The slump loss shall be determined by tests made at each end of the
pumping system.
03316.2.3.11 Special Requirements for Hot Weather. A water reducing retarder shall be included
in the concrete mix when the temperature of the concrete placed exceeds 24 C.
03316.2.3.12 Strength. Concrete shall achieve an average strength above the specified design
strength provided in Article 03316.1.3. Statistical data for 28 day strengths and the moving average
of three 28 day strengths shall be maintained for each mix.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 105 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
03316.3 Execution
03316.3.1 Proportioning
03316.3.1.1 Mix Design. A tentative concrete mixture shall be designed and tested in the laboratory
for each size and combined gradation of aggregates and for each mix specified for use on the work.
Concrete proportions shall be established based on field experience, laboratory trial mixtures, or both.
Established mixes with documented historical records meeting the specified requirements for the
concrete may be used for the work. The qualification records for these mixes shall be submitted for
acceptance prior to beginning the work. If these records are acceptable, additional mix design testing
is not required.
Mixtures shall be adjusted in the field as necessary, within the limits specified, to meet the
requirements of these specifications.
03316.3.1.2 Preliminary Review. Reports covering the source and quality of concrete materials and
the concrete proportions proposed for the work shall be submitted to the EPC Contractors Consultant
for review before performing the required trial mixture designs and before concrete work is started.
Review of these reports will be for general acceptability only, and continued compliance with all
contract provisions will be required.
03316.3.1.2.1 Mix design. Design quantities and test results on each mix shall be accepted before
concrete work is started.
03316.3.1.3 Mix Design Testing. Unless specified otherwise, all tests and reports required for
preliminary review shall be made specifically for this project. All materials shall be tested in
accordance with the specified test methods, and reports for these tests shall be prepared specifically
for this project. If the source of any concrete materials is changed during the contract, the materials
and the new mix design shall be tested in accordance with the specified preliminary review
requirements. Reports shall then be submitted for review.
The tests listed in Article 03316.1.7 shall be performed and reported for each mix class as required by
the referenced codes and standards, unless modified by the following requirements.
03316.3.1.3.1 Initial set. Initial set tests shall be made at ambient temperatures of 21 C and 32 C
to determine compliance with the specified time for initial set. The test at 21 C shall be made using
concrete containing the specified normal set/water reducing admixture and, when required, airentraining admixture. The test at 32 C shall be made using concrete containing the specified
retarding/water reducing admixture and, when required, air-entraining admixture.
03316.3.1.3.2 Trial batch with superplasticizer. A preliminary test on a trial batch shall be
conducted at the project site, using the proposed superplasticizer in the accepted mixture design to
determine the correct dosage. When superplasticizer is not included in the trial mixture, the trial
batch tested at the site shall be used to determine the compatibility of the superplasticizer with the
other materials used in the concrete, including the other admixtures.
03316.3.1.3.3 Alkali-aggregate reactivity. When specified, alkali-aggregate reactivity potential
shall be determined in accordance with Appendix XI of ASTM C33. Existing test records from
aggregate suppliers may be used in lieu of new testing if the records are recent and can be justified
as being representative of the current aggregate supply. Aggregates shall be tested in accordance
with ASTM C289 and C295 to determine potential reactivity. Aggregates which do not indicate a
potential for alkali reactivity or do not have reactive constituents may be used without further testing.
Aggregates which indicate a potential for alkali reactivity shall be further tested in accordance with
ASTM C227 or C1105, as appropriate, using a cement containing less than 0.6 percent alkalis.
Nonreactive aggregates shall be imported if local aggregates exhibit unacceptable potential reactivity.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 106 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
03316.3.1.3.4 Water soluble chloride. Maximum water soluble chloride ion concentrations in
hardened concrete at an age of 28 days shall not exceed the limits expressed as a percentage of
mass of cement as specified in the referenced code in Article 03316.1.4.
Test results shall be reported as the percentage of water soluble chloride ions in the concrete and as
a percentage of chloride ion relative to the mass of cement in the concrete.
Testing of the concrete components, except aggregates, for water soluble chloride ions shall be done
during material and mix qualification and at the discretion of the Supplier during the course of supply.
Copies of the reports on such tests shall be furnished to the Engineer.
The hardened concrete and each gradation of aggregate used in the concrete shall be tested each
time a chloride ion test is conducted on a concrete mixture.
03316.3.2 Batching
Aggregates, mineral admixture, and cement shall be measured by weight. Aggregate weights shall
be adjusted for the moisture content.
Correct proportions of admixtures shall be dispensed automatically.
The amount of water required to produce the desired slump shall be batched automatically.
Additional water needed to maintain a uniform slump shall be added manually by the mixer operator.
This additional site-added water shall be limited to a volume that maintains the total mix water to
within the volume defined by the maximum specified water-cement ratio for that mix. Slump shall be
kept uniform. Aggregates shall float uniformly throughout the mass. The concrete shall flow
sluggishly when vibrated.
03316.3.3 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed until all ingredients are uniformly distributed throughout the batch. Mixers
shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacities.
If the mixing water is added at the worksite, only the prescribed amount of mixing water required by
the mix design shall be placed in the mixing tank, unless the tank is equipped with a meter allowing
the amount of water added to each batch to be verified. If water content does not exceed limiting
requirements, water may be added to the concrete at the discharge point. Only one application of
water will be allowed. The water shall be incorporated into the mix by at least 30 revolutions of the
truck mixer at mixing speed.
If a high range water reducer (superplasticizer) is used, slump shall be controlled by the addition of
measured amounts of admixture instead of adding water.
03316.3.4 Delivery
Delivery tickets shall be prepared for each load of concrete. Tickets shall be presented to the Site QA
Manager receiving the concrete to acknowledge receipt of the concrete. These signed delivery
tickets shall be distributed as follows:
Original and one copy to the Site QA Manager.
Delivery tickets shall indicate the following:
Serial number of ticket.
Truck number.
Mix class of concrete.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 107 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Quantity delivered (include weights of constituent materials).

Date and time of delivery.
Outdoor temperature in the shade.
Time when cement was combined with water or wet aggregates.
Design slump without superplasticizer.
Design slump after addition of with superplasticizer.
Numerical sequence of delivery.
Time of concrete discharge from the truck and time when the truck is released after
discharge.
Quantity and type of admixtures.
Site dispensed admixtures and volume dispensed.
Allowable water permitted after batch water added, and quantity of extra water
added.
Percent moisture compensation for each type of aggregate.
Both "heated" or "cooled" concrete checkoffs.
Concrete temperature at batch plant.
Concrete shall be discharged within 90 minutes or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions after
the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates, or the introduction of the cement
to wet aggregates. In hot weather, or under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete,
a shorter time period may be required by the Site QA Manager. Concrete that does not meet this
time requirement may be rejected.
03316.3.4.1 Hot Weather Concrete. Concrete delivered in hot weather shall be in accordance with
the recommendations of the codes and standards specified. Hot weather concrete procedures shall
include cooling the mix water, aggregates, and cement; the addition of ice; and other processes so
that the temperature of the concrete as delivered shall not exceed 16 degrees C. for massive types of
heavy construction and 32 degrees C. for other concrete structures. Ice, when used as part of and
for cooling mixing water, shall be limited to a maximum of 90% of the total water content. Ice shall be
completely melted in mixing water prior to adding water to the mixer.
At air temperatures of 32 C and above, special procedures shall be used to keep the concrete as
cool as possible during placement.
Reference Cast-in-Place Concrete Specification Article 03311.3.5.5 for additional detailed hot
weather concreting requirements.
03316.3.4.2 Cold Weather Concrete. Not used
03316.3.5 Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete
Concrete will be evaluated for compliance with all requirements of the specifications. Concrete
strength will be only one of the criteria used for evaluation and acceptance of the concrete. The
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 108 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
results of all tests performed on the concrete and other data and information concerning the
procedures for handling, placing, and curing concrete will be used to evaluate the concrete for
compliance with the specified requirements.
03316.3.5.1 Compression Test Evaluation. Compressive strength test results will be evaluated for
compliance with the specified strength requirements and the specified requirements that relate to
durability.
Reference Cast-in-Place Concrete Specification Article 03311.3.17.5 for compression test
requirements.
Source: 03316, 2009, v.1.1
Concrete Supply
Page 109 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
03611 Grouting for Pile Heads

03611.1 General
Scope of work shall include surface preparation, grout materials, placement, and curing of grout
placed for hollow spun cast pile head grout plugs.
Not applicable.
Unless otherwise specified below, performance and design requirements for the grouting are
indicated in Article 03611.1.5.
Work
In Accordance With
Grout mixing and placing
Manufacturer's instructions
03611.1.5 Materials
General
Grouting
Application

cementitious grout
Plug for pile heads
Prejob grout meeting
Yes
Specific
Component
Material

cementitious grout
Grout shall meet ASTM C1107 and the following

additional requirements within the temperature
range of 10 C and 32 C.
Compressive strength shall be a minimum of 35
MPa at 28 days.
Extended working times shall be 30 minutes at a
flowable consistency. Grout shall not bleed at the
manufacturer's maximum recommended water
content.
Source: 03611, 2011, v1.4
Grouting for Pile Heads
Page 110 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

For the following components, the manufacturers are listed below provide examples of the quality of
product and field support services required by these specifications. Components by nonlisted
manufactures must equal or exceed the performance of those listed:
Component
Manufacturer
General purpose nonshrinking cementitious

grout
Master Builders "Masterflow 955 Grout"

L & M "Duragrout"
Conspec "Enduro 50 Grout"
Unisorb "V-2"
Euclid "Euco N-S"

The following testing for cement grouts shall be conducted in accordance with the specified standards
listed in the following table. Strength shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1107. Field testing of
the grout shall be performed as follows:
Field Flow Cone Testing
Field flow cone tests shall be performed as specified below to establish the water content that will
meet the fluid consistency performance for the grout. The maximum and minimum water content
shall be established to confirm the fluid consistency will meet the specified grout strength. Grout
cubes shall be made and tested from the same batch that the flow cone measurements are taken at
the upper and lower water content range being established for the placement.
The Contractor may propose a method to establish the water content limits for the fluid consistency
as a substitute for the flow cone tests, if acceptable to the EPC Contractors Consultant. Adequate
documentation shall be provided to substantiate the reliability for this substitute procedure:
Flow cone testing shall be performed at the following frequency:
Prior to the first grouting operation as directed by the Site
Construction Manager.
Each new lot of grout material.
Compression testing shall be performed at the following frequency:
A minimum of one compression test each grouting day, if less than
10 cubic meters.
One compression test for each additional 10 cubic meters or fraction
thereof.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Field flow cone (20 to 30 seconds

reading)
ASTM C939
Contractor
Field compression test cubes

(three 50 mm cubes)
ASTM C109 as modified

by ASTM C1107
Contractor

Not used.
Source: 03611, 2011, v1.4
Page 111 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Not used.
03611.2 Products
The product shall be as specified in Article 03611.1.5.
03611.3 Execution
03611.3.1 Baseplate Grouting
Not used.
03611.3.1.1 Pre-Job Grout Meeting. If specified in Article 03611.1.5, a pre-job grout meeting shall
be held with the grout manufacturer's representative to confirm mixing and placement procedures to
ensure proper grout performance for conditions expected at the jobsite.
03611.3.2 Surface Preparation
Hardened concrete surfaces where grout is to be placed shall be mechanically prepared by chipping
or sandblasting to remove laitance, to expose sound surface mortar, and to provide a fractured
aggregate surface. Prepared surfaces shall be cleaned to remove oil, grease, curing compound, or
other foreign materials that prevent a proper bond between grout and concrete. For cementitious
grout, the prepared surface shall be flooded with potable water for 8 to 24 hours prior to grout
placement and the surface shall be wet without standing water or puddles immediately prior to grout
placement. If compressed air is used to blow off excess water, the air compressor shall have an oil
separator.
Prepared surfaces shall be in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations.
03611.3.3 Alignment and Leveling
Not used.
03611.3.4 Mixing
Grout shall be mixed as recommended by the grout manufacturer.
03611.3.5 Placement
Grout shall be used immediately after mixing before stiffening occurs. The temperature of the grout
at placement shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations. Placement methods used shall
provide grout surfaces that are completely filled, without voids.
03611.3.6 Cementitious Grout
03611.3.6.1 Finishing. Grout shall remain undisturbed after placing until a stiff set is obtained.
03611.3.6.2 Curing. When finishing is completed, wet curing shall be provided by covering the
exposed pile head with a cloth kept continuously wet for a minimum of 24 hours unless required
otherwise by the grout manufacturer's instructions. Following wet curing, curing compound
acceptable to the EPC Contractors Consultant may be applied to all exposed surfaces as an
alternative to continued wet curing.
Special procedures shall be used to keep the grout cool when air temperatures of 32 C or higher are
encountered.
Source: 03611, 2011, v1.4
Page 112 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
09900 - Field Applied Protective Coatings

09900.1 General
Cleaning, surface preparation, and coating application shall be as specified herein and shall meet or
exceed the coating manufacturer's recommendations. When the manufacturer's minimum
recommendations exceed the specified requirements, the Contractor shall comply with the
manufacturer's minimum recommendations.
09900.1.1 Scope
This section covers field applied protective coatings, including surface preparation, protection of
surfaces, inspection, and other appurtenant work for equipment and surfaces designated to be coated
with heavy-duty industrial coatings. Touch-up painting, where required, shall restore or complete any
damaged, inadequate, or masked surfaces to the full coating specified on the applicable Coating
System Data Sheet.
Not applicable.
09900.1.3 Coating Applications and Material Requirements
Requirements for the coating materials are indicated on the Coating System Data Sheets included as
attachments to these specifications.
Except as otherwise noted, the following areas and items shall not be coated:
Metal wall panels and flashings (exterior).
Glass and glazing.
Acoustical ceiling.
Aluminum surfaces.
Brass and Bronze.
Quarry tile, ceramic tile, or ceramic granular flooring.
Resilient floor coverings.
Hardware.
Floor plates.
Embedments (galvanized).
Grating.
Galvanized ductwork, dampers, and fan boxes.
Light fixtures, except supports.
Electrical conductors, insulated or uninsulated.
Electrical conduits, wireways, and junction boxes (except as otherwise specified).
Cable trays and supports.
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Field Applied Protective Coatings
Page 113 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Chromium plated metals.

Gauges.
Rotating shafts and couplings.
Rubber belts, skirting, gaskets, and idler disks
09900.1.3.1 Delivery and Storage. All coating products shall be received and stored in accordance
with the coating manufacturer's recommendations.
Work
In Accordance With
Fabrication details, surface finish requirements, and proper design considerations

for tanks and vessels to be lined for
immersion service
NACE RP0178
Mineral and Slag Abrasives
SSPC-AB 1
Newly Manufactured or Remanufactured

Steel Abrasives
SSPC-AB 3
Solvent cleaning
SSPC-SP 1
Hand tool cleaning
SSPC-SP 2
Power tool cleaning
SSPC-SP 3
White metal blast cleaning
SSPC-SP 5 / NACE No. 1
Near white blast cleaning
Commercial blast cleaning
Brush-off blast cleaning
Power tool cleaning to bare metal
SSPC-SP 11
Surface Preparation and Cleaning of

Steel and Other Hard Materials by Highand Ultra-High Pressure Water Jetting
Prior to Recoating
SSPC-SP 12
Surface Preparation of Concrete
SSPC-SP 13
Shop, field, and maintenance painting of

steel
SSPC-PA 1
A guide to safety in paint application
SSPC-PA Guide 3
Standard procedure for evaluating

painting contractors
SSPC-QP 1
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 114 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Work
In Accordance With
Visual standard for abrasive blast

cleaned steel
SSPC-VIS 1
Visual standard for power and hand tool

cleaned surfaces
SSPC-VIS 3
09900.1.5 Materials
Not used.
Refer to the attached Coating System Data Sheets for approved manufacturers.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Indicating moisture in
concrete by the plastic
sheet method
ASTM D4263
Contractor
Indicating oil or water in

compressed air
ASTM D4285
Contractor
Measurement of wet
film thickness by notch
gauges
ASTM D4414
Contractor
Field measurement of
surface profile of blast
cleaned steel
ASTM D4417
Contractor
Pull-off strength of
coatings using portable
adhesion testers
ASTM D4541
Contractor
Discontinuity (Holiday)
testing of nonconductive
protective coatings on
metallic substrates
ASTM D5162
Contractor
Measurement of dry
paint thickness with
magnetic gauges
SSPC-PA 2
Contractor

The following attachments accompany these specifications in either paper or electronic format. The
information contained in these documents constitutes requirements under the defined Scope of Work:
Document
Number/Description
Title / Description
Revision
Typical
Application
172929-DM-20S1
Coating System Data Sheet
Concrete
chemical
sumps
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 115 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Document
Number/Description
Title / Description
Revision
Typical
Application
81113-DM-0660
Coating System Data Sheet System 2314
Internal of
Circ Water
Pipe
Standard AWWA
C203 (not attached)
Hot applied coal tar enamel and tape applied per

AWWA C203
External of
Circ Water
Pipe and
Fire
Protection
Pipe

Not used.
09900.1.10 Submittals
A coating system submittal shall be provided to the Site Construction Manager and shall include:
Product data sheets.
Material safety data sheets (MSDS).
Surface preparation requirements and application instructions for each coating
system furnished under this section.
Ventilation, dehumidification or heating requirements.
Details concerning explosion proof lighting.
Coating termination and / or transition details for use at pipe supports, tank nozzles,
welded seams and other points of this nature.
Repair procedures for damaged areas and detected holidays.
Quality assurance / quality control plan.
Name of coating inspector and level of certification held.
A separate coating system submittal shall be developed and submitted for each variation or change in
a coating system or surface to be coated.
Protective coating and lining work shall be undertaken by applicators, including supervisors and
workers, qualified by commercial experience installing the types of materials specified. To satisfy this
experience requirement, the applicator shall be certified to SSPC-QP 1 or equivalent and shall submit
a work history demonstrating a record of performance of such applications.
When the proposed products will be in contact with potable water, the Contractor shall submit
certifications that the proposed systems are in compliance with ANSI/NSF 61.
The Contractor shall submit color cards for all coatings proposed for use, together with specifications
for review and color selection.
Approval of the coating system submittals must be provided by the Site Construction Manager prior to
the commencement of work.
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 116 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
09900.1.11 Quality Assurance

09900.1.11.1 Certification. Any variations from these specifications or the coating manufacturers
published recommendations shall be submitted and approved by the Site QA Manager.
09900.1.11.2 Manufacturers Services. The services provided by the coating manufacturer shall
include review of the project before surface preparation; certification of the applicator and the coating
materials to be used.
09900.1.12 Warranty
Not used.
09900.2 Products
09900.2.1 Materials
All coating materials shall be delivered to the job in original, unopened containers, with labels intact.
Coating materials shall be maintained during transportation, storage, mixing and application within the
temperature range required by the coating manufacturer. No adulterant, unauthorized thinner, or
other material not included in the coating formulation shall be added to the coating for any purpose.
All coatings shall conform to the air quality regulations applicable at the location of use. Coating
materials that cannot be guaranteed by the manufacturer to conform, whether or not specified by
product designation, shall not be used.
Coatings used in successive field coats shall be produced by the same manufacturer. The first field
coat over shop coated or previously coated surfaces shall cause no wrinkling, lifting, or other damage
to underlying coats.
09900.2.2 Approved Manufacturers
Except as otherwise acceptable to the Site QA Manager, coatings shall be manufactured, formulated,
and compounded by coating manufacturers named in the Coating System Data Sheets.
09900.3 Execution
09900.3.1 Surface Preparation
Coating work shall include the protection of surfaces not to be coated and surface preparation,
furnishing and applying materials, and other work incidental to coating that is required to properly
execute the work. All exposed surfaces of the equipment shall be coated as directed on the Coating
System Data Sheets. The remainder of the plant equipment will be coated under separate
specifications.
All surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry and shall meet the recommendations of the coating
manufacturer for surface preparation. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by using
techniques described in SSPC-SP 1 before mechanical cleaning is started.
Surfaces shall be free of cracks, pits, projections, or other imperfections that would interfere with the
formation of a smooth, unbroken coating film.
Freshly coated surfaces shall be protected from dust and other contaminants. The gloss on
previously coated surfaces shall be dulled if necessary for proper adhesion of topcoats.
When applying touchup coating or repairing previously coated surfaces, the surfaces to be coated
shall be cleaned as recommended by the coating manufacturer and the edges of the repaired area
shall be feathered by sanding or wire brushing to produce a smooth transition that will not be
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 117 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
noticeable after the coating is applied. All coatings made brittle or otherwise damaged by heat of
welding shall be completely removed.
The quality of compressed air shall be verified in accordance with ASTM D4285 prior to performing
abrasive blasting. The test will be carried out at the beginning of each shift and witnessed by the
coating inspector.
09900.3.1.1 Galvanized Surfaces. Galvanized surfaces shall be prepared for coating according to
the instructions of the coating manufacturer. Any chemical treatment of galvanized surfaces shall be
followed by thorough rinsing with clean water.
09900.3.1.2 Ferrous Metal Surfaces. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared for coating by using
one or more of the following cleaning procedures as specified: solvents (SSPC-SP1); hand tools
(SSPC-SP2); power tools (SSPC-SP3 or -SP11); abrasive blasting (SSPC-SP5, -SP6, -SP7, or SP10); or water jetting (-SP12). Oil and grease shall be completely removed in accordance with
SSPC-SP1 before beginning any other cleaning method. Surfaces of welds shall be scraped and
ground as necessary to remove all slag and weld spatter.
All cut or sheared edges shall be ground smooth to a 3 mm minimum radius for all material 6 mm
thickness and larger. For material thickness less than 6 mm all cut or sheared edges shall be ground
smooth to a radius equal to 1/2 the material thickness. Grinding of rolled edges on standard shapes
with a minimum radius of the 1.5 mm will not be required.
Unless specified in the Coating System Data Sheets, all ferrous metal surfaces shall have all welds
ground smooth and free of all defects in accordance with NACE Standard RP0178, Appendix C,
Designation D.
All blasting residue, waste, and accumulation shall be removed before coating application.
Cleaned surfaces shall be coated or lined with the specified coating, primer, or touchup coat within 6
hours of cleaning, or before rust bloom occurs. No blast cleaned surfaces shall stand overnight
before coating.
The surface preparation specified herein are minimums, and if the requirements printed in the coating
manufacturer's data sheets exceed the limits specified, the value printed on the data sheets shall
become the minimum requirement
09900.3.1.3 Concrete Surfaces. Concrete surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP
13. Concrete surfaces shall be prepared until they are acceptable to the coating manufacturer.
Surfaces shall be free of cracks, pits, projections, or other imperfections that would interfere with the
formation of a smooth, unbroken coating film. Concrete surfaces, including those with bug holes less
than 25 mm in any dimension, shall be prepared using an epoxy repair mortar or as recommended by
the coating manufacturer.
If any repairs to existing concrete are required, they shall be made as part of the surface preparation
in accordance with the concrete repair section.
New concrete shall be cured for at least 28 days before lining is applied and shall be ready to receive
the lining as determined by the coating manufacturer. Concrete surfaces shall be tested for capillary
moisture in the concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263. There shall be no capillary moisture
migration after 24 hours as determined by the test method.
Before the lining is applied, the surfaces shall be thoroughly washed or cleaned by air blasting to
remove all dust and residue.
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 118 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Adhesion testing shall be conducted as specified herein after the concrete surface has been prepared
and approved by the coating manufacturer. Adhesion strength test results shall exceed 2700 kPa or
a higher value if recommended by coating manufacturer.
All penetrations, i.e. anchor bolts, electrical conduit, etc., through concrete coating systems shall be
sealed with a chemically resistant caulking compound as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
09900.3.2 Mixing and Thinning
Coating shall be thoroughly mixed each time any is withdrawn from the container. Coating containers
shall be kept tightly closed except while coating is being withdrawn.
Coating shall be factory mixed to proper consistency and viscosity for hot weather application without
thinning. Thinning will be permitted only as necessary to obtain recommended coverage at lower
application temperatures. In no case shall the wet film thickness of applied coating be reduced, by
addition of coating thinner or otherwise, below the thickness recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Thinning shall be done in compliance with all applicable air quality regulations.
Uniform suspension of coating pigments shall be maintained during application.
Jobsite tinting will not be permitted.
09900.3.3 Application
Coating shall be applied in a neat manner that will produce an even film of uniform and proper
thickness, with finished surfaces free of runs, sags, ridges, laps, and brush marks. In no case shall
coating be applied at a rate of coverage greater than the maximum rate recommended by the coating
manufacturer.
A skid resistant additive shall be incorporated into the top layer of coating systems which are applied
to permanent walking surfaces.
Each layer of the coating system shall be of a visibly different color or shade from the preceding coat.
Coatings shall be factory tinted.
A minimum of 200 lux of illumination shall be provided for surfaces to be coated.
Ventilation in the work area shall be adequate to remove all particulates and solvent vapors. Where
natural ventilation is inadequate, a mechanical ventilation system shall be employed. The ventilation
system shall provide a clean air supply during all phases of coating operations.
Coating failures will not be accepted and shall be entirely removed down to the substrate and the
surface recoated. Failures include but are not limited to checking, cracking, teardrops, fat edges,
fisheyes, or delamination.
Coating materials shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations by
competent and experienced applicators.
09900.3.4 Protection of Surfaces
Throughout the work, proper dropcloths, masking tapes, and other protective measures shall be
provided to protect surfaces from accidental spraying, splattering, or spilling of coatings. Damage
resulting from coating operations shall be corrected and repaired. Coatings deposited on surfaces
not being coated shall immediately be removed.
The Contractor shall remove and reinstall, or provide adequate in-place protection for, valve and
equipment identification tags, gauges, installed hardware, accessories, lighting and electrical
components, factory finished materials, plumbing fixtures and fittings, and other materials that may
become splattered or damaged by coating materials.
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 119 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
09900.3.5 Environmental Conditions

Coatings shall not be applied, except under environmentally controlled conditions, during wet, damp,
or foggy weather, or when windblown dust, dirt, debris, or insects will collect on freshly applied
coating.
Do not install coating or lining material if substrate temperature is within 3o C of the dewpoint
temperature or if the relative humidity is greater than 95%.
Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures lower than the minimum temperature recommended by
the coating manufacturer, or to metal surfaces where conditions are likely to cause condensation,
regardless of the air temperature. When necessary for proper application, a temporary enclosure
shall be erected and the environment properly conditioned until the coating has fully cured.
Coatings shall not be applied at temperatures higher than the maximum temperature recommended
by the coating manufacturer. Where coatings are applied during periods of elevated ambient
temperatures, the Contractor shall ensure that proper application is performed including adherence to
all re-coat window requirements. Precautions shall be taken to reduce the temperature of the surface
application, especially for metal, at elevated temperatures above 38C including shading the
application area from direct sunlight, applying coating in the evening or at night, and ventilating the
area to reduce the humidity and temperature.
Concrete that is expelling air, or increasing in temperature, shall not be coated.
09900.3.6 Field Quality Control
The following inspection and testing shall be performed: visual inspection, surface profile, wet and dry
film thickness, spark testing, and adhesion testing. The Site QA Manager shall review all Contractor
testing documentation and shall also establish hold points indicating periodic on-site review of the
Contractors test procedures.
The Contractor shall provide daily documented atmospheric condition reports to the Site QA Manager
including temperature and humidity every four hours during application and temperature monitoring
during cure of the coating system.
Personnel performing or supervising the inspection of surface preparation, coating application and
quality control testing shall be qualified as a Certified Coating Inspector in accordance with the
requirements of NACE International or previously approved equivalent program.
09900.3.6.1 Surface Profile Testing. The surface profile for ferrous metal surfaces shall be
measured for compliance with the specified minimum profile in accordance with ASTM D4417. The
surface profile for concrete shall comply with SSPC-SP 13, Table 1, for severe service.
09900.3.6.2 Visual Inspection. The surface of the protective coatings shall be visually inspected.
09900.3.6.3 Film Thickness. Coating film thickness shall be verified by measuring the film
thickness of each coat as it is applied and the dry film thickness of the entire system. Dry film
thickness shall be measured in accordance with SSPC-PA 2. Wet film thickness shall be measured
with a gauge that will measure the wet film thickness within an accuracy of 13 m in accordance
with ASTM D4414.
09900.3.6.4 Spark Testing. Coatings shall be spark tested using an acceptable electrical spark
tester set at the recommended voltage. The Site QA Manager shall observe the spark testing and
shall verify the testing equipment is working properly before the spark testing of the coating is started.
The electrode movement shall be continuous and shall proceed in a systematic manner that will cover
110 percent of the coated surface.
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 120 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Spark testing for coatings on metal shall be done in accordance with ASTM D5162.
All detected holidays and pinholes shall be marked and repaired as recommended by the coating
manufacturer.
09900.3.6.5 Adhesion Testing. An adhesion test shall be conducted on a properly prepared and
coated steel or concrete surface that is acceptable to the Contractor and the Site QA Manager. The
test area shall be at least 2 square feet or larger to allow a minimum of three tests to be conducted.
The test area shall be coated with the specified system and cured as recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Pull-off strength adhesion tests of the coating shall be conducted in accordance with
ASTM D4541 using an Elcometer tensile adhesion tester. At least three adhesion tests shall be
conducted and the results averaged. Adhesion strength shall equal or exceed the minimum adhesion
strength recommended by the coating manufacturer and shall exceed the tensile strength of the
substrate.
If the coating fails the adhesion test, the cause of the failure shall be determined and corrected before
reconducting the test.
Source: 09900, 2011, v.2.1
Page 121 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
13110 - Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection

13110.1 General
Scope of supply shall include furnishing, installation, and testing of the cathodic protection equipment
as specified herein.
Not applicable.
Performance and design requirements for the equipment to be furnished under this section of these
specifications are as indicated herein.
Work
In Accordance With
Cathodic protection equipment
The applicable NACE International

Standards.
13110.1.5 Materials
Materials shall be as specified in Article 13110.2.
Not used.
Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Startup
Article 13110.3.2, Testing
Contractor

Not used.
Technical supplemental specifications that are applicable to the work covered under this technical
specification section are identified and included in Attachment 1.
13110.2 Products
13110.2.1 Galvanic Anodes
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Galvanic Anode Cathodic Protection
Page 122 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
13110.2.1.1 Packaged Magnesium Anodes. High potential magnesium anode material shall be
Grade M1C, UNS Alloy M15102, complying with ASTM B843. Anodes shall be furnished as a
packaged assembly. The packaged assembly shall consist of a permeable cloth bag containing the
anode, centered in and completely surrounded by compacted backfill.
The backfill shall have the following composition in percent by weight:
Material
Percent
Ground hydrated gypsum
75
Powdered bentonite
20
Anhydrous sodium sulfate
High potential magnesium anode shall be furnished with Type TW insulated, solid copper lead wire.
13110.2.1.2 Cast Zinc Anodes. Cast zinc anodes shall be Type I alloy complying with ASTM B418.
Anodes shall be constructed with two galvanized steel flat bars welded to a mild steel rodcore,
suitable for bolting onto a structure using two15 mm diameter threaded bolts. Cast zinc anodes shall
be model GA-TZB-100 as manufactured by Galvotec Alloys, Inc, Harvey, LA; or acceptable equal.
13110.2.2 Aboveground Test Stations
Test stations shall consist of a terminal block contained in a cast aluminum enclosure. Terminal
blocks shall include five nickel-plated marine brass terminals and one nickel-plated marine brass
jumper strap. The enclosure cover fastener shall be stainless steel. The enclosure shall have a
threaded hub suitable for connection to 50 mm rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit.
13110.2.3 Test Station Identification Tags
Test station identification tags shall be 50 mm width by 30 mm height by 1 mm Type 304 stainless
steel plate. One 2 mm diameter hole shall be drilled in each corner of the plate. Lettering shall be 5
mm square.
13110.2.4 Copper Sulfate Reference Electrodes
Reference electrodes shall be the saturated, gelled, copper-copper sulfate type. Reference
electrodes shall be furnished as a packaged assembly. Packaged reference electrodes shall be
furnished with Type HMWPE insulated, stranded copper lead wire.
13110.2.5 Exothermal Welding Materials
Welding charge formulation and equipment selection shall be appropriate for the size, shape, and
composition of the material being welded. Weld molds shall be supplied complete with appropriate
handles.
13110.2.6 Exothermal Weld Coating Repair Materials
Coating repair material shall be a preformed plastic sheath filled with an encapsulation compound.
13110.2.7 Compression Ring-Tongue Terminals
Compression ring-tongue terminals shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant copper, bronze, or
nickel-plated brass. Terminals shall be single hole, uninsulated, compression type.
13110.2.8 Cathodic Protection Cable
Cable Type CP shall be stranded copper cable with low density, high molecular weight polyethylene
insulation (HMWPE).
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Page 123 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
13110.2.9 Nondetectable Underground Marking Tape

Underground marking tape shall be a minimum 75 mm in width, red in color, with the following words
printed in black: "Caution - Electric Line Buried Below," or "Caution - Cathodic Protection Cable
Buried Below," or similar.
13110.2.10 Wire and Cable Markers
Markers for wire and cable circuits shall be an opaque nylon material consisting of a marker board,
nonreleasing holding device, and cable fastening tail.
13110.2.11 Marking Pens
Marking pen ink shall be suitable for marking on nylon and shall be black, permanent, and waterproof.
13110.2.12 Solder
Solder shall be 50/50 tin/lead solid wire with nonacid flux.
13110.2.13 Insulated Flange Kits
Insulated flange kits shall consist of the following components:
One 3 mm thick Type "E," full-faced insulating and sealing flange gasket containing a
precision tapered groove to accommodate the controlled compression of the sealing
element. The full-faced flange insulating gasket shall be 3 mm less in inside
diameter (ID) than the ID of the flange in which it is installed.
One 0.8 mm thick full length bolt insulating sleeve per flange bolt.
Two 3 mm thick insulating washers per flange bolt.
Two 3 mm thick zinc-plated steel backing washers per flange bolt. Steel backing
washer ID and outside diameter (OD) shall be identical to that of the insulating
washer.
Insulating material selection shall be based on the application as indicated below:
Fluid
Retainer
Seal
Washer
Washer
Air
G-10
Nitrile
Phenolic
Mylar
Carbon Dioxide
G-10
Nitrile
G-10
Mylar
Fuel Oil
G-10
Viton
G-10
Mylar
Hydrogen
G-10
Nitrile
G-10
Mylar
Nitrogen
Phenolic
Nitrile
Phenolic
Mylar
Water
G-10
Nitrile
G-10
Mylar
G-10 insulating sleeves and washers shall be provided for flange diameters greater than 600 mm or
ANSI class ratings greater than or equal to 600.
13110.2.14 Insulated Flange Identification Tags
Insulated flange identification tags shall be 90 mm width by 30 mm height by 1 mm Type 304
stainless steel plate. One 2 mm diameter hole shall be drilled in each corner of the plate. Lettering
shall be 5 mm square.
13110.2.15 Polyethylene Mesh
Polyethylene mesh shall be medium density polyethylene extruded into a diamond shaped pattern.
Polyethylene mesh shall be approximately 4 mm thick.
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Page 124 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
13110.2.16 Silver Brazing Materials

Silver brazing filler shall be AWS classification BAg-7 or BAg-36 per AWS SFA A5.8. Brazing flux
shall be chloride-free and water-washable, AWS classification FB3-A per AWS SFA A5.31.
13110.3 Execution
13110.3.1 Installation
All cathodically protected piping and piping components shall be installed free of foreign material and
construction debris.
The Contractor shall electrically isolate cathodically protected piping from pipe supports, concrete
reinforcing steel, structural steel, grounding conductors, interconnecting piping and equipment, and all
other plant items where contact with the protected pipe will create a conductive path to ground.
Prior to placement of concrete, the Contractor shall wrap all concrete encased carbon steel, stainless
steel, and copper piping with a single layer of polyethylene mesh to prevent contact with reinforcing
steel. Polyethylene mesh shall be held in place with plastic tape unless otherwise indicated on the
drawings.
13110.3.1.1 Packaged Anodes. Anodes associated with underground piping shall be installed as
indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
The minimum burial depth shall be such that the uppermost part of the anode is located beneath the
invert of the pipe being protected. Should geological conditions, such as solid rock, preclude
installation of the packaged anode in the prescribed manner, the anode shall be installed in a
horizontal position.
Caution shall be exercised to ensure that the permeable cloth backfill packaging remains intact.
13110.3.1.2 Wire and Cable. Installation of anode lead wires, pipe lead wires, reference electrode
lead wires, and all other cathodic protection wire and cable shall be in accordance with the drawings
and as specified herein.
Connection of lead wires to the pipe shall be as specified in the article titled Exothermal Weld
Connections. Connection of the lead wires in the test station terminal block shall be as specified in
the article titled Test Station Terminations.
Splices in pipe lead wire shall be subject to the approval of the Site QA Manager.
At all times, pipe lead wires shall be clearly identified with regard to the pipe with which they are
connected.
13110.3.1.3 Test Station Terminations. Wire terminations shall be installed on the test station
terminal block as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
A calibrated crimping tool shall be used to attach a compression ring-tongue terminal to the end of
each conductor. The compression terminal shall not release from the conductor when pulled or
twisted. In addition to crimping, solid conductors shall be soldered to the compression terminal.
Wire and cable markers shall be attached to each lead wire in the test station terminal block. Pipe
lead wire shall be identified by pipe diameter and service, as a minimum.
In the test station terminal block, remove and retain the solid brass jumper strap located between the
anode lead wire(s) and Pipe Lead Wire 1. All test station lead wires should be initially terminated on
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Page 125 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
individual lugs in the terminal block. Test station terminal block lugs should not be interconnected
until directed during performance of Underground Piping Cathodic Protection System Tests.
13110.3.1.4 Exothermal Weld Connections. Exothermal weld connections shall be used to attach
cathodic protection lead wire to protected ductile iron and steel structures where the minimum
structure wall thickness is 4 mm. Soldering and silver brazing shall be used to attach cathodic
protection lead wires to protected copper and stainless steel structures, respectively.
Exothermal weld connections shall be performed using weld molds, cable sleeves, and weld
cartridges sized in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
Completed welds shall be capable of withstanding moderate hammer blows. Porous or deformed
welds shall be rejected. Exothermal weld connections shall not be covered until inspected by the
Contractor. Following inspection, completed weld connections shall be covered with coating repair
material as shown on the drawings.
13110.3.1.5 Aboveground Test Stations. Test stations shall be installed in a manner and at the
locations indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
When a proposed test station location will interfere with the normal use of an area, the test station
shall be relocated to a nearby protected location.
13110.3.1.6 Copper Sulfate Reference Electrodes. Reference electrodes shall be installed in a
manner and at the locations indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
Reference electrodes shall be stored and maintained in a dry environment. Reference electrode
storage temperature shall be continuously maintained above 0 C.
Prior to installation, reference electrodes shall be activated by immersion in freshwater for a period of
time prescribed by the manufacturer.
13110.3.1.7 Insulated Flange Kits. Insulated flange kits shall be installed in a manner and at the
locations indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Unless otherwise indicated, all insulated
flange kits shall be installed above grade. Sufficient clearance shall be provided around the insulated
flange to allow for maintenance and testing.
Flange gasket seating surfaces shall be free from tool marks, scratches, pits, deposits, and other
defects. Stud tensioning shall be performed using a torque wrench or other tensioning device such
as a hydraulic wrench. Torque settings shall not exceed the maximum value specified by the
insulated flange kit manufacturer.
Insulated flange kits shall be installed as follows:
1.
Inspect the gasket kits. Verify that the material is as specified and provided
in a new and undamaged condition.
2.
Clean the bolting materials. Apply lubricant or antiseizing compound to all

threads required for engagement with nuts and nut facings.
3.
Align flange faces so that they are parallel and concentric with each other
within 0.3 mm without external loading or springing.
4.
Line up bolt holes by driving two tapered drift pins in opposite directions to
each other into two diametrically opposite bolt holes.
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Page 126 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
5.
Insert insulating sleeves into the bolt holes. If they do not slide in easily, the
flanges are not lined up properly. Do not force sleeves into bolt holes as
sleeve damage may result.
6.
Assemble the studs (or bolts) as follows:

a.
Run one nut on each stud so that two full threads are
showing beyond the nut.
b.
Slide a steel washer onto stud and insert into bolt hole. (If
the flange requires two sided insulation, add an insulating
washer after the steel washer.)
c.
From the opposite end of the stud, place an insulating

washer, a steel washer, and then a nut. Hand tighten.
7.
Torque studs to a maximum of 30 percent of the final torque value specified.

Replace the two drift pins with stud assemblies. Torque the remaining studs
to 30 percent of the final torque value in a star pattern sequence.
8.
Repeat steps in Procedure 7, increasing the torque to approximately 60

percent to 80 percent of the final torque value.
9.
Continue torquing all studs in the sequence using the specified torque setting
(100 percent) until there is no further rotation of nuts.
13110.3.1.8 Cast Zinc Anodes. Cast zinc anodes shall be installed as indicated on the drawings.
13110.3.2 Testing
After installation of all cathodic protection equipment is complete, field testing shall be performed to
evaluate and document the cathodic protection system performance. Insulated flanges shall not be
disassembled or reworked after final testing.
13110.3.2.1 Test Equipment.
200 mm saturated copper-copper sulfate solution portable reference electrode, M. C.
Miller Model RE7, available from the M. C. Miller Co. Inc., Ringwood, New Jersey; or
acceptable equal. The reference electrode copper rod shall be cleaned and the
reference electrode shall be charged with a saturated copper-sulfate solution within
30 days of test performance.
High input impedance dc voltmeter, Fluke Model 87 handheld multimeter available
from John Fluke Mfg. Co., Everett, Washington; or acceptable equal.
High frequency flange insulation tester, Gas Electronics Model 601 available from M.
C. Miller Co. Inc, Ringwood, New Jersey.
Miscellaneous flexible test leads as required.
13110.3.2.2 Test Procedures. Procedures for testing system components shall be as described
herein. Test data shall be recorded and submitted to the Site QA Manager.
Electrical isolation of cathodically protected piping is a prerequisite for performance of the cathodic
protection system. Electrical isolation of all mechanical and electrical connections to the cathodically
protected piping shall be completed prior to testing the cathodic protection system.
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Page 127 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Insulated flange testing shall be performed using the high frequency tester specified. Prior to testing,
calibrate and "zero" the insulation tester as recommended by the manufacturer. When properly
calibrated and ready to use, the instrument meter should be deflected to full scale.
Firm metal-to-metal contact should be established between each instrument probe and flange face
across the insulator being tested. The instrument meter should be observed. An effective insulator is
indicated if the instrument meter remains deflected to full scale. Any deflection less than full scale
indicates a shorted insulator.
Electrical insulation tests shall be performed at 150 mm intervals around the circumference of the
insulated flange. Failure of the insulation test at any location around the circumference shall qualify
as a failed insulator.
Failed insulators may result from deficient installation of the flange gasket or one or more of the
associated flange bolts. Defective components shall be identified and replaced.
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Page 128 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Underground Piping Cathodic Protection System Test Procedure

Testing shall be performed using a Fluke Model 87 handheld multimeter. Alligator clip type
multimeter lead wires shall be connected to the specified test station terminals. Personnel shall not
contact multimeter lead wires or test station terminals while measuring dc voltage and current values.
Test Procedures 1 through 6 shall be performed in sequence, as follows:
Tests 1 and 2 shall be performed to measure native pipe-to-soil potentials. These
tests shall be performed before any anodes are jumpered to pipe lead wires in the
field test stations.
Test 1: Set the multimeter to the dc volts (V) scale. Connect the
positive terminal (V ) multimeter test lead wire to the Pipe Lead
Wire 1 lug in the test station terminal block. Connect the negative
terminal (COM) multimeter test lead wire to the reference electrode
lead wire lug in the test station terminal block. Observe and record
the dc voltage and polarity (should be negative) displayed by the
multimeter.
multimeter.
In the test station terminal block, verify that the solid brass jumper strap located
between the anode lead wire(s) and Pipe Lead Wire 1 is removed. All test station
lead wires should now be terminated on individual lugs in the terminal block. Test
station terminal block lugs should not be interconnected.
positive terminal (V ) multimeter test lead wire to the anode lead
wire lug in the test station terminal block. Connect the negative
multimeter.
Test 4: Set the multimeter to the dc milliamperes (mA/A) scale.
Connect the positive terminal (mA A) multimeter test lead wire to
the Pipe Lead Wire 1 lug in the test station terminal block. Connect
the negative terminal (COM) multimeter test lead wire to the anode
dc milliamperes and polarity (should be positive) displayed by the
multimeter.
Test 5: Set the multimeter to the dc milliamperes (mA/A) scale.
Connect the positive terminal (mA A) multimeter test lead wire to
the Pipe Lead Wire 2 lug in the test station terminal block. Connect
the negative terminal (COM) multimeter test lead wire to the anode
dc milliamperes and polarity (should be positive) displayed by the
multimeter.
After completion of Test 5, replace the solid brass jumper strap between the anode
lead wire(s) and Pipe Lead Wire 1.
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Page 129 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

the dc voltage and polarity (should be less than -0.850 volt)
displayed by the multimeter.
Test
Station
Number
Below
Grade
Pipeline
Code
Test 1
Native
PTS
Potential,
Pipe Lead
Wire 1
(Volts)
Source: 13110, 2009, v.1.2
Test 2
Native
PTS
Potential,
Pipe Lead
Wire 2
(Volts)
Test 3
Anode
Open
Circuit
Potential
(Volts)
Test 4
Anode
Current
Output,
Pipe Lead
Wire 1
(mA)
Test 5
Anode
Current
Output,
Pipe Lead
Wire 2
(mA)
Test 6
Protected
PTS
Potential,
Pipe Lead
Wire 2 (Volts)
CP
System
No.
Page 130 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
13902 - Fire Protection Systems

13902.1 General
This section covers the design, shop fabrication, and installation requirements for the fire hydrants.
Fire protection equipment shall be arranged to appropriately protect the plant and equipment in the
event of fire.
It is not the intention to specify herein all details of design and construction. The Contractor shall
ensure that the equipment has been designed, fabricated, and erected in accordance with all
engineering codes, standards, and governmental regulations applicable to the specified service.
The Contractor shall have full responsibility for compliance with the requirements of these
specifications. Review and/or approval of drawings, data, or specifications by the Purchaser with
regard to general design and controlling dimensions does not constitute acceptance of any designs,
materials, or equipment that will not fulfill the functional or performance requirements established
herein.
In case of a conflict within the technical requirements, the following hierarchy shall apply:
(1) Mandatory governmental regulations and codes.
(2) Purchaser-specified requirements provided on the data sheets.
(3) Requirements provided in the technical attachments.
(4) Requirements provided in the technical specifications.
(5) Requirements provided in Attachment 1.
(6) Referenced industry codes and standards and material specifications.
The Contractor shall furnish complete fire hydrant assemblies including hydrants, cast iron isolation
valves, all interconnecting piping, mechanical joints, flanges, nuts, bolts and gaskets.
Not applicable.
13902.1.3 Not Used
edition and addenda in effect at the date of this document shall apply:
Work
In Accordance With
Fire detection system

equipment components
NFPA, FM*, UL*, ANSI,

ASME, ASTM, NEMA, IEEE,
AWS, AWWA, and TCVN
Source: 13902, 2009, v.1.4
Fire Protection Systems
Page 131 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Work
In Accordance With
Fire hydrants
NFPA 24, 291, FM, UL

Standard 246, TCVN 63791998, TCVN 5739-1993,
TCVN 2622-1995
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
*Equipment supplied shall be listed by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc. (UL) or shall be included in the Approval
Guide as published by Factory Mutual (FM) Engineering.
Equipment shall be considered as FM-approved only if it
conforms to the characteristics and limitations of the
individual component approvals and if those components
are used in the service intended by the Approval Guide.
Any conflict between referenced codes or standards, or between the standards and these
specifications, shall be referred immediately to the Purchaser who shall determine which standard or
specification requirements shall govern.
13902.1.5 Materials
Component
Material

For the following components (if any), the manufacturers listed below provide examples of the quality
of workmanship required by these specifications. Components by nonlisted manufactures must equal
Component
Manufacturer
Fire Hydrants
American Darling Company, Mueller

Company, Waterous Company

Tests
In Accordance
With
Conducted
By
Entire fire protection

system
NFPA 13, 15 and

25, TCVN 63791998, TCVN 57391993, TCVN26221995 and applicable
building code
Contractor

Not used.
Source: 13902, 2009, v.1.4
Page 132 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
13902.2 Products
13902.2.1 Not Used
13902.2.2 Not Used
13902.2.3 Not Used
13902.2.4 Not Used
13902.2.5 Not Used
13902.2.6 Fire Equipment
13902.2.6.1 Scope. The Subcontractor shall furnish the following items complete as specified and in
accordance with the specifications and documents:
See Article 13902.1.1.
13902.2.6.2 Engineering Data. Certified outline drawings of fire hydrant assemblies
including dimensional data shall be submitted for review.
13902.2.6.3 Code Requirements. Fire hydrants and valves shall be FM-approved. If FM approval
is not available, then UL-listed equipment shall be provided.
13902.2.6.4 Fire Hydrants. Hydrants shall be supplied for the protection of facility buildings and
equipment. Fire hydrants shall be manufactured by Waterous Company, Mueller Company, or
equivalent. The quantity of hydrants required shall be as indicated on the drawings.
13902.2.6.4.1 Type. The hydrants shall be 125 or 130 mm dry barrel compression type. Each
hydrant shall be equipped with an automatic drain to keep the barrel dry when the compression valve
is closed. The compression valve shall open with the counterclockwise turning of the operating nut.
The operating nut shall be a 30 mm pentagon, measured from point to opposite flat.
The opening between the operating nut and the top of the bonnet shall be protected from water and
dirt by skirting the operating nut, installing a seal ring, or by other acceptable means.
13902.2.6.4.2 Design. The hydrants shall be designed for a working pressure of 12 bar and a
hydrostatic pressure of 24 bar. The stem seal shall be of the O-ring type.
13902.2.6.4.3 Connections. Hydrants shall be furnished with a 150 mm, ANSI Class 125 flange
inlet connection. Outlet connections shall consist of two 65 mm hose nozzles and valves and one
100 mm pumper nozzle and valve. Outlet connection threads shall be in accordance with NT.
13902.2.6.4.4 Painting. The fire hydrants shall be shop finish painted. The shop primer and finish
paint shall be the manufacturer's standard suitable for the soil conditions. The color of the above
grade portions of the fire hydrants shall be OSHA Safety Red.
13902.2.6.4.5 Valves. The isolation valves used must meet the requirements of Section 15270.
13902.3 Execution
Erection and installation of fire protection system equipment and piping shall be in accordance with
the requirements of the environmental criteria in the front end sections of this document.
Source: 13902, 2009, v.1.4
Page 133 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
SKETCH FIRE PROTECTION INTERFACE

LOCATION OF SMOKE DETECTOR
DETERMINED BY THE HV CONTRACTOR.
SMOKE DETECTOR FURNISHED BY THE
FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR AND
INSTALLED BY THE HVAC CONTRACTOR
SMOKE
DETECTOR
(SDT)
FIRE PROTECTION PANEL,

RACEWAY, WIRE & CONDUIT
FURNISHED, INSTALLED AND
TERMINATED BY THE FIRE
PROTECTION CONTRACTOR
FIRE
PROTECTION
PANEL
J-Box
OTHER SIGNALS (EG. FROM
AREA DETECTORS)
FURNISHED AND INSTALLED
BY THE FIRE PROTECTION
CONTRACTOR
FURNISHED AND INSTALLED

BY THE FIRE PROTECTION
CONTRACTOR
NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT,
WIRE, CONDUIT, RACEWAY &
JUNCTION BOX FURNISHED,
INSTALLED AND TERMINATED BY
FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR
NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT(S).
CONTACT RATING:
2A@125VDC; 10A@110VAC.
WIRE, RACEWAY & CONDUIT
TO THE J-BOX FURNISHED,
INSTALLED AND TERMINATED
BY THE HVAC CONTRACTOR
3 FEET (MAX)
PER NFPA 72
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
PANEL (TCPL)
HVAC
EQUIPMENT
FURNISHED AND
INSTALLED BY THE
HVAC CONTRACTOR
WIRE, RACEWAY & CONDUIT
FROM THE TCPL TO THE HVAC
EQUIPMENT FURNISHED,
INSTALLED AND TERMINATED
BY THE HVAC CONTRACTOR
HVAC EQUIPMENT FURNISHED
AND INSTALLED BY THE HVAC
CONTRACTOR
Source: 13902, 2009, v.1.4
Page 134 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

15225 - General Service Pipe

15225.1 General
Scope of supply shall include furnishing materials for non-boiler external piping systems as indicated
in the attachments listed in Article 15225.1.8. Materials shall include straight lengths of pipe, fittings,
flanges, and unions. Gaskets and flange bolting materials shall be furnished if indicated in the
attachments. Special welding adapters shall be furnished if indicated in the attachments.
If the general service pipe to be furnished under this specification is part of the scope of the work
under a larger procurement package to be designed and furnished by the Contractor, the scope of
piping and accessories to be furnished will be determined by Contractor's overall design.
15225.1.1.1 Pipeline List. The Pipeline List specifies the operating and design conditions and types
of pipe to be used with each piping system. The Pipeline List designates the pipeline identification
code; line description; operating, design, and test pressures and temperatures; pipe material, nominal
sizes, and corresponding schedule or wall thickness; valve class rating, end preparation
requirements, and material; insulation class; remarks; and special features.
15225.1.1.2 Not Used.
15225.1.1.3 Piping Isometric Drawings. Piping isometric drawings, if included, indicate the routing
of the piping systems for which materials are to be furnished under this Contract. The Contractor
shall use the isometric drawings to determine the quantities of straight lengths of piping, fittings,
flanges, gaskets, bolting, etc., required for each system.
15225.1.1.4 Plan and Section Drawings. Plan and section drawings, if included, indicate the
routing of piping for which materials are to be furnished under this Contract. The Contractor shall use
the plan and section drawings to determine the quantities of straight lengths of piping, fittings,
flanges, gaskets, bolting, etc., to be furnished for each section of pipeline.
15225.1.1.5 Piping and Instrument Diagrams/Flow Diagrams. Piping and instrument diagrams or
flow diagrams, if included, indicate the materials and line sizes of piping systems for which materials
are to be furnished under this Contract.
15525.1.1.6 Additional Scope.
Welding rod and other associated consumables for welded joint
piping systems furnished
Yes
Solvent cement and other associated consumables for solvent

cement joint piping systems furnished
Yes
Polyethylene sleeve material for field wrap of ductile iron pipe

furnished
Yes
Special tools required for erecting the furnished plastic piping

materials
Yes

Items furnished by others and not in this scope of supply include the following:
Instrument piping and all instruments except as otherwise indicated.
Gaskets and bolting materials unless otherwise indicated on the attachments.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
General Service Pipe
Page 135 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Pipe supports.
Piping insulation.
Performance and design requirements for the general service pipe to be furnished under this section
of these specifications are as follows:
Acceptable Types of Pipe
Steel plate piping of the seam welded
type
Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe
shall be
Allowed
Filament wound type
Coatings
Shop coatings for piping that will be
installed underground
AWWA C203 coating system
required for these piping
systems
As indicated on pipeline list

systems

systems

systems

systems
Dielectric bonded coating system

required for the following piping systems:
"As indicated on pipeline list"
____________________
In accordance with Coating System Data

Sheets:
____________________
Dual side extruded butyl-polyethylene

coating system required for the following
piping systems:
____________________

Sheets:
____________________
Protective coatings for pipe interiors of

the following piping systems:
____________________

Sheets:
____________________
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 136 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Work
In Accordance With
Materials for piping and application of

piping materials
The most current edition of the ASME

Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1, Power
Piping, including all addenda thereto
Sizes, schedule numbers, and

dimensions of carbon steel and alloy
steel pipe, and stainless steel pipe
schedules not covered by ANSI B36.19M
ANSI/ASME B36.10M
Sizes and dimensions of stainless steel

pipe designated as Schedule 5S, 10S,
40S, or 80S
ANSI/ASME B36.19M
Wall thickness tolerances for carbon

steel and alloy steel pipe
ASTM A530
Manufacturing standard for mechanical

joint and push-on joint ductile iron pipe
Manufacturing standard for flanged
ductile iron pipe
Polyethylene tubes for protection of

ductile iron pipe that will be installed
underground
Cement linings for ductile iron pipe
Manufacturing standards for plastic lined

pipe and fittings
Polypropylene (PP) lining
ASTM F492
Polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF)

lining
ASTM F491
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
lining
ASTM F423
Manufacturing standard for polyvinyl

chloride (PVC) pipe
ASTM D1785
Manufacturing standard for chlorinated

polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe
ASTM F441 (Schedules 40 and 80) or

ASTM F442 (SDR and PR)
High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe
ASTM F714
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 137 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Work
In Accordance With
Butt weld fitting manufacturing standard
ANSI/ASME B16.9 and

ANSI/ASME B16.28
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Socket-weld and threaded forged steel

fittings manufacturing standard and
minimum pressure class ratings
ANSI/ASME B16.11
Carbon steel flanged fittings
ANSI B16.5
Cast iron fittings for use with plastic lined

or rubber lined pipe
ANSI B16.1, Class 125
Ductile iron fittings for use with plastic

lined or rubber lined pipe
Welding adapters
Paragraph 104.3 of ANSI/ASME B31.1
Manufacturing standard for cast iron

fittings for use with lined steel pipe
ANSI B16.1
Manufacturing standard for ductile iron

fittings for use with lined steel pipe
Manufacturing standard for cast iron and

ductile iron flanged fittings
Manufacturing standards for mechanical

joint and push-on joint ductile iron and
cast iron fittings
ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 and

Petroleum asphaltic coatings for cast iron

and ductile iron pipe fittings
Cement linings for cast iron and ductile

iron pipe fittings
PVC fittings

corresponding to the pipe schedule with
which they will be used
CPVC fittings
ASTM F438 or ASTM F439 corresponding

to the pipe schedule with which they will be
used
Socket weld fittings for use with stainless

steel tubing
ANSI B16.11
Braze joint fittings for use with copper

tubing
ANSI B16.22
Steel flange construction requirements
ANSI/ASME B16.5
Cast iron and ductile iron flange

construction requirements
Compressed fiber gaskets and rubber

gaskets
ANSI B16.21
Ring joint gaskets
ANSI B16.20
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 138 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Work
In Accordance With
Flange bolting requirements - alloy steel

bolting
ANSI/ASME B16.5
Flange bolting requirements - carbon

steel bolting
ANSI B16.1
Carbon steel bolting dimensional

standards
ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI/ASME B18.2.2
Cleaning interior surface of carbon steel

pipe
PFI Standard ES-5, Articles 4.2.1 and

4.2.2
Abrasive shot blast cleaning
PFI Standard ES-29 (sand or silica bearing

blasting materials are not allowed)
Piping and materials used for potable

water service
NSF 61
15225.1.5 Materials
Component
Material
Steel pipe
Carbon steel
ASTM A106 Grades A, B, C; ASTM A53

Type 5 Grades A or B; ASTM A53 Type E
Grade B; ASTM A134 Grades A283 A, B,
C, D and A285 A, B, C; API 5L Grade B
seamless, Schedule 80 minimum for 50
mmand smaller, or as indicated on
attachment(s)
Nickel alloy steel
ASTM B464-UNS 08020
Other alloy steel
As indicated on attachment(s)
Stainless steel
304 stainless steel
ASTM A312, Type 304 or 304L,

Schedule 40S minimum for 50 mmand
smaller, or as specified on attachment(s)
ASTM A312, Type 304, Schedule 5S for
50 mmand smaller, for Victaulic PressFit
pipe only
316 stainless steel
ASTM A312, Type 316 or 316L,

Schedule 40S minimum for 50 mmand
smaller, or as specified on attachment(s)
ASTM A312, Type 316/316L, Schedule 5S
for50 mm and smaller, for Victaulic
PressFit pipe only
Ductile iron pipe push-on joint gaskets
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Neoprene or other synthetic rubber.

Natural rubber will not be acceptable.
Page 139 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Component
Material
Steel pipe to be lined with PP, PVDF,

PTFE, or rubber
ASTM A53 for pipe sizes greater than 200

mm; ASTM A587 for pipe sizes 200
mmand smaller
PP lining material
ASTM D2146
PVDF lining material
ASTM D3222
PTFE lining material
ASTM D1457
Rubber lining material
Synthetic rubber which does not contain

polyisoprene or other substances subject
to biological attack
PVC pipe
ASTM D1785, Cell Class 12454-B
HDPE pipe
ASTM D3350, with a cell classification of

345434C
Copper tubing
Oxygen free copper, UNS No. C10800 or

phosphorus deoxidized copper,
UNS No. C12200
Copper tubing for use with flareless bite

type fittings
ASTM B75
Copper tubing for use with braze joint

fittings
ASTM B88, Type K
Stainless steel tubing
ASTM A213, fully annealed Type 316 with

carbon content greater than 0.04 percent
Cast iron fittings for use with plastic lined

or rubber lined steel pipe
ASTM A126, Class A or B, lined with lining

material equivalent to that of the pipe

lined or rubber lined steel pipe
ASTM A395, lined with lining material

equivalent to that of the pipe
Carbon steel flange material standards,

ANSI Pressure Classes 150 and 300
ASTM A181/A181M or
ASTM A105/A105M

ANSI Pressure Class 600 and higher
ASTM A105/A105M
Chromium alloy and stainless steel

flange material standards (all ANSI
pressure classes)
ASTM A182/A182M
Carbon and alloy steel butt weld fitting

material standards
ASTM A234/A234M
Stainless steel butt weld fitting material

standards
ASTM A403/A403M
Alloy steel bolting materials

Studs
ASTM A193/A193M Grade B7
Nuts
ASTM A194/A194M Grade 2H
Carbon steel bolting materials
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
ASTM A307 Grade B, ASTM A563 Grade

A heavy hex nuts
Page 140 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Component
Material
All bolting plating (applies to alloy and

carbon steel bolting)
Cadmium plating in accordance with

ASTM B766; electrodeposited Zn-Ni with
12-15 percent nickel per AMS 2417 Type
2; alkaline Zn-Ni with 12-15 percent nickel;
or approved alternate or mechanically
deposited zinc coating in accordance with
ASTM A153
Stainless steel Victaulic PressFit fittings

material standards
ASTM A312, Type 304/316/316L for

50 mmand smaller

must equal or exceed the performance of those listed:
Component
Manufacturer
PP lined, PVDF lined, and PTFE lined

pipe and fittings
Dow Chemical Company

Resistoflex Corporation
Peabody Dore
Rubber lined pipe and fittings
Dow Chemical Company
FRP pipe and fittings

Centrifugally cast
Fibercast Company - Fibercast
Filament wound
Ameron Corrosion Control Division Bondstrand

Reinforced Plastics Systems Inc. - ABCO
Plastics Division
Smith Fiberglass Products Inc.
Fibercast Company - Fibercast
HDPE pipe and fittings

Factory Mutual (FM) approved
Phillips Petroleum Company - Driscopipe

1000 FM Class 200
Amsted Industries - Plexco
EHMW - Class 200 - FM
Bluestripe - Class 200 - FM
Redstripe - Class 200 - FM
Poly Systems Incorporated,
KWH Class 200
Non-FM applications
Phillips Petroleum Company - Driscopipe

1000
Amsted Industries - Plexco PE 3408
Poly Systems Incorporated, KWH Sclairpipe
Nickel alloy steel pipe
Carpenter Steel Company - Carpenter

20Cb-3 pipe
Tubing fittings
Crawford Swagelok
Parker Hannifin
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 141 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Component
Manufacturer
Integrally reinforced forged branch outlet

fittings
Bonney Forge
WFI
Compressed fiber gaskets
Richard Klinger, Inc. - Klingersil

Garlock, Inc. - Blue-Gard
Spiral wound gaskets
Flexitallic Gasket Company

Garlock
Spiral wound gasket filler
Flexitallic Gasket Company - Flexite Super

Garlock
Cloth inserted rubber gaskets
Manville
Stainless steel pressed fit fittings and

pipe
Victaulic - PressFit system
Abrasive blast cleaning media
Ervin Industries, AMASTEEL Cast Steel

Abrasives

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Testing of mechanical
joint and push-on joint
ductile iron pipe
Supplier
Hydrotests of piping
components, except as
provided for in the
above referenced
standard for ductile iron
pipe, are not required as
part of the piping
material supply, but may
be required as part of
piping erection Work if
included in this
Contract.
N/A
N/A
Radiographic inspection
of all butt weld joints
(field and shop) for
above and below grade
fire protection piping.
ASME B31.1
Contractor

Technical attachments relevant to the work under this section are listed in Section 01500.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 142 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15225.2 Products
15225.2.1 Piping Material Requirements
All pipe shall be in accordance with the applicable codes and standards designated in
Article 15225.1.4 and the attachments thereto. Except as otherwise specified, schedule numbers,
sizes, and dimensions of piping shall conform to the applicable standards specified in
Article 15225.1.4.
Material substitutions, except as specified on the attachments listed in Article 15225.1.8, shall not be
made without written approval by the Purchaser.
15225.2.1.1 Steel Pipe. Carbon steel and alloy steel pipe shall be ungalvanized seamless type
unless otherwise specified.
Steel plate piping, where allowed by these specifications, shall be of the straight seam welded type
unless otherwise specified.
Only certified/approved Pressfit pipe shall be used with Victaulic Pressfit Type 304/316/316L stainless
steel fittings. Pipe shall be approved Pressfit, Type 316/316L stainless steel pipe, which carries the
label "Victaulic Pressfit Pipe Certified For Use With Pressfit Products" or approved Vic-Press
304, Type 304 stainless steel pipe, which carries the label "Victaulic Vic-Press 304 Pipe Certified
For Use With Vic-Press 304 Products." Piping shall conform to the standards referenced in
Article 15225.1.4.
15225.2.1.2 Ductile Iron Pipe. Ductile iron pipe shall be of the mechanical joint or restrained pushon joint type as indicated on the attachments listed in Article 15225.1.8. Unless otherwise specified,
interior surfaces of ductile iron pipe shall be cement lined.
Unless otherwise specified, the exterior surface of all ductile iron pipe shall be coated before
shipment with a bituminous material.
Ductile iron piping systems shall be provided with restrained mechanical joints.
Where specified on the attachments listed in Article 15225.1.8, polyethylene tubes shall be furnished
by the Contractor as required to allow field wrapping of buried ductile iron pipe in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 Method A.
15225.2.1.3 Pipe Lined with Plastic or Rubber. Pipe to be lined with plastic or rubber shall be
steel pipe of the material specified in Article 15225.1.5 and of the schedule either specified in the
attachment(s) or as required by Contractor's overall design. Lined pipe shall have flanged
connections, an applied liner of the specified material, and molded raised face joints. Flanges shall
be Class 150 forged steel flat faced slip-on or socket-weld type, or Class 150 ductile iron flat faced.
Plastic lining materials shall be as specified in Article15225.1.5. The Contractor shall submit
information on rubber lining materials and rubber lining application methods for the Purchaser's
acceptance.
Lined pipe shall be shop fabricated and lined.
15225.2.1.4 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe. When Article 15225.1.3 indicates that it is the
Contractor's choice whether to furnish filament wound type FRP pipe or centrifugally cast type FRP
pipe, the following Bondstrand/Fibercast/Smith offerings are considered by the Purchaser to be
equally acceptable:
Bondstrand 2000 - Fibercast Centricast RB-1520 - Smith Green Thread.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 143 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Bondstrand 4000 - Fibercast Centricast Plus RB-2530 - Smith Green Thread.

Bondstrand 5000 - Fibercast Centricast Plus CL-2030 - Smith Chem Thread.
If the Contractor proposes to furnish FRP pipe products other than the ones listed above, the
Contractor shall submit a list of proposed products for specific applications for the Purchaser's
acceptance.
FRP pipe which will be exposed to sunlight or so specified in the attachment(s) shall be ultraviolet ray
resistant (pigments are acceptable).
15225.2.1.5 High Density Polyethylene Pipe. HDPE pipe shall be FM Approved Class 200 for fire
protection service and shall be as specified in the attachment(s) by standard dimension ratio (SDR)
for all other services or as required by Contractor's overall design.
15225.2.1.6 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. PVC pipe shall be of the schedule number and type specified
in the attachment(s) or as required by Contractor's overall design.
15225.2.1.7 Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe. CPVC pipe shall be of the schedule number and
type specified in the attachment(s) or as required by the Contractor's overall design.
15225.2.2 Tubing
Tubing for instrument service and control air service shall be in accordance with the Supplemental
Specifications in Attachment 1.
Copper tubing 20 mm and smaller for use with flareless grip type tubing fittings shall be light drawn
temper tubing conforming to the material specification indicated in Article 15225.1.5. All light drawn
copper tubing smaller than 20 mm for use in instrument air service shall be shipped to the jobsite in
coils of at least 50 foot (15 m) length and shall be dehydrated and sealed.
Copper tubing 25 mm and larger, and short instrument drop runs of 20 mm and 1/2 inch (12 mm)
tubing, for use with braze joint fittings, shall conform to the material specification in Article 15225.1.5.
The tubing shall be in lengths of at least 3 m and shall be capped at both ends.
Copper tubing shall conform to the material specifications included in Article 15225.1.5. Oxygen
bearing tough pitch copper tubing shall not be substituted.
Stainless steel tubing shall conform to the material specification indicated in Article 15225.1.5.
Stainless steel tubing for use with tubing fittings shall not exceed Rockwell B80 hardness.
Wall thickness for tubing 20 mm and smaller shall not be less than the following. The thicknesses
indicated are the minimum acceptable:
Wall Thickness, mm
Outside Diameter of Tubing, in. (mm)
Copper, ASTM B75
Stainless Steel
0.762
0.889
10
1.245
1.651
12
1.651
1.651
16
2.108
2.413
20
2.769
2.769
Wall thickness of Type K copper tubing shall be in accordance with ASTM B88.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 144 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15225.2.3 Fittings
If a quantity list is included as a part of this specification, fittings shall be constructed of materials
indicated on the list. If the Contractor determines that the fittings are to be furnished based on pipe
routing and piping system design conditions, the materials for pipe fittings shall be equivalent to the
material of the pipe with which they are used, except that plastic or rubber lined cast iron or ductile
iron fittings shall be used with plastic or rubber lined steel pipe, as indicated on the attachment(s).
15225.2.3.1 Steel Fittings. Unless otherwise indicated on the attachment(s), steel fittings 65 mm
and larger shall be butt welding type and steel fittings 50 mm and smaller shall be socket welding
type.
Butt Welding Fittings. Butt welding fitting wall thicknesses shall be equal to the pipe wall thickness
with which they are used. Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with the applicable standards
listed in Article 15225.1.4.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, elbows shall be of the long radius type and conform to
the applicable standards listed in Article 15225.1.4.
Forged Steel Fittings - Socket-Welded and Threaded. Forged steel fittings shall be used for
socket-welded and threaded connections. Socket-welded and threaded fittings shall conform to the
applicable standards listed in Article 15225.1.4. Metal thicknesses of fittings shall be adequate to
provide actual bursting strengths equal to or greater than those of the pipe with which they are to be
used.
Minimum pressure class rating of socket-welded and threaded fittings shall be in accordance with the
applicable standard listed in Article 15225.1.4.
Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings. Specially designed integrally reinforced
forged branch outlet fittings shall be furnished if so indicated on the attachment(s).
For piping systems designed and routed by the Contractor, specially designed integrally reinforced
forged branch outlet fittings (weldolets or sweepolets) may be furnished in lieu of reducing outlet tees
when the main run pipe wall thickness does not exceed 19.1 mm. Unless otherwise specified, all
branch connections 50 mm and smaller shall be made with specially reinforced welding adapters,
sockolets (SOL), or threadolets (TOL). These adapters shall be integrally reinforced forged branch
outlet fittings.
Integrally reinforced forged branch outlet fittings shall be manufactured by a manufacturer listed in
Article 15225.1.6.
Stainless Steel Pressed Fittings. Stainless steel pressed fittings for 50 mm and smaller diameter
piping shall conform to the standards listed in Article 15225.1.4 and Article 15225.1.5.
O-rings for pressed fittings shall be molded of synthetic rubber. EPDM shall be used for potable
water systems. Nitrile shall be used for air and service water systems.
15225.2.3.2 Plastic or Rubber Lined Ductile Iron Fittings. Ductile iron fittings for use with lined
steel pipe shall be flanged fittings. The lining material shall be the same as that specified for the pipe.
15225.2.3.3 Plastic Lined Piping System Spacers. PP spacers shall be used as recommended by
the manufacturer. An adequate supply of extra PP spacers shall be supplied to compensate for
normal fabrication and erection tolerances.
15225.2.3.4 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Fittings. Fittings for use with FRP pipe shall have
cementing type joints.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 145 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15225.2.3.5 High Density Polyethylene Fittings. Fittings for HDPE piping systems shall have
pressure ratings equivalent to the straight pipe sections with which they will be used. Fittings shall be
of the molded or mitered type as indicated on the drawings. If not indicated on drawings, fittings shall
be molded type unless otherwise accepted by the Engineer. Fittings shall be of the butt fusion weld,
socket fusion weld, or saddle type as recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the point of
application within the system.
15225.2.3.6 Polyvinyl Chloride Fittings. PVC pipe fittings shall have socket ends with internal
shoulders designed for solvent cementing and shall conform to the standards referenced in
Article 15225.1.4.
15225.2.3.7 Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride Fittings. CPVC pipe fittings shall have socket ends
with internal shoulders designed for solvent cementing and shall conform to the standards referenced
in Article 15225.1.4.
15225.2.3.8 Ductile Iron Fittings. Fittings shall conform to the standards listed in Article 15225.1.4.
Except as otherwise specified, interior surfaces of ductile iron pipe fittings shall be cement lined.
Except as otherwise specified, the exterior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe fittings shall be coated with
a bituminous material.
15225.2.3.9 Tubing Fittings. Brass fittings shall be used with ASTM B75 copper tubing and shall be
of the flareless grip type. Braze joint fittings shall be used with ASTM B88 Type K copper tubing and
shall be wrought oxygen free or phosphorus deoxidized copper, bronze, or brass.
Stainless steel fittings shall be used with stainless steel tubing. Fittings for use with stainless steel
tubing in sizes smaller than 20 mm shall be of the flareless grip type, and fittings for use with tubing in
sizes 20 mm and larger shall be socket-weld type. Fitting material and bursting strength shall be
equivalent to the tubing with which they are used.
15225.2.4 Flanges
Flanges shall conform to applicable standards indicated in Article 15225.1.4. Unless otherwise
specified, flanges shall be as follows:
For the case where the Contractor determines flanges to be furnished based on
attached drawings or based on the Contractor's overall design, flanges mating with
flanges on piping, valves, and equipment shall be of sizes, drillings, and facings that
match all connecting flanges.
Flange class ratings shall be adequate to meet the design pressure and temperature
specified in the attachment(s) for the piping with which they are used.
Flange materials shall be equivalent to the pipe with which they are used.
15225.2.4.1 Steel Flanges. All steel flanges 65 mm and larger shall be of the weld neck type and all
steel flanges 50 mm and smaller shall be of the socket type-except as indicated on the attachment(s).
Steel flanges shall have raised face flange preparation-except as specified otherwise herein. Flat
face flanges shall be used to mate with cast iron, ductile iron, FRP, PVC, CPVC, and plastic or rubber
lined flanges.
All steel flanges shall conform to the design and manufacturing standards and the material
specifications indicated in Article 15225.1.5.
15225.2.4.2 Not Used.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 146 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15225.2.5 Gaskets
Gaskets shall be furnished if so indicated on the attachment(s).
Unless otherwise specified, compressed fiber gaskets shall be used with flat face flanges and slip-on
raised face flanges. Spiral wound gaskets shall be used with all raised face flanges other than slip-on
flanges. Gaskets are not required for lined pipe-to-lined pipe connections unless otherwise
recommended by the manufacturer. Gaskets containing asbestos are not acceptable.
15225.2.5.1 Compressed Fiber Gaskets. Compressed fiber gasket materials shall be suitable for a
maximum working pressure of 4.1 MPa and a maximum working temperature of 400 C. Gaskets
shall be dimensioned to suit the contact facing. They shall be full faced for flat face flanges and shall
extend to the inside edge of the bolt holes on raised face flanges. Gaskets for plain finished surfaces
shall be not less than 1.6 mm thick and for serrated surfaces shall be not less than 2.4 mm thick.
15225.2.5.2 Spiral Wound Gaskets. Spiral wound gaskets shall be constructed of a continuous
stainless steel ribbon wound into a spiral with nonasbestos filler between adjacent coils. The gasket
shall be inserted into a steel gauge ring whose outside diameter shall fit inside the flange bolts
properly positioning the gasket. The gauge ring shall serve to limit the compression of the gasket to
the proper value. Compressed gasket thickness shall be 3.302 mm 0.127 mm.
15225.2.5.3 Rubber Gaskets. Rubber gasket materials shall be cloth inserted sheet rubber. They
shall be full face and 1.6 mm thick unless otherwise specified.
15225.2.6 Bolting
Flange bolting shall be furnished if so indicated on the attachments listed in Article 15225.1.8.
Alloy steel bolting shall be used for joining all steel flanges having a design pressure rating of
Class 150 or greater, except steel slip-on flanges.
Carbon steel bolting shall be used for joining all other flanges including steel slip-on flanges.
Bolting for bolt diameters 45 mm and larger shall consist of threaded studs and two nuts. Bolting for
bolt diameters less than 45 mm may be threaded studs and nuts or bolts and nuts. Bolts and nuts
shall be heavy hexagonal heads conforming to the standards listed in Article 15225.1.4.
All bolting shall be plated in accordance with the material specifications indicated in Article 15225.1.5.
15225.2.7 Unions
All piping unions shall be of the ground joint type constructed of materials equivalent in alloy
composition and strength to other fittings in the piping systems in which they are installed. Union
pressure classes and end connections shall be the same as the fittings in the piping systems in which
they are installed.
Steel unions shall have hardened stainless steel seating surfaces on both faces.
15225.2.8 Coating and Wrapping of Pipe To Be Installed Underground
Exterior surfaces of steel pipe to be installed underground, where specified on the attachment(s),
shall be provided with a shop applied, high quality dielectric, bonded coating system in accordance
with the requirements of Supplemental Specification Q302 in Attachment 1 and the Coating System
Data Sheets referenced and included as attachments.
No coating shall be applied within 100 mm of field weld connections.
15225.2.9 Cleaning
Interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of sand, mill scale, greases,
oils, dirt, and other foreign materials.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 147 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15225.2.9.1 Interior Cleaning. Interior surfaces of all piping shall be cleaned in accordance with the
type of cleaning specified on the Pipeline List (if included) and as described in the applicable
standards indicated in Article 15225.1.4.
Interior surfaces specified to be prepared in accordance with Cleaning Code CL1 shall be cleaned
with rotary tools or wire brushing as described in the PFI Standard ES-5 1988, Articles 4.2.1 and
4.2.2.
Interior surfaces specified to be prepared in accordance with Cleaning Code CL2 shall be thoroughly
shotblast cleaned using a nonsiliceous steel blasting material as described in the PFI Standard ES-5,
Article 4.2.4. Use of sand or silica bearing material on these surfaces is not acceptable.
After cleaning, interior surfaces of all piping shall be thoroughly air blown, coated in accordance with
the specification, and sealed.
Interior surfaces specified to be prepared in accordance with Cleaning Code CL3 shall be thoroughly
cleansed as described in the PFI Standard ES-5, Article 4.2.5 by immersing in hot alkaline cleaning
solution or by alkaline steam jet cleaning. After cleaning, the pipe shall be immersed in hot dilute
hydrochloric or sulfuric acid to which a suitable inhibitor has been added to prevent attack on the bare
metal. The piping shall then be thoroughly rinsed for removal of acid and dried. After drying, an oil
soluble rust preventive shall be applied as indicated on the spool drawings.
Interior surfaces of oil piping specified to be pickled shall be thoroughly cleaned by immersion in hot
alkaline cleaning solution or by alkaline steam jet cleaning. After cleaning, the pipe shall be
immersed in hot dilute hydrochloric or sulfuric acid to which a suitable inhibitor has been added to
prevent attack on the bare metal. The piping shall then be thoroughly rinsed for removal of acid and
dried.
Interior surfaces specified to be prepared in accordance with Cleaning Code STD require no special
cleaning.
The following requirements apply to the mechanical cleaning of austenitic stainless steel components:
Mechanical cleaning entails the removal of debris, foreign articles, loose soil,
unacceptable rust, etc., by grinding, brushing, vacuum cleaning, and similar
processes. Wire brushing and grinding should not be performed on internal surfaces
not accessible for hand cleaning and visual examination unless the item is completely
free of crevices.
Mechanical cleaning tools such as grinding, polishing, filing, deburring, and brushing
tools shall be clean and shall not have been used on aluminum, copper, lead, or
materials containing lead or lead compounds, or other low melting point materials.
Stainless steel surfaces may be blast cleaned to remove heavy rust. Material used
on stainless steel shall be clean and iron free.
Tools and material used on carbon steel surfaces shall not be used on stainless steel
surfaces.
Filing and deburring shall be performed with carbide-tipped or tool-steel tools. Rotary
files used on austenitic stainless steel shall be faced with tungsten carbide or titanium
carbide.
Wire brushes shall have stainless steel bristles and shall be identified and controlled
for use on stainless steel only.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 148 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Grinding of stainless steel shall be performed with resin bonded aluminum oxide or
silicon carbide grinding wheels identified and controlled for use on stainless steel
only.
15225.2.10 Coatings
All carbon and alloy steel piping shall be coated as specified herein and in the Supplemental
Specifications in Attachment 1. Stainless steel piping shall not be coated.
15225.2.10.1 Interior Surface Coatings. Protective coatings shall be furnished and applied to the
interior surfaces of piping where specified on the attachments listed in Article 15225.1.8. Coating
requirements for shop applied pipe interior coating systems shall be in accordance with Attachment 1
and any Coating System Data Sheets referenced and included as attachments.
Interior surfaces of all shotblast cleaned piping shall be thoroughly air blown, coated with water
soluble preservative as specified on the drawings and in the Pipeline List (if included), and sealed.
Interior surfaces of all oil piping cleaned by the pickling method shall be coated with an oil soluble rust
preservative as specified on the drawings and in the Pipeline List (if included).
15225.2.10.2 Exterior Surface Coatings. Piping exteriors, parts, and appurtenances shall be
prepared and coated in accordance with the following.
All exposed surfaces shall be prime painted except for piping internals (including internal surfaces of
branch connections), stainless steel, flange faces, threaded surfaces, external surfaces within
3 inches (80 mm) of field welded connections, and external surfaces of insulated pipe.
Piping shall be painted using the coating system that is specified on the drawings and in the Pipeline
List (if included). Painting shall be in accordance with Attachment 1.
15225.2.10.3 Weld End Coatings. Machined weld end preparations for field welds on carbon and
alloy steel piping shall be coated with a weldable consumable coating as specified on the drawings
and in the Pipeline List (if included) to prevent surface corrosion prior to welding.
15225.2.10.4 Flange Face/Threaded Connection Coating. Flange faces on shotblast cleaned pipe
shall be given an application of a water soluble preservative coating as specified on the drawings and
in the Pipeline List (if included). Flange faces on piping cleaned by the pickling method shall be given
an application of an oil soluble preservative coating as specified on the drawings and in the Pipeline
List (if included).
15225.2.11 Jointing Materials and Tools
Where specified in Article 15225.1.1.6, the Contractor shall furnish welding rod, flux, solvent cement,
or any other consumable materials required for proper erection of the pipe and fittings furnished
under these specifications. Welding rod and related materials shall be in accordance with the
Supplemental Specifications in Attachment 1. Solvent cement and related materials shall be in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the pipe with which they will be used.
The Contractor shall provide any special tools required for joining plastic or pressed fit pipe for the
use of the erecting contractor. These tools shall remain the property of the Contractor and will be
returned upon completion of erection.
15225.2.12 Preparation for Shipment
Interior and exterior surfaces of piping and accessories shall be cleaned and shall have preservative
coatings applied prior to shipment to the jobsite in accordance with the Supplemental Specifications
in Attachment 1.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 149 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Open ends and branches of piping shall be securely closed as follows to protect the interior
cleanliness and end surfaces during shipment:
Weld end larger than 50 mm--Attach a plastic cap or metal cap lined in the end with
20 mm soft wood and seal with waterproof tape.
Female opening 50 mm and smaller, such as Sock-o-let--Press in a light metal or
plastic insert and seal with waterproof tape.
Miscellaneous loose items shall be suitably packed in heavy wooden boxes with waterproof linings to
prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
15225.3 Execution
Piping erection shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15921 - Piping Erection.
Source: 15225, 2011, v.1.3
Page 150 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15226 - Underground Pressure Piping

15226.1 Schedule of Submittals after Purchase Order Award
The following documents or notices shall be required as deliverables upon Purchase Order Award:
Submittal Item
Schedule
Copies of certified test and inspection

reports/data
15 days after test or inspection
Certified material test reports
With each shipment
Manufacturer's data for piping materials

and piping accessories
30 days after award
Cutsheets with fabricated and molded

fitting dimensions for HDPE pipe
15 days after award
15226.2 Codes and Standards

standards. The version that is latest adopted, published, and effective at the date of this document
shall apply unless specifically stated otherwise. These references shall govern the work except
where they conflict with these specifications. In case of conflict, the latter shall govern to the extent of
such difference:
Work
In Accordance With
Materials for piping
The most current edition of the ASME Code

for Pressure Piping, B31.1, Power Piping,
including all addenda thereto

dimensions of carbon steel pipe
ANSI/ASME B36.10M

dimensions of stainless steel pipe
ANSI/ASME B36.19M
Sizes and dimensions of stainless steel

pipe 300 mmNPS and smaller
designated as Schedule 5S, 10S, 40S,
or 80S, and 350 mm NPS and larger
designated as Schedule 5S or 10S
ANSI/ASME B36.19M
Wall thickness tolerances for carbon

steel
ASTM A530
Manufacturing standard for mechanical

joint and push-on joint ductile iron pipe
Manufacturing standard for flanged

ductile iron pipe
Polyethylene tubes for protection of

ductile iron pipe that will be installed
underground
High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe
AWWA C906
Cement linings for ductile iron pipe

fittings
Source: 15226, 2005, v.1.0
Underground Pressure Piping
Page 151 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Work
In Accordance With
Manufacturing standard for polyvinyl

chloride (PVC) pipe
ASTM D1785
Manufacturing standard for chlorinated

polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe
ASTM F441 (Schedule 40 and 80) or ASTM

F442 (SDR and PR)
Butt weld fitting manufacturing

standard ANSI B16.9 and B16.28
Over 22 mm, Figure 3, Detail C

22 mm and less, Figure 2, Detail C

lined or rubber-lined pipe
150 mm NPS and smaller Schedule 80 and

less, Figure 2, Detail B
Carbon steel flanged fittings
ANSI B16.5
Manufacturing standard for ductile iron

fittings used with lined steel pipe
Manufacturing standard for cast iron

and ductile iron flanged fittings
Manufacturing standards for

mechanical joint and push-on joint
ductile iron and cast iron fittings
ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 and

ANSI/AWWA C111/A21/1
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings

corresponding to the pipe schedule with
which they will be used
Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)

fittings
ASTM F438 or ASTM F439 corresponding to

the pipe schedule with which they will be
used
Cast iron and ductile iron flange

construction requirements
Flange bolting requirements - carbon

steel and stainless steel
ANSI B16.1
Bolting dimensional standards for

carbon and stainless steel
ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI/ASME B18.2.2
Weld end prep requirements for

stainless and carbon steel pipe
(greater than 50 mm)
Over 22 mm, Figure 3, Detail C

16 mm to 22 mm, Figure 2, Detail C
Under 16 mm
Valves - Figure 2, Detail B
Pipe and fittings - Figure 2, Detail A
Clean interior surface of carbon steel

pipe
PFI Standard ES-5, Articles 4.2.1 and 4.2.2
Piping and materials used for potable

water service
NSF 61
15226.3 Material Specifications

Component
Source: 15226, 2005, v.1.0
Materials
Page 152 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Component
Materials
Carbon steel
ASTM A106 Grade B, or ASTM A53 Gr B
Underground Fire Protection Piping
Listed for fire protection service or comply

with the requirements of NFPA 24
Stainless Steel
ASTM A-312 Gr 304
Stainless Steel Fittings (smaller than 50

mm NB)
ASTM A-182 F304
Stainless Steel Fittings (larger than 65

mm NB)
ASTM A-351 CF8
HDPE Pipe
General service
ASTM F714 and ASTM D3350, with a PE

3409 designation and a cell classification
of 34534C
Potable
In accordance with NSF61
HDPE Fittings
Non-FM approved suppliers
CPCHEM Performance Pipe

Driscoplex 4100
Poly Systems Incorporated, KWH Sclairpipe

ANSI Pressure Class 150 and 300

A105/A105M

ANSI Pressure Class 600 and higher
ASTM A105/A105M
Carbon steel butt weld fitting material

standards
ASTM A234/A234M
Ductile iron pipe push-on joint gaskets
Neoprene or other synthetic rubber.

Natural rubber will not be acceptable.

lined or rubber lined pipe
ASTM A395, lined with lining material

equivalent to that of the pipe
Stainless steel butt weld fitting material

standards
ASTM A403/A403M
Carbon steel bolting materials
ASTM A307 Grade B
15226.4 General Material Descriptions

15226.4.1 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings
Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall conform to the standards referenced in Article 15226.2.
Interior surfaces of ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be coated before shipment with a bituminous
material.
Source: 15226, 2005, v.1.0
Page 153 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Ductile iron piping systems shall be provided with restrained joints. All restrained joints shall be
American Pipe - fasttite with fastgrid gaskets or U.S. Pipe - Field Lok.
Where specified in Article 15226.2, polyethylene tubes shall be furnished by the Contractor as
required to allow field wrapping of buried ductile iron pipe in accordance with ANSI/AWWA
C105/A21.5 Method A.
15226.4.2 High Density Polyethylene Fittings
Purchaser. Fittings shall be of the butt fusion weld, socket fusion weld, or saddle type as
recommended by the pipe manufacturer for the point of application within the system.
Preference shall be given to molded fittings.
If fittings other than Y-laterals are fabricated by mitering pipe material, SDR of fitting material shall be
increased accordingly to meet the requirements of this pipe section. The ends of the increased SDR
fittings shall be machined to matching adjoining piping.
Flanged fitting shall include ductile iron convoluted backup rings.
Molded fittings shall be provided for pipe sizes 200 mm and smaller. Fabricated fittings may be used
for sizes 250 mm and larger.
HDPE piping shall be fabricated in 40 foot straight lengths and shall not be furnished in rolls.
Three segment fabricated fittings shall be used for pressure system piping 250 mm and larger. Five
segment fabricated fittings shall be used for gravity systems for all sizes 100 mm to 250 mm. The
HDPE pipe list identifies the pressure and gravity drain systems.
All underground reducers shall be eccentric reducers.
15226.4.3 Carbon and Stainless Steel Pipe and Fittings
Steel piping shall be fabricated in 40 foot lengths. Pipe will have weld end preps for both ends.
Steel Fittings. Unless otherwise indicated in the attachment(s), steel fittings 65 mm and larger shall
be butt welding type and steel fittings 50 mm and smaller shall be socket welding type.
Fittings and flanges manufactured in the People's Republic of China shall be in accordance with the
1994 (or later) quality assurance program that has been implemented by the CVPVI and shall be
stamped with the mark of the CBPVI, shall have markings as required by the applicable standard, and
shall bear the official stamp of CBPVI on all relevant quality inspection reports.
Butt Welding Fittings. Butt welding fitting wall thickness shall be equal to the pipe wall thickness
with which they are used. Fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with the applicable standards
listed in Article 15226.2.
Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, elbows shall be of the long radius type and conform to
the applicable standards listed in Article 15226.2.
Forged Steel Fittings - Socket-Welded and Threaded. Forged steel fittings shall be used for
socket-welded and threaded connections. Socket-welded and threaded fittings shall conform to the
applicable standards listed in Article 15226.2. Metal thickness of fittings shall be adequate to provide
actual bursting strengths equal to or greater than those of the pipe with which they are to be used.
Source: 15226, 2005, v.1.0
Page 154 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15226.4.4 Steel Flanges

All steel, flat face flanges shall be used to mate with cast iron, ductile iron, FRP, HDPE and plastic or
rubber lined flanges. All steel, raised face flanges shall be supplied for carbon and stainless steel
pipe.
15226.5 Coating of Pipe to be Installed Underground

Exterior surfaces of carbon and stainless steel pipe to be installed underground shall be provided with
a shop applied coating and wrap system as indicated in the pipeline list and drawings.
No shop applied coating shall be applied within 100 mm of field weld connections. After the field
welding is complete and determined to pass all specified inspections, the welded connection area
shall be coated and wrapped in accordance with the specified system.
15226.6 Cleaning
Interior and exterior surfaces of all piping shall be thoroughly cleaned of sand, mill scale, greases,
oils, dirt, and other foreign materials.
15226.7 Weld End Coatings

Machined weld end preparations for field welds on carbon steel piping shall be coated with a
weldable consumable coating as specified to prevent surface corrosion prior to welding.
Preservative coating materials shall be as follows. Other materials may be proposed provided
manufacturer's data is submitted to the Purchaser for acceptance prior to application:
Application
Manufacturer
Consumable rust-preventive coating
AACCO, "Deoxaluminite" or Tempil,

Division of Big Three Industries, "Bioxide"
15226.8 Preparation for Shipment

Open ends and branches of piping shall be securely closed as follows to protect the interior
cleanliness and end surfaces during shipment:
Weld End. Attach a plastic cap or metal cap seal with waterproof tape.
Weld end larger than 50 mm--Attach a plastic cap or metal cap lined
in the end with 20 mm soft wood seal with waterproof tape.
Female opening 50 mm and smaller, such as Sock-o-let--Press in a
light metal or plastic insert and seal with waterproof tape.
Miscellaneous loose items shall be suitably packed in heavy wooden boxes with
waterproof linings to prevent entry of dirt and moisture.
All pipe shall be clearly labeled with the system and line code.
Source: 15226, 2005, v.1.0
Page 155 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15270 - Cast Iron Valves

15270.1 General
Scope of supply shall include valves per the Substructures Valve List.
Not applicable.
The Valve List included with these specifications designates valve identification number, nominal
valve size, description (including the need for UL/FM ratings, if applicable), design conditions, valve
class rating, material, end preparation requirements, and special features.
All check valves shall be designed for installation in either horizontal piping or vertical piping with
upward flow.
Work
In Accordance With
Construction of all valves and

accessories
ASME Power Piping Code B31.1

MSS Standards
ASTM
ANSI
OSHA
Construction of fire water valves (in

addition to forenamed)
NFPA
Underwriters Laboratories
Factory Mutual
Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions
ANSI B16.10
Flanges
ANSI B16.1
Indicator posts
NFPA 24
UL 789
15270.1.5 Materials
Component
Material
Valve Body
ASTM A126 Gr B or approved equivalent
Source: 15270, 2005, v.1.0
Cast Iron Valves
Page 156 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Component
Manufacturer
Cast iron valves
Anchor/Darling, Crane, Grinnell, KLM,

Newmans, NIbco, Stockham, or Powell

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Hydrostatic shell and

seat leakage tests
required by the
referenced standards
MSS and/or UL
Supplier

15270.2 Products
Unless otherwise indicated in the Valve List, the valves shall have flanged end connections.
All fire protection FM/UL approved (as noted in the remarks section of the Valve List) iron body gate
valves shall be of Iron Body Bronze Mounted (IBBM) construction.
Valves indicated on the Valve List to be curb valves shall be of the double disk, parallel seat gate type
with nonrising stems, and with 50 mm square operating nuts. Direction of opening shall be
counterclockwise. All curb valves shall be designed for direct bury. Curb valves shall be provided
with valve boxes when specified on the Valve List, and shall be provided with indicator posts when
specified on the Valve List.
All other valves shall have flanged type bonnet joints. Gate valves, other than post indicator valves,
shall be of outside screw and yoke construction and shall be of the wedge disk type. Body seats shall
be of the renewable type.
15270.2.1 Special Features
Special features, such as locking devices, post indicators, and limit switches, shall be furnished as
specified herein and as indicated in the Valve List or as required by the Contractor's design.
15270.2.1.1 Locking Devices. Locking devices shall allow the valve to be locked in either the open
or closed position by use of a standard padlock.
15270.2.1.2 Limit Switches. Limit switches shall be furnished as indicated in the Valve List and as
required by the Contractor's design, and shall be as specified in Technical Supplemental
Specifications included in Attachment 1.
Source: 15270, 2005, v.1.0
Cast Iron Valves
Page 157 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15270.2.1.3 Indicator Posts. Indicator posts shall be furnished for valves where indicated under
Remarks on the Valve List, and shall be UL listed if so indicated. Indicator posts shall be of the
proper length to accommodate the bury depth specified in under Remarks, with an adjustment
capability of 300 mm.
15270.2.1.4 Accessories. Valve boxes shall be of the three-piece Buffalo type, with bases selected
to properly fit the valves. Valve boxes, with extension pieces if required, shall be of the proper length
to accommodate the specified depth of bury with screw type adjustment of plus or minus 300 mm.
The boxes shall be complete with lids. One valve operating wrench shall be provided for each valve
furnished with a valve box. Operating wrenches shall extend 900 mm above ground level when
positioned on the valve operating nut.
15270.2.2 Painting
All valves shall be shop primed. Shop primer paint shall be the manufacturer's standard. Curb valves
and accessories shall be finish painted in the shop. The finish paint coats shall be the manufacturer's
standard, with the above grade portions of indicator posts and valve box lids to be OSHA Safety Red.
15270.2.3 Installation Instructions
If piping erection is not part of the scope of these specifications, installation instructions for installing
the valves shall be provided. The instructions shall state valve plug or disk position during joining
operations, disassembly requirements, and all other precautions, recommendations, or special
instructions for proper installation.
15270.2.4 Identification
Each valve assigned a valve number by the Purchaser shall be provided with a permanent stamped
brass tag bearing the valve number and nomenclature of the valve including duty or service intended
and the function of the valves specialties securely attached to the valve with 1 mm stainless steel
wire. Lettering on the tag shall be 5 mm minimum. Each accessory item furnished with the valve, but
not securely attached to the valve, shall be provided with an identical identification tag. Shop
drawings and all correspondence shall be identified by the valve number.
15270.3 Execution
Not applicable.
Source: 15270, 2005, v.1.0
Cast Iron Valves
Page 158 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15921 - Piping Erection

15921.1 General
The work shall include erection of all piping, fittings, valves, supports, and piping specialties, as called
for on the drawings and specifications, and by the codes and standards. Erection of piping systems
designated by the system codes and indicated on the drawings listed in Article 15921.1.8 are
included, except as otherwise specified herein. The Contractor shall furnish all required materials
and perform all related work for completion of the work included under these specifications.
If furnishing any piping or fittings; installing insulation and lagging;, or trenching, and earthwork for
underground piping is included in the Scope of Work, it shall be done in accordance with separate
sections included in these specifications:
The additional Scope of Work for this
package includes the following items:
Additional Scope
The systems listed above include the
following:
Above grade piping
No
Below grade piping
Yes
In addition to erection of the piping

systems defined above, the Scope of
Work includes the following services and
materials:
Routing of miscellaneous 50 mm
and smaller pipe, fittings, and
valves
No
Installation of instrument and

control piping and tubing as
indicated on the attachments
No
Hydrostatic testing of piping

erected under these
specifications
Yes
Hydrostatic or pneumatic testing

of the following piping systems
erected by others:
Furnish water for
hydrotest
No
Furnish chemicals for

treatment of hydrotest
water
Yes
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 159 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Steam blow cleaning
No
Chemical cleaning as specified

in Section 18401 - Chemical
Cleaning
No
Oil flush cleaning
No
Sterilization of potable water

piping and equipment
Yes
Scope
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Service water distribution piping, including

all branch lines
Freeze protection required
No
Furnish and install piping

insulation and lagging in
accordance with Section 15080 Insulation and Lagging
No
Provide penetrations of
structures for pipe installation
Yes
All required penetrations
Yes
Partial scope
(penetrations by others
shown on drawings)
No
Furnish and install pipeline

identification
Yes
Metal signs
No
Stencil
No
Adhesive labels
No
Paint
Yes, by others

Items furnished by others and not in this Scope of Work include the following:
Construction and miscellaneous services and materials not specified in Article
15921.1.1.
Not used.
Work
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
In Accordance With
Piping Erection
Page 160 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Work
In Accordance With
Installation of mechanical joint piping
Field applied coatings for underground

piping
AWWA C209
Repair of damaged shop applied

coatings for underground piping
AWWA C203
Repair of damaged field applied coatings

for underground piping
AWWA C209, Section 3.4
Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Polyethylene tubing for underground

ductile iron pipe
Material
Installation
Dimensions and installation of restrained

push-on type joints
AWWA C606
Sterilization of piping and equipment
AWWA C651, AWWA C652
15921.1.5 Materials
Component
Material
Flexible weatherproofing
Nylon reinforced neoprene fabric with

compatible adhesive
Clamps for attaching flexible

weatherproofing to pipe and sleeve
Nonfire rated penetration seals
Field applied protective coating for

underground pipe
Stainless steel worm drive clamps

Nylon reinforced hypalon with closure
zipper and stainless steel worm drive
clamps
Tape and primer system
15921.1.6 Acceptable Subsuppliers

Component
Manufacturer
Flexible weatherproofing fabric and

adhesive
DuPont (Fairprene 5798 material with

Fairprene 5128 adhesive)
Clamps for attaching flexible

weatherproofing to pipe and sleeve
Aero-Seal (QS 200)
Field applied protective coating for

underground pipe
Tapecoat (CT 10/40W with moldable

sealant to prime and fill voids)
Shrink sleeves for underground piping
Raychem Corporation
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 161 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011

Tests
In Accordance With
Conducted By
Hydrostatic and
pneumatic testing of
piping
ASME B31.1, Paragraph

137
Contractor
Hydrostatic testing of
underground fire
protection piping
NFPA 24
Contractor
Pressure testing of
nonmetallic piping
ASME B31.1, Paragraph

137; and as supplemented
by Article 15921.3.29
Contractor
Holiday testing of shop

applied coatings for
underground pipe
AWWA C203
Contractor
Holiday testing of field

applied coatings for
underground pipe
Coating manufacturer's
recommendations
Contractor
Holiday testing of field

installed shrink sleeves
for underground piping
Manufacturer's
recommendations
Contractor
Testing of electrical
isolation flange kits
Manufacturer's
recommendations
Contractor

15921.2 Products
15921.2.1 Pipeline List
The Pipeline List and the Underground Utility Drawings detail the requirements for the various major
piping systems to be erected under these specifications.
The information included on the Pipeline List and/or drawings designates the pipeline identification
number; line description; operating, design, and test pressures and temperatures; pipe material,
nominal sizes, and corresponding schedule or wall thickness; valve class rating, end preparation
requirements, and material; insulation class; welding remarks; gasket types; and special features.
15921.3 Execution
All piping, valves, fittings, and piping specialties shall be erected in accordance with the requirements
of this section. Any piping installation not specified herein shall be done in accordance with good
engineering practice.
The drawings indicate the dimensions of the major lines. These dimensions are subject to change to
accommodate the equipment, valves, and fittings actually furnished and the variations in equipment
as actually installed. If the equipment, valves, fittings, and other components of the piping systems
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 162 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
actually furnished differ in dimensions from those indicated, the piping systems shall be altered as
required to accommodate these changes. If, due to some unforeseen circumstance, the installation
of the piping as indicated would result in an interference, the modifications or corrections required to
install the piping free from interferences shall be made.
A field check of all connections to equipment and existing pipe, valves, or fittings for location, size,
butt weld end preparation or flange drilling and facing shall be made prior to erecting interconnecting
piping.
Allowances in fit-up and modifications to piping spools shall be made as required prior to completion
of field welds and hoisting pipe spools into place as applicable.
Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be handled in a manner that will ensure installation in a
sound, undamaged condition. Equipment, tools, and methods used in unloading, reloading, hauling,
and laying pipe and fittings shall be such that the pipe and fittings are not damaged.
Particular care shall be taken to prevent damage to protective coatings and concrete pipe joint rings.
Slings shall be nonabrasive and located between the ends of each pipe section when lifting. Bare
wire rope slings or the use of hooks to lift pipe will not be permitted.
15921.3.1 Welding
Field welding shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Supplemental Specifications in
Attachment 1.
15921.3.2 Miscellaneous Piping
Miscellaneous piping is defined as piping 50 mm and smaller which is not shown on the detailed
piping drawings. All miscellaneous piping shall be routed and installed in a neat, rectangular form.
Special attention shall be given to securing a neat appearance. All piping shall be installed
perpendicular or parallel to the major equipment, building structure, and floor levels except in special
cases consented to by the Purchaser.
If routing of miscellaneous piping is included under these specifications, all piping, including tubing,
not located on the drawings shall be routed and installed in accordance with the following
requirements:
Pipe routing shall allow unobstructed maintenance of plant equipment.
Piping shall not be installed above, or within a horizontal distance of 3 feet (1 m)
from, electrical equipment such as switchgear, switchboards, control panels, motor
controls, contactors, communication equipment, batteries, battery chargers, and
motor generators unless written consent of the Purchaser is obtained. Improperly
located piping shall be removed and relocated.
All branch piping shall be provided with shutoff valves at the main headers.
Routings shall be selected to avoid interference with planned and dimensioned
locations for lighting fixtures, electrical trays, raceways, or conduit. The Contractor
shall review the Purchaser's drawings for electrical construction to avoid such
interferences before routing the piping.
15921.3.2.1 Vents and Drains. Not used.
15921.3.3 Temporary Piping
All equipment, piping, and valves of a temporary nature shall be installed in a safe and workmanlike
manner. This shall include such lines as temporary vents for steam blowing, hydrostatic test lines,
chemical cleaning lines, and all other temporary lines required to successfully complete the work.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 163 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
When the temporary piping is no longer required, any Contractor-furnished temporary piping shall be
dismantled and removed from the site. Temporary piping furnished by others shall be dismantled and
stored as directed by the Purchaser.
Temporary piping shall ordinarily be removed prior to startup and operation of the facility. If for some
reason the temporary piping must remain in place for a time after startup, the piping shall be designed
and installed in accordance with the codes/specifications used with the permanent piping to which the
temporary piping is attached.
15921.3.4 Piping in Existing Areas
Before installation of piping in existing areas, the routings of new piping to be installed shall be
walked down to verify that the piping, insulation, and supports can be installed as designed without
interference. If the piping as designed would interfere with existing facilities, the pipe routing shall be
reviewed with the Engineer and shall then be altered or existing piping shall be relocated. All pipe
routings shall be subject to acceptance by the Purchaser.
15921.3.5 Alterations and Cut-ins
All alterations and cut-ins to existing piping and equipment indicated on the drawings shall be made
as specified herein and as required for proper installation of the new piping and equipment.
All cut-ins shall be done by sawing, machining, or careful flame cutting as directed by the Purchaser.
Flame cut holes shall be ground smooth. The interior of the piping shall be thoroughly cleaned after
cutting.
Whether indicated on the drawings or not, existing miscellaneous piping shall be revised as required
to permit installation, without interference, of new piping and equipment. Existing miscellaneous
piping that interferes with walkways or presents an unsightly appearance after modification of existing
buildings, structures, equipment, or piping shall be relocated as directed by the Purchaser. The
alterations to existing piping shall include any required revisions, additions, or replacements of
insulation and pipe supports.
Any piping materials and valves removed and not reused shall be disposed of as directed by the
Purchaser.
All alterations and cut-ins to existing systems shall be made on a time schedule acceptable to the
Purchaser.
After alterations and cut-ins to existing coated equipment or coated piping have been made, the
damaged coating shall be repaired. All welds and sharp edges shall be finished smooth and all weld
spatter shall be removed. The metal shall be prepared and the coating system applied in strict
accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the coating manufacturer.
15921.3.6 Thermal Expansion
All piping shall be installed so that excessive or destructive expansion forces will not exist either in the
cold condition or under conditions of maximum temperature.
15052.3.6.1 Not Used.
15921.3.6.2 Noncritical Piping Systems. The Contractor shall install the pipe in a stress free
condition. Cold spring shall not be used to close the final joint in runs of piping between equipment
and anchors. The methods used to erect the piping shall result in an installation which is true to plan.
Where expansion joints are indicated on the drawings, anchors shall be installed as required to
prevent damage from the forces generated by the fluid pressure of the line. Care must be taken in
installing expansion joint anchors to make certain that full design movement is allowed at all times
from maximum to minimum temperatures.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 164 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15921.3.7 Not Used

15921.3.8 Cutting and Drilling Structures
All necessary drilling, cutting, and patching of structures required for proper installation of piping or
bolts shall be done, but only as indicated on the drawings, specified herein, or with the consent of the
Purchaser. Any penetrations provided by others are shown on the drawings.
Holes shall not be cut in structural steel. Wherever possible, clamps shall be used for attaching
erection rigging. Lugs may be welded to structural steel only with the consent of the Purchaser.
Upon completion of the work, the lugs shall be removed and the surfaces ground smooth.
Holes in concrete floors shall be provided with machine cut steel pipe sleeves in accordance with the
details indicated on the drawings, if details are provided. If no details are provided, holes in concrete
floors required for installation of piping shall be formed with steel sleeves that extend the full depth of
the concrete and extend 100 mm above the floor line. Sleeves shall be fabricated from 6 mm thick
steel plate or from standard weight steel pipe. Sleeves greater than 300 mm in diameter shall be
made from 10 mm thick steel plate. Each sleeve shall be provided with anchors welded to the sleeve
as indicated on the drawings. The minimum spacing of anchors shall be 450 mm except that a
minimum of three anchors shall be provided for each sleeve. All sleeves shall be machine cut and
ground smooth. Holes for uninsulated cold pipe may be filled with a suitable expansion material in
lieu of installing a sleeve.
All openings in concrete shall be made by core drilling, saws, or similar clean cutting equipment.
Where boxouts are left in concrete walls for the passage of pipes, the Contractor shall weld 6 mm
thick steel seal rings on the pipes and fill the space between the pipe and the boxout with concrete.
Holes cut in walls and roofs shall be complete with sleeves, collars, panel edge closures, reinforcing,
flashing, and other accessories in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings.
Field cut holes through walls or roof shall be done with proper cutting equipment, leaving a clean
finished edge. Burning or other nonexact methods shall not be used.
All field cut holes and sleeves shall have adequate provisions to allow for insulation and expansion of
piping as required.
15921.3.9 Equipment Connections
When attaching piping to equipment connections, special care shall be taken so that excessive
stresses are not transmitted to, and imposed upon, such connections. Piping connections to rotating
equipment shall not be finalized until the shaft is aligned and the equipment grouted in. As piping is
connected, shaft alignment shall be monitored to determine if piping stress causes any change. An
indicator tolerance beyond 0.05 mm shall typically require correction. The Construction Manager
shall make the final determination of tolerance depending on the equipment service.
In the case of flanged connections, the piping shall be installed and supported so that accurate
matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the entire flange area are obtained prior to the
installation of any flange bolts. Bolts shall be carefully tightened to uniformly compress the gaskets
and minimize flange stress.
Special precautions shall be taken in allowing for shrinkage during the welding of nozzle connections
so that excessive stresses are not imposed on the equipment.
Fit-up of the flanges to equipment connections may be checked after the bolting has been installed at
the request of the Construction Manager. Such bolting shall be removed and replaced and new
gaskets installed if requested by the Purchaser.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 165 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Piping erection connections to rotating equipment shall not commence until the rotating equipment
has been installed, aligned, and grouted in place. For connections to rotating equipment, piping
erection shall start at equipment connections and progressively build away from the equipment
connection to the farthest distance practical; this shall mean, as a minimum, that at least the first
three dead weight supports going away from the connection shall be installed on the piping being
erected. Pipe misalignment adjustments shall not be made within this minimum distance from the
rotating equipment. Flange connections should be initially fit and held in relative position using
machine pins or other loose-fitting devices. Flange bolts shall not be installed until after final flange
alignment and rough equipment alignment has been completed. Rough alignment is required to
ensure that final alignment is achievable. The equipment shall be securely bolted to the structure and
grouted before flanges are tightened. Travel stops on spring supports shall remain in place until
piping erection is complete, insulation erection is complete, liquid filled piping (if applicable) is filled
with the process fluid, and all temporary supports are removed. Travel stops shall be installed and
remain in place during hydrostatic testing. If the flanged connections are to be disconnected, the
travel stops shall be installed prior to draining the piping system. Pipe support turnbuckles shall be
used to adjust the spring supports, as indicated in the pipe support installation instructions, to unload
the travel stops prior to removal.
Final alignment checks and manufacturer representative's acceptance of connection alignment shall
only be performed with all travel stops in place and all temporary supports removed. Making up of
the welded joints on the steam generator, turbine generator, boiler feed pump turbines, boiler feed
pumps, and similar equipment shall be done in strict accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
requirements and under the supervision of the equipment manufacturer's representative. It shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to determine the manufacturer's requirements.
When welding to the exterior of coated tanks, all tank connections and the immediate tank area shall
be wrapped. The wrappings shall be kept wetted. Care shall be taken to protect the tank coating
during the welding operation.
After startup, if the connecting piping is found to be exerting excessive strains on the equipment, the
piping shall be altered by adjusting the piping supports, cutting and rewelding joints, and removing
sections of piping, all as necessary to eliminate the excessive strains.
15921.3.10 Valve Installation
Excessive piping strains and bending moments on valves, especially Class 150 large steel gate
valves and butterfly valves, shall be avoided. Excessive strains and moments will result in distorted
valve seats.
All steel globe valves shall be installed, wherever possible, in such a manner that closing of the valve
will relieve the pressure from the packing and permit repacking of the valve with the plant in normal
operation. This shall be accomplished by installing the valves on all branch lines from a pressure
source, with the pressure under the seat of the valve. In the case of a bypass line, or a line
containing two or more globe valves connecting two pressure sources that cannot be taken out of
service after the plant is in normal operation, the valve at each end of the line shall be installed in
such a manner that the connecting line between the valves may be taken out of service for repacking
of both valves when they are closed. Exceptions to the above requirements are those valves for
which the manufacturer indicates the required direction of flow through the valve and those valves for
which the direction of flow is indicated on the drawings.
Valve disks and plugs shall be off the valve seats when welding valves into the lines.
Check valves shall not be installed in vertical runs of piping unless they are specifically designed for
vertical operation.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 166 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15921.3.11 Not Used

15921.3.12 Not Used
15921.3.13 Making Flanged Connections
The faces of all flanges and gaskets shall be wiped clean when making up flanged joints. The
contact faces of all flanges shall meet squarely, and particular care shall be exercised in pulling up
flanged joints to prevent overstressing of flanges or flange bolting.
The threads of all bolting shall be painted with a suitable thread lubricant before the joint is made.
The lubricant shall be suitable for the operating temperatures involved.
15921.3.14 Hot Tap Branch Connections
Where "Hot Tap" connections are indicated on the drawings to connect new piping with piping that is
pressurized and in operation, those connections shall be made using a tapping saddle assembly and
equipment designed for the hot tapping procedure and by personnel experienced in hot tapping
requirements.
15921.3.15 Traps
Traps shall be installed in accessible locations and as indicated on the drawings. They shall be
installed on supports above floor level if possible and shall be readily accessible for repair and
removal.
15921.3.16 Miscellaneous Small Connections
All openings for vents, drains, instruments, and other similar connections made after erection of the
piping systems shall be drilled. No burning of such openings will be permitted. Connections shall be
made in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings, if details are provided. Any burrs
remaining on the inside wall of the pipe after drilling shall be removed.
The low points of all water piping systems and other systems specified to be hydrostatically tested
shall be provided with 19 mm minimum screwed plugged openings as indicated on the drawings and
as required to permit drainage of the systems.
Inspection plugs, drain plugs, and temperature instrument wells having threaded connections to lines
operating above 10,350 kPa or 510 C shall be seal welded.
Indoor equipment drains and baseplate drains shall be piped to the bell-ups provided in the floors.
Drains shall be caulked into the bell-ups where required by the Purchaser.
The lubricating oil drains on all machinery shall be provided with a brass plug cock of the same size
as the equipment connection and a screwed pipe plug before the installation of the oil.
15921.3.17 Damage to Machined Surfaces
Special measures shall be taken to avoid damage to machined surfaces such as flange facings or
pipe ends that have been prepared for welding. Any damage to welding ends shall be repaired prior
to butting up for welding. If a flange facing is marred, scratched, or damaged to such an extent that,
in the opinion of the Purchaser, the flange will be a cause for leakage, such flange shall be repaired
or replaced.
When welding to equipment that is in the assembled condition, separate ground leads shall be
attached to the equipment, pipes, or components to prevent stray welding currents from arcing the
internals of the equipment. Wherever possible, the ground lead shall be 2/0 cable or larger directly
and mechanically connected adjacent to the welding area and returned directly to the welding power
source.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 167 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15921.3.18 Piping Isolation

All necessary flange isolating materials and insulated bushings, unions, and couplings shall be
installed as indicated on the drawings and as required to properly isolate the piping. Bolting at
insulated flanges shall consist of studs and nuts with sufficient stud length to allow at least one full
stud thread protruding through each nut. Sleeves shall extend into the insulating washers. After
installation, insulated flanges, bushings, unions, and couplings shall be tested to determine that the
piping is properly electrically isolated to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
The Contractor shall electrically isolate the designated piping from connecting piping and equipment,
reinforcing steel, structural steel, the station grounding system, and other buried piping.
15921.3.19 Not Used
15921.3.20 Flexible Weatherproofing
After insulation work is complete, flexible weatherproofing shall be furnished where indicated on the
drawings for piping that passes through walls and floors. The flexible weatherproofing shall be
installed in accordance with the details indicated on the drawings.
Flexible weatherproofing material shall be as indicated in Articles 15921.1.5 and 15921.1.6 and shall
have 1.25 mm minimum thickness. Joints in the fabric shall be weatherproof and shall be sealed with
a compatible adhesive.
The fabric shall be attached to the piping and sleeves using 19 mm wide stainless steel worm drive
clamps. The joint between the piping and the fabric shall be sealed with flexible rubber based
adhesive.
Flexible weatherproofing shall be constructed with sufficient slack to accommodate the pipe
movements indicated on the drawings without causing the fabric to become excessively taut.
15921.3.21 Penetration Seals
Penetration seals shall be furnished and installed on piping that passes through walls and floors
where indicated on the drawings.
Seals shall be designed for any expected axial and lateral movements.
Seals at penetrations in fire rated walls or enclosures shall be fire rated and shall be acceptable to the
Purchaser.
Seals in nonfire rated applications shall be Contractor's standard.
Seals shall be installed and sealed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Insulation work shall be complete before installing seals on insulated piping. The Contractor shall
measure the outside diameter of the insulated and lagged pipe and the outside diameter of the
penetration sleeve at each point where a penetration seal is to be installed and shall purchase
penetration seals of the proper size.
15921.3.22 Drainlines
When connecting piping of the same size to a bell-up, the connection shall be caulked. When
connecting steel pipe to an HDPE stub, the connection shall be made with a sleeve clamp. When
one or more smaller pipes drain into a larger pipe, the bell-up shall remain open to allow visible
verification of flow.
Caulked joints shall be packed and caulked in a manner acceptable to the Purchaser.
The ends of all steel lines to be caulked shall be built up with a continuous bead of weld metal.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 168 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
All drain funnels, bell-ups, and floor drains shall be kept unplugged and free flowing.
15921.3.23 Protective Coatings
Where indicated in the Pipeline List, protective coatings will be applied to the exterior surfaces of
underground piping. Unless otherwise noted in the Pipeline List, the coatings will be shop applied,
and the Contractor shall repair the coatings and apply field coatings to field installed joints and to
areas not covered by shop coatings.
15921.3.23.1 Field Applied Coatings. Field applied coating systems for all field installed
underground piping joints and for any underground piping specials such as fittings, valves, brass or
copper pipe, and short lengths of carbon or stainless steel pipe, which may be impractical to shop
coat and which are approved by the Purchaser to be field coated, shall be in accordance with this
article.
Except as otherwise specified, all cleaning, coating, testing, handling, and installation of field applied
coating systems shall be in accordance with AWWA C209. The coating system for pipe operating
temperatures less than 49 C shall consist of a primer followed by one layer of 1.4 mm thick tape with
a minimum of 50 percent overlap. The coating system for pipe operating temperatures between 49
C and 121 C shall consist of a primer followed by one layer of 0.65 mm thick tape with a minimum of
50 percent overlap. The primer shall be compatible with the tape system and shall be chloride free if
used on stainless steel. Coating materials shall be manufactured by the Tapecoat Company, Inc.,
Evanston, Illinois, or acceptable equal.
Coating materials for pipe operating temperatures less than 49 C shall be Tapecoat H35 Gray tape
with an integrated primer. For tape application temperatures of 7 C and below, the pipe shall be
coated first with TC Omniprime primer.
Coating materials for pipe operating temperatures between 49 C and 82 C shall be Tapecoat 6025
Gray high temperature tape with TC Omniprime primer. Coating materials for pipe operating
temperatures between 82 C and 121 C shall be Tapecoat 6025 Gray high temperature tape with TC
7000 primer.
Flanged fittings, bell and spigot fittings, and similar irregularly shaped fittings shall have all void
spaces and irregular surfaces primed and filled with a suitable sealant prior to the application of the
tape coating system.
Shrink sleeves may be used on field welded joints in lieu of the tape and primer coating system
specified above. Shrink sleeves shall be of the wraparound type for all pipe sizes for which they are
available.
15921.3.23.2 Electrical Inspection. After the field coating work is complete, and just prior to
backfilling, 100 percent of all shop and field coated areas shall be inspected by the Contractor using
an electrical holiday detector. Holiday detector voltages shall be as follows:
Coating System
Holiday Detector Voltage Range
Shop applied coal tar, fibrous glass, felt
In accordance with the standard specified

for coating
Field applied tape
In accordance with manufacturer's

recommendation
Field applied shrink sleeves
In accordance with manufacturer's

recommendation
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 169 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Any flaws or holidays found in the coated areas shall be repaired. The pipe coating shall be retested
after repair. Testing and repair shall continue until no holidays are detected.
15921.3.23.3 Coating Repair. The method of field repair of damaged shop applied coatings shall be
in accordance with the standard specified for the coating. The repair materials shall be the same as
the original coating or as recommended by the coating applicator.
The method of field repair of damaged field applied coatings shall be in accordance with the specified
standard. The repair materials shall be the same as the original coating or as recommended by the
coating manufacturer.
15921.3.23.4 Handling of Coated Pipe. Coated pipe shall be handled at all times so as to prevent
damage to the coating. Bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids shall not be
permitted to come in contact with the coating during handling. Coated pipe shall not be handled
when the ambient temperature is below freezing.
Coated pipe shall be carefully backfilled with proper backfill materials. No organic material such as
sacks or wood blocks shall be allowed in the piping trench. No sharp objects such as stones shall be
allowed to contact the coated pipe.
15921.3.23.5 Polyethylene Tube Protection. All ductile iron pipe that is installed underground shall
be provided with seamless polyethylene tube protection. The tubing and installation of the tubing
shall be in accordance with the specified standard.
15921.3.24 Underground Piping
Underground piping shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
Excavation, trenching, embedment, and backfilling shall be in accordance with the requirements of
Section 02200 - Earthwork.
15921.3.24.1 Blocking. Underground piping shall be provided with suitable concrete thrust blocks at
locations indicated on the drawings and as required to prevent any movement of piping by the
unbalanced internal liquid pressure. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Section
03311 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Thrust blocking to be furnished shall include blocking as required to prevent movement of uncovered
piping during hydrostatic testing.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all blocking, and blocking shall not be accepted as adequate
until piping has been successfully hydrostatically tested as specified herein.
Thrust blocking shall bear against undisturbed earth and shall be placed so that the pipe joints will be
accessible for inspection and repair.
15921.3.24.2 Pipe Encased in Concrete. Concrete encasements shall be installed where and as
indicated on the drawings. Concrete and reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Section 03311 Cast-in-Place Concrete. Pipe to be encased shall be installed on a base slab and wedges placed to
bring the pipe to exact grade, prevent flotation, and hold the pipe in alignment. The wedges shall be
completely encased in the concrete to prevent a water path along the wedges to the outside of the
encasement. The slabs shall be provided with keys or water stops to ensure completely watertight
and pressure sealed encasements. All necessary measures shall be taken to ensure that the piping
is isolated from other metal.
15921.3.24.3 Grade and Alignment. Piping shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated on the
drawings. Laser beam equipment, survey instruments, or other acceptable construction methods
shall be used to maintain alignment and grade.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 170 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
All trenches shall be so graded and pipe so installed that the pipe, when laid on the trench bottom as
previously prepared and graded, will be in accurate horizontal and vertical position.
Concrete pipe shall be aligned in accordance with the requirements specified below under Article
15921.3.25 - Concrete Pipe Installation.
All pipe shall be brought to the terminal points specified. For mislocated terminal points, the
Construction Manager shall determine the means for correction. Bending will only be permitted if
approved by the Engineer.
15921.3.24.4 Laying Pipe. Pipe shall be protected from lateral displacement by pipe embedment
material installed as specified for trench backfill. Under no circumstances shall pipe be laid in
groundwater in excavated trenches, and no pipe shall be laid when trench conditions are unsuitable.
Trench bottoms that become unstable shall be stabilized in accordance with the requirements stated
in these specifications.
15921.3.24.5 Closures. When pipe laying is stopped at the end of the day, or for any other reason,
the end of the pipe shall be closed with a watertight plug or bulkhead. All branch outlets shall be
adequately sealed as soon as the special or fitting is laid. It is essential that mud, sand, or debris be
excluded from the lines at all times.
15921.3.25 Concrete Pipe Installation
All recommendations and instructions of the pipe manufacturer relative to the installation of concrete
pipe shall be followed.
15921.3.25.1 Alignment. The pipe shall be installed in accurate horizontal and vertical position with
a maximum permissible deviation of 4 mm per linear meter.
15921.3.25.2 Rubber and Steel Joints. After a section of pipe has been lowered into the trench,
the bell and spigot joint connectors shall be prepared and joined in accordance with the pipe
manufacturers recommendations. The deflection between two joints of pipe shall not exceed the
recommendations of the manufacturer. The actual joint openings in pipe deflections shall not exceed
10 mm.
It is essential that each gasket be in proper position. A leaking joint will be evidence of an improperly
made joint. Each defective joint discovered after the pipe has been laid shall be repaired. If
determined to be necessary by the Construction Manager, the repair of each defective joint shall be
made by cutting a groove entirely around the pipe adjacent to the joint and, after exposing the
adjacent joint ring surfaces, completely sealing the joint by means of a continuous weld, followed by
filling the previously cut groove with cement mortar around and to the full thickness of the pipe
outside of the joint rings.
15921.3.25.3 Grouting. The joint space remaining after installing the pipe shall be grouted in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Not less than two lengths of pipe shall be in
final position in advance of grouting. Pipe embedment operations shall not be resumed until initial set
of the grout has occurred. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to the grout.
15921.3.25.4 Welded Joints. Inside and outside joint spaces of welded joints shall be cemented
and grouted after welding, as specified above under Grouting.
15921.3.25.5 Anchored Joints. Harnessed joints shall be installed at the locations indicated on the
drawings and where recommended by the manufacturer.
All harnessed joints shall be encased in concrete with wire mesh reinforcement in strict accordance
with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 171 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
15921.3.26 Mechanical Joint Pipe Installation

Mechanical joint pipe shall be assembled in complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations. If effective sealing is not obtained in the assembly of mechanical joints, the
joint shall be disassembled, cleaned, and reassembled. Overtightening bolts to compensate for poor
installation practice will not be permitted.
Cutting shall be performed in a neat manner, without damage to the pipe. Cuts shall be straight,
smooth, and at right angles to the pipe axis. Ends of ductile iron pipe shall be cut with a saw or
abrasive wheel.
15921.3.27 Push-on Joint Pipe Installation
All instructions and recommendations of the pipe manufacturer relative to gasket installation and
other jointing operations shall be followed by the Contractor. All joint surfaces shall be lubricated with
heavy vegetable soap solution immediately before the joint is completed. Lubricant shall be suitable
for use in potable water, shall be stored in closed containers, and shall be kept clean. Each spigot
end shall be suitably beveled to facilitate assembly.
Cutting shall be performed in a neat manner, without damage to the pipe. Cuts shall be straight,
smooth, and at right angles to the pipe axis. Ends of ductile iron pipe shall be cut with a saw or
abrasive wheel.
15921.3.28 Installation of Restrained Push-on Joint Pipe
Where restrained push-on joints are provided, the joints shall be assembled in complete accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and in accordance with the specified
standard. If effective sealing is not obtained in assembly of a joint, the joint shall be disassembled,
cleaned, and reassembled with a new gasket. Field grooving of pipe shall be permitted only on
closure pieces. Field cut grooves shall be within the dimensional tolerances of the specified
standard.
15921.3.29 Nonmetallic Pipe Installation
The installation of nonmetallic piping, including fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe and high density
polyethylene pipe or other nonmetallic pipe, shall be as specified herein.
Nonmetallic piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the piping manufacturer's installation
recommendations. Special attention shall be given to the manufacturer's recommended ambient
installation temperatures, recommended embedment materials, pipe jointing system requirements
including preparation and curing times and techniques, support requirements during installation, and
recommended backfilling sequence and technique.
The Contractor shall submit evidence to the Purchaser that the piping manufacturer has reviewed the
piping system layout and has provided proper guidance for the installation work to be completed
successfully. The Contractor shall advise the Purchaser of any piping system layout modifications
recommended by the manufacturer or otherwise required to properly install the piping. After receipt
of concurrence from the Purchaser, the Contractor shall proceed with such changes at no cost to the
Purchaser.
FRP pipe assemblers shall be trained/qualified in installation of FRP pipe in accordance with the
specific pipe suppliers qualification program. FRP pipe assemblers shall also have independent
certification to ASME RTP-1 and ASME Section 10. Documentation of such certification shall be
available on the work site.
Nonmetallic pipe shall be pressure tested after installation as follows. Where the Pipeline List
specifies an initial service leak test (ISLT), the pipe rated pressure shall be deemed to be the
Pipeline List specified design pressure. Otherwise the rated pressure shall be the Pipeline List
specified test pressure.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 172 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Cycle: Pressurize the entire nonmetallic pipe system to the rated pressure five (5)
times, holding at rated pressure for five (5) minutes and at zero (0) pressure for five
(5) minutes during each cycle. This requirement for cycling is in addition to ASME
B31.1 requirements.
Hold: Pressurize the entire nonmetallic pipe system to the specified test pressure
and hold at this pressure for two (2) hours.
Test: Reduce pressure to specified design pressure and walk down the entire
system to check for leaks.
Repair: If any leaks are found, they shall be repaired per manufacturers
recommendations and the entire process specified above shall be repeated until the
entire system is demonstrated to be leak free.
15921.3.30 Underwater Installation of Piping
Installation of piping underwater at river crossings or at discharges into a lake or the sea shall be in
accordance with procedures established by the Contractor in conjunction with the pipe manufacturer.
The proposed installation procedure shall be submitted with the bid and shall include a detailed
description of the method and equipment to be used, and verification that the procedure has been
reviewed and approved by the pipe manufacturer.
15921.3.31 Testing
Where required by Article 15921.1.1, materials and equipment tests shall be made by the Contractor
as specified herein, as specified on the Pipeline List, and as required by code requirements and local
and state regulations. Nonmetallic pipe shall be pressure tested per Article 15921.3.29.
The cycle makeup and storage, condensate, feedwater, and steam piping shall be hydrostatically
tested with chemically treated water defined as demineralized water with sufficient ammonia to raise
the pH to approximately 10.0.
Water used to test other lines shall be clean, filtered, fresh water (service water or better) and shall be
chemically treated to inhibit biological organisms. Treatment levels shall not exceed 2 mg/L of
residual chlorine.
Testing water shall not be left to stagnate in the lines.
All materials, equipment, tools, instruments, blocking, bracing, bulkheads, blanking plates, and all
labor required to complete the tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. Test water and chemicals
shall be furnished by the Contractor or the Purchaser as specified in Article 15921.1.1.
If any tests reveal unsatisfactory materials of workmanship, such materials or installation shall be
repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Purchaser.
15921.3.31.1 Pressure Testing of Piping. When a test pressure is specified for a piping system in
the Pipeline List, the specified test pressure shall be applied to the system upon completion of
erection. Where no test pressure is specified, pressure testing is not required for that system except
as specified otherwise herein.
Except as otherwise specified herein or in the Pipeline List for "air test," all pressure testing shall be
done hydrostatically in accordance with ASME B31.1. Leaks shall be repaired and the system
retested until accepted by the Purchaser as satisfactory.
All underground piping shall be given a hydrostatic test prior to covering the line.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 173 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Underground fire protection system piping shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with the
referenced standard in Article 15921.1.4. The maximum allowable leakage for joints and for
components other than gaskets or joints shall be as specified in the referenced standard.
The test pressure shall not be applied until the components being hydrostatically tested and the
pressurizing medium are at approximately the same temperature. All expansion joint control rods and
attachments shall be properly adjusted before application of test pressure.
Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the piping being hydrostatically tested.
If required, taps at the high points of the piping systems shall be made and shall be plugged upon
completion of the testing. The addition of high point vents on alloy piping shall be approved by the
Engineer.
Lines to be air tested shall be given an application of a leak detection fluid that shall reveal the
presence of leaks by easily visible means, such as bubble formation.
Where specified in Article 15921.1.1, piping installed under separate specifications shall be
hydrostatically tested under these specifications. If defects are discovered in the piping that has been
installed under separate specifications and tested under these specifications, the Contractor shall
inform the Purchaser, who will instruct the installing contractor to return to the site and locate and
repair all defects. All costs incurred as a result of defects in piping installed under separate
specifications, including costs of subsequent retesting, will be borne by the Contractor who installed
that section of pipe in which the leak was found.
Piping that must be hydrostatically tested, but would be adversely affected by rust as indicated in
Article 15921.1.1 or as directed by the Engineer, shall have a rust preventive added to the test water
and shall be forced-air dried after testing. The chemicals shall be added while the piping system is
being filled. All temporary piping and equipment required for the addition of the chemicals shall be
furnished.
All end closures shall be left in place to prevent foreign materials from entering the piping during other
work. The low points of the piping shall be provided with drain taps and plugs. All plugs in the piping
shall be seal welded.
15921.3.31.2 Not Used.
15921.3.31.3 Leakage Tests. When a leakage test is specified for an AWWA C301 piping system
on the Pipeline List, the specified test pressure shall be applied to the system.
The test pressure shall be maintained within a maximum variation of 5 percent during the entire time
that the line leakage measurements are being taken.
Leakage measurements shall not be started until a constant test pressure has been established.
Compression of air trapped in unvented pipes or fittings will give false leakage readings under
changing pressure conditions. After the test pressure to be used has been established and
stabilized, the line leakage shall be measured by means of a water meter installed on the line side of
the force pump.
Line leakage is defined as the total amount of water introduced into the line as measured by the
meter during the leakage test. No pipeline, or tested section thereof, will be accepted if and while it
has a leakage rate in excess of 4.6 liters per mm of pipe diameter per kilometer of pipe in 24 hours.
All joints in piping shall be watertight and free from visible leaks during the prescribed tests. Each
leak that is discovered within 1 year after final acceptance of the work by the Purchaser shall be
located and repaired by and at the expense of the Contractor.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 174 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
If the leakage test is made after the pipeline has been backfilled and the joints have been covered,
and such test shows a leakage rate in excess of the permissible maximum, the Contractor shall make
all necessary surveys in connection with the location and repair of leaking joints to the extent required
to reduce the total leakage to an acceptable amount.
15921.3.31.4 Not Used.
15921.3.32 Cleaning of Pipe
The inside and outside surfaces of all pipe, tubing, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of all dirt,
sand, loose mill scale, and other foreign materials immediately after removal from storage and before
erection. All lines shall be thoroughly flushed or blown before being placed in service. All fuel gas
and compressed air lines shall be air blown.
The cycle makeup and storage, condensate, feedwater, and steam piping shall be flushed with
chemically treated water defined as demineralized water with sufficient ammonia to raise the pH to
approximately 10.0.
Water used to flush other lines shall be clean, filtered, fresh water (service water or better) and shall
be chemically treated to inhibit biological organisms. Treatment levels shall not exceed 2 mg/L of
residual chlorine.
Flushing water shall not be left to stagnate in the lines.
15921.3.32.1 Not Used.
15921.3.32.2 Not Used.
15921.3.33 Not Used
15921.3.34 Sterilization of Equipment and Piping
The equipment and piping so identified in Article 15921.1.1 shall be disinfected in accordance with
the referenced standards, except as modified herein.
Prior to sterilization, gravity filters, if identified in Article 15921.1.1, shall be backwashed according to
the manufacturer's instruction manual with backwash water supplied from the clearwell. The clearwell
shall be filled from the construction potable water system as required to provide water for
backwashing of the filters. When backwashing is completed, the filters shall be shut down and the
clearwell filled with potable water to the high level alarm point.
Chlorine solution shall be injected into the system while the system is being filled with service water to
achieve not less than 50 mg/L chlorine residual throughout the system. The valves on the highest
portion of the distribution system shall be opened and allowed to remain open until chlorinated water
appears. The branch lines of the distribution system that have long runs of piping shall be vented
until chlorinated water appears at each distribution point. All valves on the distribution system shall
be closed and the system allowed to stand for 24 hours. At the end of this period, the distribution
system water shall be sampled at the various appurtenances for residual chlorine. If chlorine residual
has dropped below 25 mg/L at any point, the entire system shall be drained and the process
repeated. If all appurtenances contain a chlorine residual of 25 mg/L or more, the entire system shall
be drained and refilled with normal chlorinated potable water with a chlorine residual of 1 mg/L if the
system is to be placed into immediate service. If the system is not to be placed into service
immediately, it shall be refilled with potable water containing 5 mg/L of residual chlorine.
Water storage facilities shall be filled to the overflow level with service water containing a minimum
chlorine residual of 10 mg/L. This residual shall be maintained for a 24 hour period. The water
storage facility shall be completely drained and refilled with potable water containing a maximum of
2mg/L residual chlorine.
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 175 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Bacteriological testing is required for both mains and water storage facilities. Mains are to be
sampled 24 hours after disinfection. One sample shall be taken for each 365 m of distribution piping
at points separated by a nominal 365 m distance. Water storage facilities shall be sampled and
tested before any water is allowed to enter the distribution system. Failure to pass the bacteriological
testing requirements for potable water shall be cause for the entire disinfection process to be
repeated. In no event shall the water contained in the distribution system or water storage facility be
used for human consumption before acceptable bacteriological test results are obtained.
15921.3.35 Final Adjustment
After a period of initial operation, all flange bolting shall be checked for tightness, and all hangers
readjusted.
15921.3.36 Not Used
15921.3.37 Not Used
Source: 15921, 2009, v.1.3
Piping Erection
Page 176 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
16920 - Raceway Components and Installation

16920.1 General
The raceway system installation shall be in accordance the technical document Volume : IIF/2
Section-IX Technical Specification for Installation of Cabling, Earthing and Lightning Protection
Systems, Cabling Notes and Details drawings11/2010-K-E-DWG-2340 Sh. 01 through 40, the
drawings and these specifications.
The raceway system is defined to include below grade conduit, duct bank and all materials and
devices required to install, support, secure, and provide a complete system for support and protection
of electrical conductors.
Scope of supply shall include erection of below grade raceway included in this specification and as
Any materials not specified as being furnished by others, but which are required for a complete below
grade raceway installation, shall be furnished.
Above grade raceway.
Below grade raceway component material will be supplied under separate specification
63.2601.
specifications are indicated herein.
govern to the extent of such difference.
Raceway systems and components shall be installed in accordance with the applicable requirements
of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
standards.
Raceway systems and components installed in areas subject to conditions classified in the NEC as
hazardous shall meet the requirements of the NEC for the hazardous condition indicated.
16920.1.5 Not Used
16920.1.6 Not Used
16920.1.7 Not Used
Source: 16920, 2008, v.1.1
Raceway Components and Installation
Page 177 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
16920.2 Not Used

16920.3 Execution
16920.3.1 General Installation Requirements
The installation specifications included in this article apply to all raceway system components.
16920.3.1.1 Not Used.
16920.3.1.2 Not Used.
16920.3.1.3 Not Used.
16920.3.1.4 Not Used.
16920.3.1.5 Not Used.
16920.3.1.6 Sleeves and Openings.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all required sleeves and openings for passage of electrical
raceways. Required openings not provided during structure fabrication shall be provided by the
Contractor using a hacksaw, a hole saw, or a core drill subject to acceptance by the Company.
Openings in concrete floors and walls for single conduits shall be cut by the Contractor with core
drills, and the conduits shall be grouted in place after being installed.
16920.3.2 Not Used
16920.3.3 Conduit Components
16920.3.3.1 Not Used.
16920.3.3.2 Not Used.
16920.3.3.3 Conduit Installation. Conduit and associated components shall be installed as
indicated on the drawings and as described in these specifications.
16920.3.3.3.1 Not used.
16920.3.3.3.2 Not used.
16920.3.3.3.3 Couplings and unions. Rigid metal conduit shall be joined by threaded conduit
couplings with the conduit ends butted. The use of running threads will not be permitted. Where rigid
metal conduit cannot be turned and joined together by standard threaded couplings, conduit unions
may be used. Conduit union coupling nuts shall be installed uppermost on vertical or inclined conduit
runs to prevent the entrance of water into the union.
Plastic conduit shall be joined together in accordance with manufacturer recommendations using
unthreaded couplings and a medium bodied solvent cement. Joining surfaces shall be wiped clean of
dirt, moisture, or other contaminants prior to application of the solvent cement. If joining surfaces are
extremely dirty or coated with oil, a cloth saturated with PVC cleaner shall be used to clean the
surfaces. Joining surfaces shall be thoroughly dried before applying solvent cement.
16920.3.3.3.4 Bends and offsets. A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of
four 90 degree bends. Field bends shall be made without reducing the internal diameter of the
conduit. The center line radius of field bends shall not be less than six times the nominal trade size
diameter of the conduit.
Source: 16920, 2008, v.1.1
Page 178 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
The use of a pipe tee or vise for bending metal conduit will not be permitted.
Plastic conduit bends shall be factory fabricated wherever possible. Where field bending of plastic
conduit is required, the conduit length shall be heated to approximately 135 C. Conduit heating may
be by radiant heat, hot air, or hot liquid immersion. Open flame heating will not be permitted. Special
mandrels or forms shall be used to provide a smooth bend without reduction of the conduit diameter.
Conduit discolored by prolonged heating will not be acceptable.
16920.3.3.3.5 Not used.
16920.3.3.3.6 Cutting and threading. The plane of all conduit ends shall be square and
perpendicular with the center line. The ends of all conduit and tubing shall be reamed to remove all
rough edges and burrs.
Where threads are required, they shall be cut and cleaned prior to conduit reaming. A cutting oil shall
be used in threading operations. The dies shall be kept sharp and provisions shall be made for chip
clearance.
All steel conduit ends, after cutting or threading, shall be regalvanized using a cold galvanizing zinc
rich coating.
16920.3.3.3.7 Not used.
16920.3.3.3.8 Cleaning. Precautions shall be taken to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt, or
concrete in the conduit. Conduit in which water or other foreign materials have been permitted to
accumulate shall be thoroughly cleaned.
16920.3.3.3.9 Not used.
16920.3.3.3.10 Not used.
16920.3.3.3.11 Not used.
16920.3.3.3.12 Below grade conduit. Below grade conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel or rigid
plastic conduit as indicated on the drawings. Aluminum conduit shall not be used for below grade
conduit.
Below grade conduit shall be routed as closely as possible to the general routing and elevations
Conduit riser elbows shall use rigid galvanized steel conduit and shall be concrete encased.
Conduit riser extensions shall be rigid galvanized steel with rigid steel main conduit runs, and may be
rigid galvanized steel or rigid plastic conduit with rigid plastic main conduit runs. Conduit riser
extensions shall be concrete encased. Conduit riser extensions shall terminate 150 mm above
finished building floors or finished grade elevations in yard areas. Conduit extensions shall be
straight and plumb, plugged prior to pouring of concrete, and remain plugged until conduit is extended
later or readied for cable pulling operations. Plugs shall be either threaded plastic or threaded metal
inserts.
Concrete used for encasing below grade conduit shall conform to the requirements of Section 03311 Cast-in-Place Concrete of these specifications. The concrete shall be vibrated to consolidate it
around the conduit and shall be slow cured for several days to provide strength and prevent
shrinkage.
Source: 16920, 2008, v.1.1
Page 179 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Below grade conduit shall be accurately positioned and supported for encasement by plastic conduit
spacers set in the conduit trench, or by steel wire hangers attached to temporary supports laid across
the conduit trench. After the concrete encasement has hardened, the temporary supports and the
exposed portions of the steel wire hangers not encased in concrete shall be removed.
Warning tape shall be placed in a trench directly over direct buried conduit and direct buried cable.
The following requirements also apply to below grade conduit.
16920.3.3.3.12.1 Rigid galvanized steel conduit. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall not be
directly buried in the earth. Single runs of below grade rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be
encased with 75 mm of concrete between the conduit outer walls and earth. Multiple runs of below
grade rigid galvanized steel conduit shall maintain a minimum 50 mm separation between adjacent
conduits to allow for concrete placement. Multiple runs of rigid galvanized steel conduit shall also be
provided with 75 mm of concrete encasement between the conduit outer walls and earth.
16920.3.3.3.12.2 Rigid plastic conduit. Below grade rigid plastic conduit shall not require concrete
encasement, except where roadway crossings or construction traffic warrant its use for strength and
physical protection. Where indicated on the drawings, concrete encasement for plastic conduit shall
have the same spatial and envelope requirements as rigid galvanized steel conduit.
Where rigid plastic conduit is directly buried in the earth, it shall be laid in a graded 75 mm deep
bedding of sand or other finely divided job excavated material free from debris, organic material, and
stones. After placement on the bedding, the conduit shall be covered with backfill to 150 mm above
the conduit. The backfill shall be of the same material as the bedding. Backfill shall be compacted to
meet density requirements of the surrounding earth.
16920.3.4 Not Used
16920.3.5 Not Used
16920.3.6 Not Used
16920.3.7 Electrical Manhole Components
Electrical manholes shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the drawings and the
specifications contained in Specification Section 02581. Electrical manholes may be cast-in-place or
prefabricated structures.
16920.3.7.2 Not Used.
16920.3.7.3 Duct Bank Installation. Each duct bank shall be laid to exact grade in the trench and
the ends shall enter manholes or buildings as indicated on the drawings. No dips or low points which
retain water in any duct will be permitted in ducts between manholes or between buildings and manholes. End bells shall be used on individual plastic ducts, and threaded couplings on individual rigid
steel ducts, at the end of duct banks entering manholes or buildings except where another type of
termination is specified or detailed on the drawings. All field bends and sweeps shall be a minimum
900 mm radius, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
The ends of the individual plastic ducts shall be cleaned and swabbed with joint sealing compound,
and the duct shall then be forced tightly into the coupling to make a watertight connection. The ends
of threaded rigid steel conduit shall be installed in couplings with the conduit ends butted. The
individual ducts shall be laid in place, held by standard spacers placed at 1.5 m intervals, and
secured in place with hemp or sisal twine, or tie wire. The concrete envelope shall be placed after the
individual ducts are securely tied in place and adequately anchored and/or weighted to completely
counteract the buoyancy of the ducts in the fluid concrete. Care shall be taken in pouring the
concrete to prevent the empty ducts from being damaged or displaced, either in grade or alignment.
Source: 16920, 2008, v.1.1
Page 180 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Defective ducts shall not be installed and shall be removed immediately from the site of the work.
Particular care shall be taken to keep concrete or other substances from the inside of the individual
ducts during construction. All magnetic materials installed in a duct bank shall be parallel to the
lengths of the individual ducts.
16920.3.7.4 Testing and Cleaning. After completion of the duct bank and before cable is pulled into
duct banks, each duct shall be thoroughly cleaned. All foreign material, earth, sand, and gravel shall
be removed from the ducts by an acceptable cleaning method. Ducts which will not be used
immediately shall be plugged at each end. A pulling line shall be installed in all unused ducts.
16920.3.7.5 Electrical Manhole Installation. Manholes shall be erected and installed at the
locations and elevations indicated on the drawings. Manhole sides and tops shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Joints shall be watertight. Manhole and duct bank
interfaces shall be watertight. Refer to Section 02581 Electrical Manholes.
16920.3.8 Grout
Grout shall be as specified in 71.0403 General Construction Specification, Section 03611 - Grouting,
and modified as follows:
Nonshrinking grout shall be used whenever the space to be grouted has a thickness
of 50 mm or more and free placement of grout will not be hampered. 23 kg of pea
gravel may be added to each 45 kg of grout materials.
Grout shall be placed in strict accordance with the directions of the manufacturer to
completely fill the openings without voids.
Source: 16920, 2008, v.1.1
Page 181 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
16930 - Grounding Components and Installation

16930.1 General
The grounding system and installation shall be in accordance the technical document Volume : IIF/2
Section-IX Technical Specification for Installation of Cabling, Earthing and Lightning Protection
Systems, Grounding Notes and Details drawings 11/2010-K-E-DWG-2341 Sh 01 through 28, plan
drawings, and these specifications.
Scope of supply shall include erection of a below grade grounding system and all components for
equipment and structures included in this specification.
Any materials not specified as being furnished by others, but which are required for a complete
grounding installation, shall be furnished.
Items furnished by others and not in this scope of supply include the following:
Above grade ground grid system.
Grounding component material will be supplied under separate specification 63.5500.
specifications are indicated herein.
edition and addenda in effect at the date of this document shall apply.
Grounding systems and components furnished with these specifications shall be manufactured in
accordance with applicable standards of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
(IEEE), the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the American Society for Testing
and Materials (ASTM), and Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Grounding systems and
components shall be installed in accordance with the applicable requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC) and the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards and
Vietnam Standard TCXDVN 319:2004: Installation of equipment earthing system for industrial
projects and TCVN 4756 Code for earth connection and "O" connection for electrical equipment.
16930.1.5 Not Used
16930.1.6 Not Used
Testing shall be in accordance with the codes and standards referenced herein.
16930.2 Products
Not used.
Source: 16930, 2011, v.1.4
Components and Installation
Page 182 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
16930.3 Execution
16930.3.1 Grounding Components
A below grade electrical grounding system shall be installed in accordance with the drawings and the
following specifications. Grounding components shall include ground rods, ground conductor and
below grade grounding connections and hardware required for a complete system.
16930.3.2 Grounding Installation
Grounding system components shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and as described in
these specifications.
16930.3.2.1 Conductors. Conductors routed around 90 degree corners shall not be physically
damaged due to an insufficient bending radius.
Damaged ground system conductors shall be repaired or replaced.
16930.3.2.2 Ground Rods. All ground rods shall be located as indicated on the drawings and
installed to the depth indicated. Where the required ground rod length exceeds 3 m, ground rod
standard sections shall be threaded or welded together to provide an extended rod with one true
centerline a minimum of joint resistance. During welding, the ground rod sections being welded shall
be supported by a guide to ensure proper alignment.
16930.3.2.3 Connections. All connections shall be made by the exothermal welding process except
where otherwise indicated on the drawings or in these specifications. All surfaces to be joined by
exothermal welds shall be thoroughly cleaned. Powder cartridges and molds shall be kept dry and
warm. Worn or damaged molds shall not be used.
The manufacturer's instructions on the use of exothermal welding materials shall be followed in all
details.
All exothermally welded connections shall successfully resist moderate hammer blows. Any
connection which fails such test, or which upon inspection indicates a porous or deformed weld, shall
be remade.
All exothermal welds shall encompass 100 percent of the ends of the materials being welded. Welds
that do not meet this requirement shall be remade.
All bolted and screwed connections shall be securely tightened.
Dies used in the compression tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the compression fittings.
The manufacturer's instructions on the use of the compression tools and dies shall be followed in all
details.
16930.3.2.4 Ground Plates. Ground plates embedded in concrete shall be carefully located as
indicated on the drawings and firmly secured to the concrete forms. The threaded holes in the mating
surface of round plates shall be plugged prior to pouring concrete. The grounding conductor attached
to the ground plates shall be inspected prior to the pouring of concrete to ensure a good solid
connection in accordance with industry standards.
16930.3.2.5 Not Used.
16930.3.2.6 Not Used.
16930.3.2.7 Not Used.
Source: 16930, 2011, v.1.4
Page 183 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
16930.3.2.8 Not Used.

16930.3.2.9 Duct Bank and Electrical Manhole Grounding. Two bare copper ground conductors,
equal in size to the ground grid conductors, shall be routed with each duct bank routed outside the
plant grid or outlying grids as indicated on the drawings. The duct bank ground conductors shall be
located at the top of the duct bank and physically separated on each side. The duct bank ground
conductors shall be connected to the plant ground grid and outlying grids at locations where the duct
bank meets the perimeter of the grids, as indicated on the drawings.
A ground conductor, equal in size to the ground grid conductors, shall be installed around the upper
interior of each electrical manhole as indicated on the drawings. This ground conductor shall be
connected to the duct bank ground conductors or ground grids as indicated on the drawings, The
manhole ground conductor shall also be connected to any manhole rebar ground plates, conduit
ground bushings, cable racks, and cable tray located in the electrical manhole.
16930.3.3 Ground System Resistance
All ground resistance measurements shall be made with the Fall of Potential or slope methods as
defined in IEEE 81. Some of the acceptable instruments are as follows:
Advanced Geosciences, Inc., Sting R1, Mini Sting, Super Sting R1, or Super Sting
R8
Iris Instruments, SYSCAL R1 Plus, SYSCAL R2, or SYSCAL Pro
After connection of ground rods to the ground system, the Contractor shall obtain a ground resistance
measurement from a selected location on the ground grid, as indicated on the drawings, using
methods approved by the the Site QA Manager. This data shall be obtained, identified, and recorded.
The ground resistance measurement data may indicate that additional ground rods are required. The
Contractor shall furnish, install, and connect additional ground rods as necessary.
Source: 16930, 2011, v.1.4
Page 184 of 185
Long Phu 1 PPP

172929.71.0402

Client Review Issue

27Oct2011
Attachments
Attachment 1 - Technical Supplemental Specifications
D100 Site Meteorological and Seismic Data
D200 Design Ambients and HVAC Criteria
D300 Property Tables
E100 Wiring Methods, Cable, and Raceway
E210 Electrical Enclosure Assemblies
E220 Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas
E230 Control Panel Receptaclesand Lights
E300 Electronic Systems and Components
E520 Terminal Blocks and Fuse Holders
E530 Electrical Accessories
Q100 General Welding Requirements
Q121
Q123
Q210
Q301
Q302
Q303
Q310
S100
Welding of Carbon, Low Alloy, and Stainless Structural Steel

Welding of Reinforcing Steel
Welding of Power Piping
Manufacturer's Standard Coating
Company/Purchaser/Buyer Specified Exterior Shop Coating
Interior Coatings and Linings
Preservative Coatings
Seismic Design
81112-DS-0054
172929-DM-20S1
81113-DM-0660
Attachments
Page 185 of 185
AmineEpoxy(EPA)/Elastomeric
Polyethylene(SPC)
Project
172929LongPhu1
Description
Amineepoxywithelastomericpolyethylenefinish
Surfaces
Concrete
CoatingSystem
20S1
FirstCoat
Touchup
SecondCoat
VOCLimits
ApprovedProducts
2.83lb/gal(340g/L)
N/A
2.83lb/gal(340g/L)
Manufacturer
FirstCoat
Touchup
SecondCoat
KCCCorrosion
E3.2
Elastoliner1.2
Surface
Preparation
CoatingmanufacturersandproductsotherthanthoselistedhereinaresubjecttoEngineer's
review/approval.
SSPCSP13NACENo.6SurfacePreparationofConcrete,includingthefollowing.Verifysurface
minimumsurfacetensilestrengthof275psi(1,900kPa).Precleantoremoveallgreaseand
oils.SweepblastinaccordancewithASTMD4259toremovelaitanceandweakconcrete.Grind
projectionsflush.Postcleantoremovedirt,dust,andblastmedia.Fillbugholesandvoids,and
smoothoutsurfacewithconcretesurface.
Remarks
TestsurfaceformoistureinaccordancewithASTMD4263.
Donotapplyindirectsunlightorwhenconcreteiswarmingup.Bestresultswillbe
realizedifmaterialisappliedduringsteadyorfallingtemperatureconditionssothe
concreteisnotoutgassingforatleastthefirst8hours.
Uponcompletion,Contractorshallcovercoatedareawithcorrugatedpaperorother
coveringtoprotectagainstdamagebyconstructionpersonnelduringequipmenterection.
DryFilmThickness(DFT)
Generic
Coating
Type
MaximumDFT
Shop(S)or
Field(F)
Applied
MinimumDFT
Remarks
FirstCoat
EPA
8mils(200m)
10mils(250m)
RefertoRemarks
Touchup
SecondCoat
SPC
55mils(1,375m)
65mils(1,625m)
Applyinsuccessive
applicationsof1012mils
(250300m)eachas
recommendedby
manufacturer.
Completed
System
63mils(1,575m)
75mils(1,875m)
REV
DATE
REVISIONSANDRECORDOFISSUE
BLACK&VEATCH
BY
APP
10/14/11
InitialIssue
GMA
REV
DATE
BY
LONGPHU1COALFIREDPP
COATINGSYSTEMDATASHEETSSYSTEM
DrawingNo.
172929DM20S1
RHW
APP
Rev0
EpoxyCoalTar(EPT)/EpoxyCoalTar(EPT)
Project
EnergyStd20388001420
Description
Epoxycoaltarprimerwithepoxycoaltarfinish
Surfaces
Carbonsteel
CoatingSystem
2314
FirstCoat
Touchup
SecondCoat
VOCLimits
2.83lb/gal(340g/L)
2.83lb/gal(340g/L)
ApprovedProducts
CoatingmanufacturersandproductsotherthanthoselistedhereinaresubjecttoEngineer's
review/approval.
Manufacturer
FirstCoat
Touchup
SecondCoat
PPGAmercoat
78HB
78HB
Carboline
Bitumastic300M
Bitumastic300M
SherwinWilliams
TarGuard
TarGuard
Tnemec
Series46H
Series46H
Surface
Preparation
SSPCSP5/NACENo.1WhiteMetalBlastCleaning
Profiledepth2to4mils(50mto100m)
Remarks
ProfiletobeverifiedbyContractorusingASTMD4417MethodC.
WeldstobepreparedinaccordancewithNACERP0178,AppendixC,Designation"C."
DryFilmThickness(DFT)
MaximumDFT
Shop(S)or
Field(F)
Applied
Remarks
8mils(200m)
12mils(300m)
S,F
N/A
N/A
SecondCoat
EPT
8mils(200m)
12mils(300m)
S,F
Completed
16mils(400m)
24mils(600m)
Dryfilmthicknesstobe
verifiedinaccordancewith
SSPCPA2.
Holidaytestingrequiredin
accordancewithNACESP0188
andcoatingmanufacturer's
instructions.
Generic
Coating
Type
MinimumDFT
FirstCoat
EPT
Touchup
System
REV
DATE
BLACK&VEATCH
BY
APP
1
0
08/31/11
06/01/08
GeneralRevision
InitialIssue
GMA
BPL
RHW
RHW
REV
DATE
BY
APP
COATINGSYSTEMDATASHEETSSYSTEM2314
DrawingNo.
81113DM0660
Rev1

71.0402 General Construction - Substructures - Assembly

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

71.0402 General Construction - Substructures - Assembly

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Long Phu 1 Power Plant

General Construction Substructures

Issued for Client Review

02220.3.10 Testing ............................................................................................................................ 12

02371.1.6 Approved Manufacturers of Components ......................................................................... 32

02623.1.3 Performance and Design Requirements........................................................................... 60

02731.3.3 Application ........................................................................................................................ 75

03311.3.3 Formwork .......................................................................................................................... 89

09900.1.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 113

13902.1.2 Items Furnished by Others and Interfaces...................................................................... 131

15270.1.1 Scope of Supply .............................................................................................................. 156

15921.3.28 Installation of Restrained Push-on Joint Pipe ............................................................... 172

E530 Electrical Accessories............................................................................................................. 185

Long Phu 1 PPP

General Construction - Substructures

Client Review Issue

01500 - Technical Scope and System Performance Requirements

Cement for cement-stabilized soil

Excavation - general and trenches

Fill - general fill, structural fill, backfill,

02220, 02315, 02731

Roadway base and subbase

Aggregate surfacing for parking and

Geosynthetics (geonets, geotextiles,

Seeding and Sodding

Drain piping (gravity)

Storm water pipe and culverts

Storm water manholes and catch

Curbs, gutters, and sidewalks

Formwork for concrete

Source: 01500, 2008, v.1.1

Technical Scope and System Performance Requirements

Long Phu 1 PPP

General Construction - Substructures

Client Review Issue

Steel reinforcing for concrete

Concrete curing materials

Grout for pile heads

Coating for Circ water pipe weld joints

Coating for fire protection pipe weld

Coating for concrete chemical sumps

Cathodic protection - passive type

Cathodic protection - active type

Fire Protection - hydrants

Fire Protection Pipe underground

Potable Water Pipe underground

15225, 15226, 15921

Compressed Air Pipe underground

15225, 15226, 15921

Circulating Water Pipe - underground

Cast Iron valves- underground fire

Electrical conduit - underground

Electrical grounding system

01500.2 Drawings and Technical Attachments

Technical Supplemental Specifications

Coating System Data Sheet

Coating System Data Sheet System 2314

Source: 01500, 2008, v.1.1

Technical Scope and System Performance Requirements

Long Phu 1 PPP

General Construction - Substructures

Client Review Issue

02160 - Cement-Stabilized Soil